THIRTY-SECOND  EDITION. 


PART  FIRST. 


JESSE  8.  CTTEYNEY. 


WILLIAM  IT.  WALMSLEY. 


o 

« 


« 

■  k 

1 


b 


A 


A 


PRICED  AND  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 

AND 

DESCRIPTIVE  MANUAL 


OF 


FOR 


DRAWING,  SURVEYING  AND  CIVIL  ENGINEERING. 


%r,1 


ADE,  JMPOF^TED  AND  ^OLD,  ^HOLESALE  AND  JlETAIL 

4 


BY 


A 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO. 

No.  924  Chestnut  Street,  Philadelphia, 

jMELh 

No.  601  Broadway,  New  York. 


1873. 


««• 


7/ib  Catalogue  will  be  Stalled,  to  any  address  for  Ten  Cents.~1iM> 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  In  the  year  1871,  by  Jambs  W,  Queex  &  Co.,  in  the  Office  of  the 

Librarian  of  Congress,  Washington. 


NOTICE.. 


■» 


v 


Having  the  largest  and  best  assorted  Stock  of  Mathematical,  Optical  and  ^ 
Philosophical  Instruments,  both  of  foreign  and  domestic  manufacture,  in  the 
United  States,  we  are  enabled  to  offer  unequalled  facilities  and  inducements  to 
intending  purchasers. 

In  ordering  Instruments  and  materials  from  this  Catalogue,  it  is  merely 
necessary  to  state  the  edition  and  the  numbers  of  the  articles.  All  former 
Editions  are  superseded  by  this. 

All  instruments  and  materials  sold  by  us  are  warranted  perfect  for  the 
purposes  intended ;  and  if  not  found  so  upon  receipt,  should  be  returned  and 
exchanged  for  others. 


The  prices  throughout  the  Catalogue  will  be  strictly  adhered  to. 

When  no  satisfactory  Philadelphia  or  New  York  reference  is  given  by  the 
party  ordering  the  goods,  the  money  should  accompany  the  order ;  but  where 
it  does  not,  (either  from  want  of  confidence  or  other  cause,)  the  goods  will  be 
forwarded  by  express,  with  bill,  C.  0.  D.,  (collect  on  delivery,)  provided  a 
remittance  equal  to  one-third  the  total  amount  of  the  order  is  sent  with  it. 

No  order  for  a  less  amount  than  Twenty-Jive  Dollars  will  be  sent  C'.O.D. 

The  Express  Company’s  charge  for  collecting  and  returning  the  money  on 
C.  0.  D.  bills,  must  be  paid  by  the  party  ordering  the  goods. 

The  safest  and  most  economical  method  of  remitting  money  is  by  Bank 
Draft  or  Post  Office  Order,  made  payable  to  us.  Where  neither  of  these  can 
be  procured,  United  States  or  National  Bank  Notes,  or  Postage  Stamps,  can 
be  sent  by  express  with  safety,  the  sender  prepaying  the  express  charges. 

Goods  ordered  to  be  sent  by  mail  must  be  prepaid,  and  the  return  postage 
included  in  the  remittance. 

All  packing  boxes  will  be  charged  for,  and  all  goods  will  be  packed  with 
the  utmost  care;  but  no  responsibility  will  be  assumed  by  us,  for  breakage  or 
other  damage,  after  a  package  leaves  our  premises,  except  upon  special  con¬ 
tract. 


Samuel  L.  Fox, 

Jesse  S.  Cheyney, 
William  H.  Walmsley, 

Philadelphia,  March  15,  1873. 


Trading  as 

JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO, 

% 


N.  B. — Liberal  discounts  to  dealers. 


PRICED  AND  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


OF 

MATHEMATICAL  INSTRUMENTS 


MATERIALS  FOR  DRAWING,  SURVEYING  AND 
CIVIL  ENGINEERING, 


made,  imported  and  sold,  wholesale  and  retail. 

BT 

JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO. 

No.  924  Chestnut  Street,  Philadelphia, 

AND 

No.  601  Broadway,  New  York. 


Philadelphia,  April  11,  1870. 


C0W5 
Tf) 
i  i&5 

“^3 


On  retiring  from  the  business  which  I  established  in  1853,  and  have  been 
conducting  at  No.  924  Chestnut  Street  since  that  year,  it  gives  me  pleasure 
to  recommend  to  my  friends  and  former  patrons,  my  successors,  and  solicit 
for  them  a  continuance  of  the  favors  so  freely  bestowed  upon  myself. 

The  present  firm  propose  dividing  their  business  into  three  departments, 
each  partner  giving  one  of  those  departments  his  special  care  and  attention. 

Samuel  L.  Pox,  my  former  partner,  will  devote  himself  to  the  Mathe¬ 
matical  Department,  which  will  comprise  Drawing  Instruments,  of  every 
description,  Surveying  Compasses,  Engineer’s  Transits  and  Levels,  Surveying 
Chains,  Tape  Measures,  Drawing  Papers,  and  materials  of  all  kinds  used  by 
engineers  and  draughtsmen 

Jesse  S.  Cheyney,  formerly  Principal  of  Friends’  Select  School,  in  this 
city,  will  take  the  Department  of  Philosophy,  which  will  comprise  Magic 
Lanterns,  Oxy-Calcium  and  Oxy-IIydrogen  Stereoscopticons,  with  Pictures 
and  Illustrations  from  all  countries  and  upon  all  scientific  subjects;  Ther¬ 
mometers,  Barometers,  Globes,  Air  Pumps,  Electric  Machines,  Magnetic 
Apparatus,  &c.,  &c. 

William  H.  Walmsley,  well  known  throughout  the  country  as  a 
Microscopist,  and  also  a  preparer  of  Microscopic  Specimens,  will  take  the 
Department  of  Optics,  which  will  comprise  Spectacles,  Microscopes,  Micro¬ 
scopic  Objects  and  Accessories,  Opera  Glasses,  Spy  Glasses,  Telescopes, 
■Ophthalmoscopes,  &c.,  &c. 

The  new  firm  will  continue  to  issue  Priced  and  Illustrated  Catalogues  as 
follows: — Part  1st.  Mathematics;  Part  2d.  Optics;  Part  3d.  Magic 
Lanterns  and  Stereopticons;  Part  4th.  Philosophical  Instruments. 

Care  will  be  taken  in  each  department  of  the  business  that  the  instru¬ 
ments  manufactured  by  the  firm  shall  be  well  made,  and  accurate  for  the 
purposes  intendedj  and  that  all  new  instruments  and  improvements,  of  both 
European  and  American  manufacture,  shall  be  introduced  with  as  little  delay 
.as  possible. 

JAMES  W.  QUEEN. 


CATALOGUE  OF  MATHEMATICAL  INSTRUMENTS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

MATHEMATICAL  INSTRUMENTS  OF  BRASS. 

FOR  SCHOOLS. 


\ 


i 


00. 


5. 


14. 


No. 


00.  Wood  Dividers,  13  in.  long,  with  crayon  holder,  for  black-board  drawing, 


0 

1*. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

4* 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

10. 

11. 

14. 


Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 


16 

20 

24 

27 

30 

36 


do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 


do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 


do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 


Brass  Dividers,  3J  inches  long,  screw  joint, 


do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 


Do.  4|  do.  do. 

Do.  5|  do.  do. 

Do.  6|  do.  do. 

Do.  4j  do.  rivet  joint, 

Do.  5£  do.  do. 

Do.  cl  do.  do. 

Brass  Dividers,  4|  inches  long,  with  Pen,  and  Pencil  Points  and  Length¬ 
ening  Bar,  ........  t  .  . 

15.  Brass  Dividers,  6  inches  long,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points  and  Lengthen¬ 

ing  Bar, . 

16.  Brass  Dividers,  Needle  Point,  4j  inches  long,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points 

and  Lengthening  Bar, . 


Pricb, 
$1  00 


25 

50 

75 

00 

25 

50 

30 

35 

45 

60 

25 

35 

45 

85 


1  00 


1  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


No.  Pricx. 

17.  Brass  Dividers,  Needle  Point,  6  inches  long,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points 


and  Lengthening  Bar, . $1  00 

18.  Brass  Dividers,  3  inches  long,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points,  ...  75 

19.  Brass  Bow  Pen,  no  spring,  .........  75 

20.  Brass  Bow  Pen,  with  adjusting  screw  and  spring, . 75 

21.  Brass  Bow  Pencil,  no  spring, . 75 


22.  Brass  Bisecting  Dividers, . 

23.  Brass  Proportional  Dividers,  divided  for  lines,  in  case,  . 

24.  Drawing  Pen,  black  handle,  ......•• 

25.  Drawing  Pen,  ivory  handle, . . 

26.  Roulette  for  Dotting  Lines,  with  extra  wheels, . 

27.  furniture  for  Beam  Compass,  of  Brass,  with  adjusting  screw,  in  morocco 

case,  ............. 

28.  Double  Drawing  or  Railroad  Pen,  for  parallel  lines,  brass  mounted, 


75 
2  50 
25 
40 
1  00 

5  50 
2  25 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


5 


OASES  OF  BRASS  DRAWING'  INSTRUMENTS. 

FOK  SCHOOLS. 


No.  Price. 

48.  Wood  Box  ;  containing  pair  4  J  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points, 

and  Crayon  Holder,  ..........  $0  60 

49.  Wood  Box ;  containing  pair  4  J  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points 

and  Lengthening  Bar,  No.  14. 

Ebony  handle  Drawing  Pen,  No.  24. 

Boxwood  Scale,  4  inches  long,  No.  451, . 1  10 


50  and  51. 


55. 


BO.  Wood  Box;  containing  pair  of  4J  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil 
Points  and  Lengthening  Bar,  No.  14. 

Pair  of  3£  inch  plain  Dividers,  No.  5. 

Drawing  Pen,  No.  24. 

Horn  Protractor,  No.  301. 

Boxwood  Scale,  4  inches  long,  No.  451,  ......  1  15 

51.  Rosewood  Box;  containing  pair  of  5i  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil 

Points  and  Lengthening  Bar,  No.  15. 

Pair  of  4£  inch  plain  Dividers,  No.  6. 

Drawing  Pen,  No.  24. 

Horn  Protractor,  No.  301. 

Boxwood  Scale,  6  inches  long,  No.  451,  ...  ...  l  65 

52.  fe  -jne  as  No.  51,  with  Parallel  Ruler, . 1  90 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO  ,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


Prick. 


6 

No. 

55.  Rosewood  Box  ;  containing  pair  of  6  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil 

Points  and  Lengthening  Bar,  No.  15. 

Pair  of  4J  inch  plain  Dividers,  No.  6. 

Pair  of  3£  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points. 

Drawing  Pen,  No.  24. 

Brass  Protractor,  No.  306. 

Horn  Protractor,  No.  301. 

Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long,  No.  401, . 

56.  Same  as  No.  55,  but  with  the  instruments  set  in  a  tray,  so  that  colors,  &c., 

may  be  put  below, . . 


57.  Rosewood  Box;  containing  pair  of  6  inch  Needle  Point  Dividers,  with 
Pen  and  Pencil  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar,  No.  17. 

Pair  of  4J  inch  plain  Dividers,  No.  6. 

Pair  of  inch  Needle  Point  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points. 
Drawing  Pen,  No.  24. 

Brass  Protractor,  No.  306. 

Horn  Protractor,  No.  301. 

Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long,  No.  401, . 


58.  Same  as  No.  57,  but  with  lock  and  key,  and  the  instruments  set  in  a  tray, 

go  that  colors  may  be  put  below,  ....... 

59.  Same  as  No.  58,  with  Patent  Pencil-holder  to  the  6  in.  and  3^  in.  Dividers, 


$3  00 
3  25 


3  25 


3  50 

4  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


'7 


62.  Rosewood  Box,  with  lock  and  key,  the  instruments  set  in  a  tray,  so  that 

colors,  &c.,  may  be  put  below ;  containing: 

Pair  of  6  inch  Needle  Point  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points 
and  Lengthening  Bar,  No.  17. 

Pair  of  4£  inch  plain  Dividers,  No.  6. 

Pair  of  3.J  inch  Needle  Point  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points. 
Spring  Bow  Pen,  with  Needle  Point,  No.  20. 

Drawing  Pen,  No.  24.  , 

Brass  Protractor,  No.  306. 

Horn  Protractor,  No.  301. 

Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long,  No.  401, . 

63.  Same  as  No.  62,  with  Patent  Pencil-holder  to  the  6  in.  and  3£  in.  Dividers, 


64. 


64.  Same  as  No.  62,  with  the  addition  of  a  pair  of  Proportional  Dividers ;  has 
no  brass  Protractor,  but  has  wood  Triangle  and  Irregular  Curves, 

64£.  Same  as  No.  64,  with  Patent  Pencil-holder  to  the  6  in.  and  4 £  in.  Dividers, 


Price. 


I 

$4  25 
5  00 


7  00 
7  50 


8 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  A  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


CHAPTER  II. 


MATHEMATICAL  INSTRUMENTS  OF  GERMAN  SHYER, 


FOR  ACCURATE  DRAFTING. 


No. 

Pricb. 

65. 

Dividers,  German  Silver, 

4  inches  long,  steel  joints,  .... 

$0 

70 

66. 

Do.  do. 

5 

do. 

do.  •  •  •  • 

80 

67. 

Do.  do. 

6 

do. 

do.  •  •  •  • 

1 

00 

68. 

Do.  do. 

7 

do. 

do.  •  •  •  • 

1 

25 

69. 

Do.  do. 

4 

do. 

do.  with  hair  spring 

1 

25 

70. 

Do.  do. 

5 

do. 

do.  do. 

1 

80 

71. 

Do.  do. 

6 

do. 

do.  do. 

2 

50 

vi*. 

German  Silver  Plain  Dividers,  3  inches  loner,  with  handle, 

1 

00 

72. 

Dividers,  German  Silver,  3 

inches  long, 

with  Pen,  Pencil,  and  Needle 

Points,  . 

2 

75 

JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


9 


73.  Dividers,  German  Silver,  6  inches  long,  steel  joints,  with  Pen,  Pencil,  and 

Needle  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar,  .  .  .  .  .  .  $3  50 

74.  Dividers,  German  Silver,  5  inches  long,  steel  joints,  with  shield  for  pocket,  2  00 

75.  Dividers,  German  Silver,  5  inches  long,  steel  joints,  with  three  legs,  .  3  50 


75J.  Proportional  Dividers,  German  Silver,  6£  inches  long,  divided  for  lines,  2  50 

76.  Proportional  Dividers,  German  Silver,  6J  inches  long,  divided  for  lines, 

circles,  plans  and  solids,  .........  3  60 

77.  Bisecting  Dividers,  German  Silver,  ........  1  12 

78.  Spacing  Dividers,  all  steel,  with  Spring  and  Adjusting  Screw,  .  .  1  25 

79.  Pocket  Dividers,  German  Silver,  with  folding  Pen  and  Pencil  Points,  .  5  00 


10  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


No. 

801  Furniture  for  Beam  Compasses,  German  Silver,  with  adjusting  screw,  in 
morocco  case,  ........... 

81.  Bow  Pen,  all  steel,  with  Spring  and  Adjusting  Screw,  . 

82.  Bow  Pen,  German  Silver,  with  Spring  and  Adjusting  Screw,  . 

83.  Bow  Pen,  German  Silver,  with  Spring  and  Adjusting  Screw,  and  with 

Pencil  Point,  . . 


Price. 

$6  50 

1  50 
1  62 

2  50 


84. 

85. 

86. 

87. 

88. 

89. 


Bow  Pencil,  all  steel,  with  Spring  and  Adjusting  Screw, 
Drawing  Pen  for  curves 


Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 


for  heavy  border  lines, . 

medium  finish,  hinge  to  Pen,  .... 
fine  finish,  hinge  to  Pen,  .... 

German  Silver ;  fine  finish,  hinge  to  Pen,  and  Protracting  Pin, 


50 

50 

00 

45 

60 

75 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


» 

11 


No.  Price. 

91.  Drawing  Pen.  German  Silver  ;  fine  finish,  hinge  to  Pen,  German  Silver 

points,  for  red  ink, . $0  75 

92.  Double  Drawing  Pen,  (See  No.  28,  page  2),  .  .  .  .  .  2  25 

93.  Double  Drawing  Pen  or  Road  Pen,  for  parallel  lines,  German  Silver,  .  2  75 

93J  Tripple  Drawing  Pens,  for  drawing  three  parallel  lines  at  one  time,  each,  4  50 

94.  Roulette  for  Dotting  Lines,  .  . .  .  75 

95.  Map  Perambulator,  for  measuring  the  length  of  curved  lines,  rivers, 

railroads,  &c.,  on  maps,  each,  .  . .  1  50 


For  Boxwood  and  Ivory  Scales ,  Protractors ,  fyc.,  §c.,  see  pages  38  to  41. 

Parties  wanting  cases  made  up  of  these  Instruments,  can  select  the  pieces,  by  the 
above  list,  that  are  best  adapted  to  their  purpose,  and  we  will  have  boxes  made  to 
suit,  at  an  additional  cost  of  from  $5  to  $12,  according  to  the  sizes  of  the  boxes, 
which  are  made  of  rosewood,  mahogany  or  walnut,  highly  finished. 


CASES  OF  FINE  GERMAN  SILVER  INSTRUMENTS. 

FOR  ENGINEERS,  ARCHITECTS,  AND  MACHINISTS. 


100.  Morocco  Box  ;  containing  pair  of  5£  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil 

Points.  .  * 

Drawing  Pen,  No.  88. 

Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long,  No.  401, . $3  50 


101.  Morocco  Box ;  containing  pair  of  3  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen,  Pencil  and 
Needle  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar,  No.  72. 

Drawing  Pen,  No.  89. 

No  Scale  or  Protractor, . 


5  00 


12  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


€ 


N®.  Pric*. 

102.  Morocco  Box  ;  containing  pair  of  5  J  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil 
Points. 

Pair  of  5  inch  plain  Dividers,  No.  66. 

Drawing  Pen,  No.  88. 

Ivory  Protractor  Scale,  6  inches  long,  No.  425,  ...  .  $5  00 


103.  Morocco  Box ;  containing  pair  Dividers  6  inches  long,  with  Pen,  Pencil 
and  Needle  Point  and  Lengthening  Bar,  No.  73. 

Pair  plain  Dividers,  5  inches  long,  No.  66. 

Drawing  Pen,  No.  89. 

Ivory  Protractor,  No.  425,  .........  6  50 

103J.  Same  as  No.  103,  but  with  Polished  Walnut  Box,  with  lock  and  key 

and  tray,  ............  9  00 


104. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


No. 

104.  Morocco  Box,  rounded  corners,  for  carrying  in  the  pocket ;  containing 
pair  of  4f  inch  Dividers,  with  Hinge  in  one  Leg,  Needle  Points,  with 
Pen  and  Pencil  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar.  * 

Pair  4  inch  plain  Dividers,  rounded  points. 

Spring  Bow  Pen,  Needle  Point. 

Drawing  Pen,  Ivory  Handle. 

5  inch  Ivory  Rule,  divided  to  eighths,  ...  .  . 


105.  Morocco  Box;  containing  pair  5$  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil 
Points  and  Lengthening  Bar. 

Pair  of  5  inch  plain  Dividers,  No.  66. 

Pair  3  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points. 

Drawing  Pen,  No.  89. 

German  Silver  Protractor,  No.  310. 

German  Silver  Square,  No.  626. 

Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long,  No.  401,  .  . 

105$.  Same  as  No.  105,  but  with  Polished  Walnut  Box,  with  lock  and  key 
and  tray, . 


106.  Morocco  Box  ;  containing  pair  of  5$  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen,  Pencil  and 
Needle  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar,  No.  73. 

Pair  5  inch  plain  Dividers,  No.  66. 

Spring  Bow  Pen,  No.  82. 

Drawing  Pen,  No.  89. 

Ivory  Protractor  Scale,  6  inches  long,  No.  425, . 

106$.  Same  as  No.  106,  in  Polished  Walnut  Box,  with  lock  and  key  and 

tray, . 

106|.  Morocco  Box ;  containing  pair  6  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen,  Pencil  and 
Needle  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar,  No,  73. 
t  Pair  5  inch  plain  Dividers,  No.  66. 

Pair  Spacing  Dividers,  No.  78. 

Bow  Pen,  No.  81. 

Bow  Pencil,  No.  86. 

Drawing  Pen,  No.  88. 

Ivory  Protractor  Scale,  6  inches  long,  No.  425, . 


13 

Pbiob. 


$7  50 


9  60 
11  60 


9  50 

11  50 


10  00 


14 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA 


AND  NEW  YORK. 


No. 


Price. 


107.  Morocco  Box  ;  containing  pair  of  5}  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen,  Pencil  and 

Needle  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar,  No.  73. 

Pair  of  5  inch  plain  Dividers,  No.  66. 

9* Draw 3  1Dph  DlMdeoS’  Wlth  Pen’  Pencil  and  Needle  Point,  No.  72. 

2  Drawing  Pens,  No.  89.  ’ 

German  Silver  Protractor,  No.  310. 

German  Silver  Square,  No.  626. 

Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long,  No.  401 

108.  Same^mstriiments  as  No.  107,  in  Polished  Walnut  Box',  with  lock  and 

r  y  ray’ . 14  50 


$11  00 


109. 


109.  Polished  Walnut  Box  ;  containing  pair  5}  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen,  Penci 
and  Needle  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar,  No.  73, 

Pair  5  inch  plain  Dividers,  No.  66. 

g"5j  °f  ;V^Cp  Divider8,  with  Pen,  Pencil  and  Needle  Points,  No.  72. 
Spring  Bow  Pen,  with  Needle  Point,  No.  82. 

2  Drawing  Pens,  No.  89. 

German  Silver  Square,  No.  626. 

German  Silver  Protractor,  No.  310. 

Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long,  No.  401 

Sambas  No.  109,  in  Polished  WalAut  Box’  with  lock  and  key  and 


109}. 


15  60 
17  60 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NE.W  YORK.  15 


No.  Pricb. 

110.  Polished  "Walnut  Box  ;  containing  pair  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen,  Pencil 
and  Needle  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar,  No.  73. 

Pair  of  5  inch  plain  Dividers,  No.  G6. 

Pair  of  5  inch  Hair  Spring  Dividers,  No.  70. 

Pair  of  3  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen,  Pencil  and  Needle  Points,  No.  72. 

Spring  Bow  Pen,  with  Needle  Point,  No.  82. 

2  Drawing  Pens,  No.  89. 

German  Silver  Square,  No.  626. 

German  Silver  Protractor,  No.  310. 

Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long,  No.  401,  .......  $17  25 


111.  Same  instruments  as  No.  110,  set  in  a  tray,  and  box  with  lock  and  key, 

thus  affording  space  for  extra  instruments  or  colors,  .  .  .  18  75 

112.  Polished  Walnut  Box,  with  lock  and  key  and  tray;  containing  pair 

6  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen,  Pencil  and  Pen  Point  and  Lengthening 
Bar,  No.  73. 

Pair  5  inch  plain  Dividers,  No.  66. 

Pair  5  inch  Hair  Spring  Dividers,  No.  70. 

Pair  3  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen,  Pencil  and  Needle  Point,  No.  72. 

Bow  Pen,  No.  82. 

2  Drawing  Pens.  No.  89. 

1  Red  Ink  Pen,  No.  91. 

1  Road  Pen,  No.  93. 

Pair  Proportional  Dividers,  No.  75j. 

Protractor,  No.  311. 

Triangle,  No.  565. 

Triangular  Scale,  No.  463  or  466,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  27  00 

113.  Same  as  No.  112,  with  addition  of  Beam  Compass,  No.  80,  .  .  .  32  00 


/ 


i 


16  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


114.  Polished  Rosewood  Box,  inlaid,  lock  and  key,  with  tray,  leaving  space 

below  for  paints,  rules,  &c. ;  containing  pair  6\  inch  Needle  Point 
Dividers,  with  Pen,  and  Pencil  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar. 

Pair  4|  inch  plain  Dividers. 

Pair  of  4  inch  Needle  Point  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points. 
Pair  of  7  inch  Proportional  Dividers. 

3  Drawing  Pens. 

Horn  Protractor. 

1  Wood  Curve  and  2  Wood  Squares. 

Spring  Bow  Pen. 

Ivory  Rule,  8  inches  long. 

Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long,  ..... 

115.  Same  as  No.  114,  but  with  Patent  Pencil  Points  to  the  6i  inch  and  4 

inch  Dividers,  ..... 


Price. 


$26  00 
27  00 


116. 


I 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  17 
Fa.  Price. 

116.  Polished  Rosewood  Box,  inlaid,  with  brass  edges,  lock  and  key,  with  tray, 

leaving  space  below  for  paints,  rules,  &c. ;  containing  pair  of  6  inch 
Needle  Point  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points  and  Lengthen¬ 
ing  Bar. 

Pair  inch  plain  Dividers,  rounded  points. 

Pair  of  4  inch  Dividers,  Needle  Points,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points. 

Pair  of  1}  inch  Proportional  Dividers. 

Spring  Bow  Pen,  Needle  Point. 

3  Drawing  Pens. 

Furniture  for  Beam  Compass,  with  Micrometer  Screw. 

9  inch  Horn  Protractor. 

Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long. 

Ivory  Scale,  8  inches  long,  one  edge  divided  to  inches  and  eighths, 

the  other  to  centimeters  and  millimeters,  .....  $31  00 

117.  Same  as  No.  116,  with  Patent  Pencil  Points,  to  the  6  inch  and  4  inch 

Dividers,  .........  .  .  32  00 


CASES  OP  SECOND  QUALITY  GERMAN  SILVER  INSTRUMENTS. 


125. 


125.  Morocco  Box;  containing  pair  of  5J-  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil 

Points. 

Drawing  Pen,  .......... 

126.  Morocco  Box  ;  containing  pair  of  5.^  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil 

Points  and  Lengthening  Bar. 

Pair  of  5  inch  plain  Dividers. 

Drawing  Pen,  ........... 


127.  Morocco  Box  ;  containing  pair  of  5^  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen,  Pencil  and 
Needle  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar. 

Pair  of  5  inch  plain  Dividers. 

2  Drawing  Pens, . . 

2 


$2  00 

3  00 


4  00 


4 


] 


18  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


128.  Morocco  Box  ;  containing  pair  of  5J-  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen,  Pencil  and 
Needle  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar. 

Pair  of  5  inch  plain  Dividers. 

Pair  of  4  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen,  Pencil  and  Needle  Points. 

2  Drawing  Pens, . .  •  •  .  .  $6  50 


129. 


129.  Rosewood  Box ;  containing  pair  of  5£  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  . 
Pencil  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar. 

Pair  of  4J  inch  plain  Dividers. 

Drawing  Pen. 


Horn  Protractor. 

Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long, 


3  50 


130. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  19 

No.  Priob. 

130.  Rosewood  Box ;  containing  pair  of  6  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil 

Points  and  Lengthening  Bar. 

Pair  of  4£  inch  plain  Dividers. 

Pair  of  3£  inch  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points. 

Drawing  Pen. 

Brass  Protractor. 

Horn  Protractor. 

Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long, . $5  25 

131.  Same  as  No.  130,  but  with  the  instruments  set  in  a  tray,  so  that  colors, 

&c.,  may  be  put  below, . 5  75 


132.  Rosewood  Box,  with  lock  and  key  and  the  instruments  set  in  a  tray, 
so  that  colors,  &c.,  may  be  put  below  ;  containing  pair  of  6  inch 
Needle  Point  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points  and  Lengthen¬ 
ing  Bar. 

Pair  of  4£  inch  plain  Dividers. 

Pair  of  3£  inch  Needle  Point  Dividers,  with  Pern  and  Pencil  Points. 

Drawing  Pen. 

Brass  Protractor. 

Horn  Protractor. 

Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long,  .  .  . . 6  25 


133. 


20 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


No. 

133.  Rosewood  Box,  with  lock  and  key,  the  instruments  set  in  a  tray,  so  that 
colors,  &c.,  may  be  put  below  ;  containing  pair  of  6  inch  Needle 
Point  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar. 
Pair  of  4.j  inch  plain  Dividers. 

Pair  of  3^  inch  Needle  Point  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points. 
Spring  Bow  Pen,  with  Needle  Point. 

Drawing  Pen. 

Brass  Protractor. 

Horn  Protractor. 

Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long, . 


134. 


134.  Rosewood  Box,  with  lock  and  key,  the  instruments  set  in  a  tray,  so  that 
colors,  &c.,  may  be  put  below  ;  containing  pair  of  6  inch  Needle  Point 
Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar. 

Pair  of  4^  inch  plain  Dividers. 

Pair  of  inch  Needle  Point  Dividers,  with  Pen  and  Pencil  Points. 
Spring  Bow  Pen,  with  Needle  Point. 

Drawing  Pen. 

German  Silver  Protractor. 

Horn  Protractor. 

Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long. 

Irregular  Curve  of  Wood. 

2  Triangles  of  Wood. 

Pair  Proportional  Dividers,  7£  inches  long, . 


Price. 


$7  75 


II  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  21 


CHAPTER  III. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.  ARE  SOLE  AGENTS  BY  APPOINTMENT  IN 
PHILADELPHIA,  AND  PRINCIPAL  AGENTS  IN  THE 
UNITED*  STATES,  FOR  THE 

CELEBRATED  SWISS  DRAWING  INSTRUMENTS. 


Although  there  are  several  makers  of  drawing  instruments  in  Switzerland,  yet  there 
is  but  one  manufacturer  whose  instruments  uniformly  come  up  to  a  standard  of  ab¬ 
solute  perfection  in  quality  of  material  and  excellence  of  finish.  The  divider  joints 
work  regularly  and  smoothly,  the  points  are  carefully  tempered  and  rounded,  the 
pens  dressed  to  draw  a  smooth  line  of  any  thickness  in  whatever  position  held. 

Other  Swiss  manufacturers  imitate  the  form  of  these  instruments,  but  cannot  imi¬ 
tate  their  perfection  in  finish. 


145.  143. 


150. 


151. 


15 


No. 

145.  Plain  Dividers,  4.}  inches  long,  each, . 

146.  Plain  Dividers,  5  inches  long,  each, . 

147.  Plain  Dividers,  6  inches  long,  each, . 

148.  Hair  Spring  Dividers,  4£  inches  long,  each, . 

149.  Hair  Spring  Dividers,  5  to  6  inches  long,  each,  . 

150.  Dividers,  63  inches  long,  with  Pen,  Pencil,  Needle  Points  and  Lengthen¬ 

ing  Bar, . . 

151.  Dividers,  6j  inches  long,  with  fixed  Needle  Point  and  Loose  Pen,  and 

Pen  Points  and  Lengthening  Bar, . 

152.  Dividers,  inches  long,  joints  in  each  leg,  with  Pen,  Pencil,  Needle 

Points,  Dotting  Pen  and  Lengthening  Bar, . 


Price. 
$1  90 
2  25 
2  70 

2  05 

3  00 

8  60 
6  76* 
11  00 


22  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


153. 


154. 


No. 

153.  Dividers,  4  inches  long,  with  Pen,  Pencil  and  Needle  Points, 

154.  Dividers,  4  inches  long,  with  fixed  Needle  Point,  and  Pen  and  Pencil 

Points,  changeable . 


155.  156. 


155.  Dividers,  4  inches  long,  with  two  fixed  Needle  Points,  . 

.  156.  Dividers,  4  inches  long,  with  fixed  Needle  Point  and  Pen  Point,  . 

157.  Dividers,  4  inches  long,  with  fixed  Needle  Point  and  Pencil  Point, 

158.  Dividers,  4  inches  long,  with  Spring  and  Set  Screw,  Needle  Point,  Pencil 

Point  and  two  Pen  Points, . . 


Prick. 
$6  00 

5  25 


3  25 
3  60 
3  60 

8  50 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


23 


159. 


WO. 

159.  Proportional  Dividers,  6J  inches  long,  finely  graduated  for  lines,  . 

160.  Proportional  Dividers,  inches  long,  finely  graduated  for  lines  and 

polygons,  . . ;  . 

161.  Proportional  Dividers,  9  inches  long,  finely  graduated  for  lines  and 

polygons, . 

162.  Proportional  Dividers,  9  inches  long,  with  micrometer  adjustment,  finely 

graduated  for  lines  and  polygons, . 

163.  Proportional  Dividers,  8  inches  long,  with  rack  adjustment,  graduated 

for  lines, . 

164.  Bisecting  Dividers,  7J  inches  long,  each, . 


Price. 
$8  75 

10  00 

12  25 

14  75 

12  75 
4  30 


24 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


165.  Pocket  Dividers,  5  to  6  inches  long,  with  sheath,  each, 

166.  Three-Legged  Dividers,  5  to  6  inches  long,  each,  . 


Price. 
$3  00 
5  25 


167. 


168. 


169. 


167.  Steel-Spacing  Dividers,  5 

168.  Do.  do.  3J 

169.  Do.  do.  31 


inches  long,  with  Ivory  Handle,  . 

do.  with  Ivory  or  Metal  Handle,  . 

do.  with  Ivory  Handle  and  Needle 

Points,  . 


3  20 
1  70 

3  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


25 


170. 

No. 

170.  Beam  Compass,  20  inches  long,  in  2  bars,  with  Pen,  Pencil,  and  two 

Straight  Points,  ....... 

171.  Beam  Compass,  21  inches  long,  in  3  bars, 

172.  Do.  36  do.  4  do.  ... 

173.  Do.  54  do.  4  do. 

174.  Furniture  for  Wood  Bar  Beam  Compasses,  in  morocco  box, 


Price. 

$11  50 
13  00 
19  00 
22  50 
8  75 


i 


26  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  00.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


No.  Pricx. 

175.  Furniture  for  Wood  Bar  Beam  Compasses,  not  in  morocco  box,  .  .  $8  30 

178.  Boxwood  Bar,  24  inches  long,  divided, . .  2  50 

179.  Pillar  Compasses,  or  Pocket  Set  of  Instruments,  with  Points  to  change,  8  50 

180.  Pillar  Compasses,  or  Pocket  Set  of  Instruments,  with  Points  to  change, 

and  Handles  to  Bow  Pen  and  Pencil,  .  .  .  .  ,  10  00 

181.  Pillar  Compasses,  or  Pocket  Set  of  Instruments,  with  Points  to  turn,  9  00 


182. 


182.  Spring  Bow  Pen,  all  steel,  Ivory  Handle, . 2  25 


183. 

Do. 

do. 

with  Needle  Point,  all  steel,  Ivory  Handle, 

. 

3  00 

184. 

Do. 

do. 

German  Silver, . 

2  65 

185. 

Do. 

do. 

do.  with  Pencil  Point, 

3  60 

186.  All  Steel  Spring  Bow  Pencil,  Ivory  Handle,  .  .  , 

187.  Do.  do.  do.  do.  Needle  Point, 

188.  Drawing  Pen,  4J  inches  long,  with  joints, 

189.  Do.  5J  do.  do. 

190.  Do.  do.  do.  .  .  . 


2  25 

3  00 
1  60 
1  70 
1  95 


I 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  27 


191.  192.  193. 

No. 

191.  Road,  or  Double  Drawing  Pen,  .... 

192.  Do.  do.  do.  with  joint  in  each  side, 

193.  Dotting  Pen,  with  one  wheel,  .... 

194.  Do.  with  six  wheels,  .... 

195.  Horn  Centre,  with  German  Silver  edges, 

196.  German  Silver  Centre,  with  handle, 

197.  Do.  Fastening  Tacks,  per  dozen,  . 

198.  Steel  Fastening  Tacks,  per  dozen,  .... 


Price. 

$4  15 

3  80 
2  65 

4  00 
60 
30 
80 
80 


199a. 


199b, 


199o. 


28  JAMES  \V.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


No.  199f.  Price 

199.  Irregular  Curves  of  Horn,  each,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  $0  7  > 

200.  Rolling  Parallel  Rule,  ebony,  ........  3  ?•> 

201.  Polar  Planimeter,  with  printed  instructions,  .  .  .  .  .  .  35  CO 

202.  Eccentric  Rule,  11  inches  long,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  2  Go 


For  Boxwood  and  Ivory  Scales,  Protractors,  Sfc.,  $c.,  see  pages  38  to  42. 

Parties  wanting  eases  made  up  of  these  Instruments,  can  select  the  pieces,  by  the 
above  list,  that  are  best  adapted  to  their  purpose,  and  we  will  have  boxes  made  to  suit, 
at  an  additional  cost  of  from  $7  to  $15,  according  to  the  size  of  the  boxes,  which  are 
made  of  rosewood,  mahogany  or  walnut,  highly  finished. 


k 

JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  29 

AMSLEB’S  POLAB  PLANIMETEB. 


No.  201 


30  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


SETS  OF  EXTRA  FINE  SWISS  DRAWING  INSTRUMENTS. 


No.  Priob. 

The  following  sets  have  beautifully  finished  Walnut  Boxes,  9£  inches 
long  by  6  inches  wide,  with  lock  and  key  and  tray. 

250.  Contains  pair  plain  Dividers,  No.  146. 

Set  of  Instruments,  No.  150. 

Steel  Spacing  Divider,  No.  168. 

Steel  Bow-Pen,  No.  182. 

Steel  Bow-Pcncil,  No.  186. 

Drawing  Pen,  No.  189. 

Triangular  Scale,  No.  464  or  467,  .  .  .  .  «  .  .  $25  00 

251.  Contains  pair  plain  Dividers,  No.  146. 

Set  of  Instruments,  No.  150. 

Do.  No.  153. 

Drawing  Pen,  No.  188. 

Do.  No.  190. 

Triangular  Scale,  No.  464  or  467,  .  .  .  .  *  ,  .  26  50 


253.  Contains  pair  plain  Dividers,  No.  146. 

Set  of  Instruments,  No.  150. 

Do.  No.  153. 

Bow  Pen,  No.  184. 

Drawing  Pen,  No.  188. 

Do.  No.  190. 

Triangular  Scale,  No.  464  or  467.  .  .  •  •  •  »  .  29  CO 

254.  Contains  pair  plain  Dividers,  No.  146. 

Pair  Hair  Spring  Dividers,  No.  149. 

Set  of  Instruments,  No.  150. 

Steel  Spacing  Dividers,  No.  168. 

Steel  Bow  Pen,  No.  182. 

Steel  Bow  Pencil,  No.  186. 

Drawing  Pen,  No.  188. 

Do.  No.  190. 

Triangular  Scale,  No.  464  or  467, 


30  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  31 
No.  Price. 

255.  Contains  pair  plain  Dividers,  No.  146. 

Pair  Hair  Spring  Dividers,  No.  149. 

Set  of  Instruments,  Nos.  150  and  153. 

Bow  Pen,  No.  184. 

Drawing  Pens,  Nos.  188  and  190. 

Triangular  Scale,  No.  464  or  467, . $33  00 


260. 


The  following  sets  have  beautifully  finished  Walnut  Boxes,  13  inches 
long  by  6  inches  wide,  with  lock  and  key  and  tray. 

260.  Contains  pair  plain  Dividers,  No.  146. 

Set  of  Instruments,  No.  150. 

Steel  Bow  Pen,  No.  182. 

Drawing  Pens,  Nos.  188  and  189. 

Triangular  Scale,  No.  463  or  466,  .  .  •  .  •  '  •  .  23  00 

261.  Contains  pair  plain  Dividers,  No.  146. 

Set  of  Instruments,  Nos.  150  and  153. 

Steel  Bow  Pen,  No.  182. 

Steel  Bow  Pencil,  No.  186. 

Drawing  Pens,  Nos.  188  and  189. 

Triangular  Scale,  No.  463  or  466,  31  50 


The  following  sets  have  beautifully  finished  Rosewood  Boxes,  13  inches 
long  by  7£  inches  wide,  with  lock  and  key  and  tray. 

262.  Contains  pair  plain  Dividers,  No.  146. 

Pair  Hair  Spring  Dividers,  No.  149. 

Set  of  Instruments,  Nos.  150  and  153. 

Pair  Steel  Spacing  Dividers,  No.  168. 

Steel  Bow  Pen,  No.  182. 

Steel  Bow  Pencil,  No.  186. 

Drawing  Pens,  Nos.  188,  189,  and  190. 

Triangular  Scale,  No.  463  or  466, 


39  00 


32  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 

•  Pricb. 

263.  Contains  pair  plain  Dividers,  No.  146. 

Pair  Hair  Spring  Dividers,  No.  149. 

Set  of  Instruments,  Nos.  150  and  153. 

Proportional  Dividers,  No.  159. 

Steel  Spacing  Dividers,  No.  168. 

Steel  Bow  Pen,  No.  182. 

Steel  Bow  Pencil,  No.  186. 

Drawing  Pens,  Nos.  188,  189,  and  190. 

Triangular  Scale,  No.  463  or  466, . $49  00 


264. 


264.  Contains  pair  plain  Dividers,  No.  146. 
Pair  Hair  Spring  Dividers,  No.  149. 
Set  of  Instruments,  Nos.  150  and  153. 
Proportional  Dividers,  No.  160. 

Steel  Spacing  Dividers,  No.  168. 

Steel  Bow  Pen,  No.  182. 

Steel  Bow  Pencil,  No.  186. 

Beam  Compass,  No.  171. 

Drawing  Pens,  Nos.  188,  189,  and  190. 
Road  Pen,  No.  192. 

Dotting  Pen,  No.  193. 

Triangular  Scale,  No.  463  or  466, 


70  00 


Mo. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


33 

Prick. 


The  following  set  has  beautifully  finished  Rosewood  Box,  15£  inches  long 
by  10  inches  wide,  with  lock  and  key  and  tray,  and  lined  with  finest 
silk  velvet. 

285.  Contains  pair  plain  Dividers,  No.  146. 

Pair  Hair  Spring  Dividers,  No.  149. 

Set  of  Instruments,  No.  152. 

Proportional  Dividers,  No.  162. 

Steel  Spacing  Dividers,  Nos.  167  and  168. 

Beam  Compass,  No.  172. 

Steel  Bow  Pen,  No.  182. 

Set  of  Instruments,  No.  158. 

Steel  Bow  Pencil,  No.  186. 

Drawing  Pens,  Nos.  188,  189  and  190. 

Road  Pen,  No.  191. 

Dotting  Pen  with  6  wheels,  No.  194. 

Protractor. 

Triangular  Scale,  No.  463  or  466. 

Set  of  Color  Cups, . $105  00 


CHAPTER  IV. 

ALTENEDER’S  PATENT  JOINT  DRAWING  INSTRUMENTS. 


The  excellency  of  these  instruments  consists  in  the  joints  of  the  dividers  being  so 
constructed  as  to  prevent  any  irregular  motion  when  the  legs  are  opened  or  closed, 
also  for  the  general  care  with  which  the  instruments  are  finished. 

All  the  pens  are  thoroughly  well  made  and  pointed.  No.  275  represents  a  sectional 
view  of  Alteneder’s  Patent  Joint  Divider  Head. 


876.  Plain  Dividers  of  German  Silver,  inches  long,  with  Altenedcr’s  patent 
joint,  each, . . 


3 


$2  30 


34  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


No. 

2 77.  Plain  Dividers  of  German  Silver,  5  inches  long,  with  Alteneder’s  patent 
joint,  each,  ............ 

.278.  Plain  Dividers  of  German  Silver,  6  inches  long,  with  Alteneder’s  patent 
joint,  each,  ............ 

279.  Hair  Spring  Dividers  of  German  Silver,  3£  inches  long,  with  Altene¬ 

der’s  patent  joint,  each,  ......... 

280.  Hair  Spring  Dividers  of  German  Silver,  5  inches  long,  with  Alteneder’s 

patent  joint,  each,  .......... 

281.  Hair  Spring  Dividers  of  German  Silver,  6  inches  long,  with  Alteneder’s 

patent  joint,  each, . .  .  .  .  . 

282.  Needle  Point  Dividers,  3£  inches  long,  of  German  Silver,  with  Pencil 

Point  and  Alteneder’s  patent  joint,  each,  ...... 

283.  Needle  Point  Dividers,  3£  inches  long,  of  German  Silver,  with  Alteneder’s 

patent  joint,  each,  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 

284.  Needle  Point  Dividers,  6  inches  long,  of  German  Silver,  with  Pen  and 

Pencil  Point  and  Lengthening  Bar,  and  Alteneder’s  patent  joint,  . 
.284^.  Needle  Point  Dividers,  3^  inches  long,  of  German  Silver,  with  Pen  and 
Pencil  Point,  and  Alteneder’s  patent  joint,  ..... 

285.  Steel  Spacing  Dividers,  3  inches  long, . 

286.  Steel  Bow  Pen,  3  inches  long,  round  points, . 

287.  Do.  Pen,  3  inches  long,  with  Needle  Point, . 

288.  Do.  Pencil,  3  inches  long,  with  round  point,  . 

289.  Do.  Pencil,  3  inches  long,  with  Needle  Point,  . 

290.  Drawing  Pens,  4£  inches  long, . 

291.  Do.  5f  do.  . 

292.  Do.  6|  do.  . . 


Pma*. 


$2  90 
3  25 

3  75 

4  00 

4  25 

4  50 

4  75 

8  00 

6  35 
2  00 

2  50 

3  25 

2  50 

3  26 
1  60 
1  70 
1  95 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YOKK.  35 

CHAPTER  V. 

PROTRACTORS  OF  HORN,  BRASS,  AND  GERMAN  SILVER, 


301.  307. 


No. 

Price. 

300. 

Railroad  Curve  Protractor,  of  horn,  8  inches  diameter,  having  laid  off  on 

it  twenty-three  curves  from  k  degree  to 

8  degrees,  with  a  radius  of 

400  feet  to  the  inch, 

$2  00 

301. 

Horn  Protractor, 

4  inches  diameter,  half  circle,  whole  degrees, 

20 

302. 

Do. 

5 

do. 

do. 

half  degrees, 

35 

303. 

Do. 

6 

do. 

do. 

do. 

45 

304. 

Do. 

7 

do. 

do. 

do. 

75 

305. 

Do. 

8 

do. 

do. 

do. 

1  00 

306. 

Brass  Protractor, 4 

do. 

do. 

whole  degrees, 

20 

307. 

Do. 

4 

do. 

do. 

half  degrees, 

40 

308. 

Do. 

5 

do. 

do. 

do. 

60 

309. 

Do. 

6 

do. 

do. 

do. 

75 

310. 

German  Silver  Protractor,  4  inches  diameter,  half  circle,  whole  degrees, 

50 

311. 

Do. 

do. 

5 

do. 

do.  half  degrees,  . 

1  00 

312. 

Do. 

do. 

6 

do. 

do.  do. 

1  25 

313. 

Do. 

do. 

7 

do. 

do.  do. 

1  50 

314. 

Do. 

do. 

5 

do. 

do.  bev.  edge,  half  deg. 

1  50 

315. 

Do. 

do. 

6 

do. 

do.  do.  do. 

2  00 

316. 

Do. 

do. 

7 

do. 

do.  do.  do. 

3  00 

EXTEA  PINE  SWISS  PEOTEAOTOES. 


330.  334. 

330.  Protractor,  4  inches  diameter,  J  circle,  whole  degrees,  centre  on  outer  edge,  1  90 


331. 

Do. 

5 

do. 

* 

do. 

* 

do. 

do. 

do. 

2 

50 

332. 

Do. 

6 

do. 

I 

do. 

f 

do. 

do. 

do. 

3 

20 

333. 

Do. 

6 

do. 

do. 

i 

do. 

do. 

do. 

3 

90 

33-4. 

Do. 

5 

do. 

1 

do. 

I 

do. 

do. 

inner  edge, 

2 

50 

335. 

Do. 

6 

do. 

{ 

do. 

I 

do. 

do. 

do. 

3 

50 

336. 

Do. 

6 

do. 

i 

do. 

i 

do. 

do. 

do. 

4 

60 

36  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


EXTRA  FINE  SWISS  PROTRAOTORS  OF  GERMAN  SILVER, 

WITH  ARMS. 


350. 


No. 

350.  German  Silver  Protractor,  5  inches  diameter,  half  circle,  with  Arm  and 
divided  in  half  degrees,  .  . . 

3r»l.  German  Silver  Protractor,  6  inches  diameter,  half  circle,  with  Arm  and 
divided  in  half  degrees,  ......... 

362.  German  Silver  Protractor,  7  inches  diameter,  half  circle,  with  Arm  and 
divided  in  half  degrees,  ......... 

354.  German  Silver  Protractor,  8  inches  diameter,  half  circle,  with  Arm  and 
divided  in  half  degrees, . 


3|60.  German  Silver  Protractor,  5  inches  diameter,  whole  circle,  with  Arm 
and  divided  in  half  degrees,  . . 

361.  German  Silver  Protractor,  6  inches  diameter,  whole  circle,  with  Arm 

and  divided  in  half  degrees,  ........ 

362.  German  Silver  Protractor,  7  inches  diameter,  whole  circle,  with  Arm 

and  divided  in  half  degrees,  ........ 

363.  German  Silver  Protractor,  8  inches  diameter,  whole  circle,  with  Arm 

and  divided  in  half  degrees, . 


Pint. 
$7  00 
8  00 
10  00 
12  00 


10  00 
12  00 
14  00 


16  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  37 


EXTEA  PINE  SWISS  PEOTEAOTOES  OF  GEEMAN  SILVER,  WITH 

AEMS  AND  VEENIEES. 


370. 

No.  Pane. 

370.  Protractor,  5£  inches  diameter,  half  circle,  half  degrees,  with  vernier 

reading  to  three  minutes, . $11  00 

371.  Protractor,  8  inches  diameter,  half  circle,  quarter  degrees,  with  vernier 

reading  to  one  minute,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  14  60 

372.  Protractor,  10  inches  diameter,  half  circle,  quarter  degrees,  with  vernier 

reading  to  one  minute, . 18  00 


373. 


373.  Protractor,  5£  inches  diameter,  whole  circle,  half  degrees,  with  vernier 

reading  to  three  minutes,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  14  60 

374.  Protractor,  8  inches  diameter,  whole  circle,  quarter  degrees,  with  ver¬ 

nier  reading  to  one  minute, . 16  25 

376.  Protractor,  10  inches  diameter,  whole  circle,  quarter  degrees,  with  ver¬ 
nier  reading  to  one  minute, .  20  00 


38  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

IVORY  SECTORS,  SCALES,  AND  PROTRACTORS. 


No.  400. 


401. 


Price. 


400.  Ivory  Sector,  6  inches  long,  opens  to  12  inches  long,  .  .  .  $2  00 

401.  Ivory  Scale,  6  inches  long,  for  school  drawing,  .....  60 


IVORY  CHAIN  SCALES. 


402. 

402.  Ivory  Chain  Scales,  12  inches  long,  graduated  on  two  edges  with  either 
10  and  10  parts,  or  10  and  ?0,  or  20  and  40,  or  30  and  50,  or  40  and 


60,  or  50  and  60,  each, . 2  75 

403.  Do.  do.  do.  with  40  and  80,  or  50  and  100,  each,  6  00 

404.  Do.  do.  do.  with  80  and  100,  each,  .  .  .  6  50 

405.  Ivory  Off  Set  Scales,  2  inches  long,  10  by  10,  10  by  20,  20  by  40, 

30  by  50,  40  by  60,  each, . 60 


ARCHITECTS’  IVORY  SCALES. 


406.  Ivory  Scale,  12  inches  long,  with  16  scales,  as  follows  :  b  h  !>  i> 

|,  1,  If,  If,  If,  2,  2f,  2f  and  3  inches  to  the  foot,  the  first  division  of 
each  scale  subdivided  in  12  parts,  each,  ...... 

407.  Same  as  No.  406,  but  with  the  first  division  of  each  scale  subdivided 

into  10  parts,  each,  .......... 

408.  Ivory  Scale,  12  inches  long,  with  12  scales,  as  follows  :  b  A,  h  I)  l> 

1,  If,  If,  If,  2  and  3  inches  to  the  foot,  the  first  division  of  each  scale 
subdivided  into  12  parts,  diagonal  scale  reading  to  yf^  and  of 
an  inch,  each,  ......... 

409.  Same  as  No.  408,  but  has  the  first  division  of  each  scale  subdivided 

into  10  parts,  each,  .......... 


410.  Ivory  Scale,  12  inches  long,  one  side  rounded  the  other  flat,  with  the 

following  scales,  the  graduations  of  which  are  all  brought  to  the  edge : 
A>  b  A-  h  h  b  i  I)  b  1,  1?,  H,  If,  2,  2f  and  3  inches  to  the  foot,  the 
first  division  of  each  scale  is  subdivided  into  twelve  parts,  each, 

411.  Same  as  No.  410,  but  the  first  division  of  each  scale  subdivided  into  ten 

parts,  each,  . . . 


2  75 
2  75 

2  75 
2  75 


2  75 
2  75 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 

IYOEY  PKOTKACTOBS. 


39 


425  Ivory  Rectangular  Protractor,  6  inches  long,  If  inches  wide,  with  scales 

as  follows :  front  sides  divided  around  edge  from  0  to  180  degrees 
in  single  degrees,  scales  of  b  b  f  and  1  inch  to  the  foot,  and  scale 
of  chords.  Reverse  side  scales  of  30,  35,  40,  45,  50  and  60  parts  to 
the  inch,  scale  of  chords  and  diagonal  scale  of  inches  and  y^ths, 

426  Ivory  Rectangular  Protractor,  6  inches  long  by  If  inches  wide,  with 

scales  as  follows:  front  side,  the  edge  divided  in  single  degrees  from 
0  to  180  degrees,  scales  of  f,  b  f,  f,  i  and  1  inch  to  the  foot,  and 
scale  of  chords.  On  the  reverse  side,  scales  of  30,  35,  40,  45,  50  and 
60  parts  to  the  inch,  scale  of  chords  and  diagonal  scale  of  y^ths,  . 

427.  Ivory  Rectangular  Protractor,  6  inches  long  by  2  inches  wide,  with  scales 

as  follows  :  front  side,  the  edge  divided  in  single  degrees  from  0  to  180 
degrees,  scales  of  |,  },  #,  J,  bhhH,  U^ches  to  the  foot,  scale  of 
chords,  and  line  of  40  parts  on  lower  edge.  On  the  reverse  side,  scales  ot 
20  25,  30,  35,  40,  45,  50,  60  parts  to  the  inch,  diagonal  scale  of  y-Jyjths, 

428.  Ivory  Rectangular  Protractor,  same  as  No.  427,  but  has  the  Protractor 

divided  in  A  degrees, . 

429.  Ivory  Rectangular  Protractor,  6  inches  long  by  2£  inches  wide,  with 

scales  as  follows:  front  side,  the  edge  divided  in  £  degrees  from  0  to 
180  degrees,  scales  of  b  b  |,  £,  f,  f,  l,  1,  Hi  if)  1£  inches  to  the 
foot,  scale  of  chords,  and  scale  of  40  parts  on  lower  edge.  Reverse 
side,  scales  of  10,  15,  20,  25,  30,  35,  40,  45,  50,  60  parts  to  the  inch, 

and  diagonal  scale  of  y^ths,  .  •  •  •  • 

430  Ivory  Rectangular  Protractor,  6  inches  long  by  2£  inches  wide,  with 
scales  as  follows :  front  side,  the  edge  divided  in  £  degrees  from  0  to  180 
degrees,  scales  of  i,  b  f,  b  |,  hi,  1,  U,  H,  H,  U  inches  to  the  foot,  scale 
of  chords,  and  scale  of  40  parts  on  lower  edge.  Reverse  side,  scales  ot 
20  25,  30,  35,  40,  45,  50  and  60  parts  to  the  inch,  2  scales  of  chords, 
scales’of  latitudes,  sines,  tangents,  hours,  longitudes,  secants,  rhombs, 

431.  Ivory  Rectangular  Protractor,  8  inches  long  by  2  inches  wide,  with  scales 

as  follows  :  front  side,  the  edge  divided  in  £  degrees  from  0  to  180  de- 
grees,  scales  of*,  *,  f,  b  f,i  h  1  inch  to  the  foot,  sc  ale  of  < chords; and 
scale  of  40  parts  on  lower  edge.  Reverse  side,  scales  of  30,  35, 40,  45, 
50  60  parts  to  the  inch,  scale  of  chords  and  diagonal  scale  of  y^jths, 

432.  Ivory  Rectangular  Protractor,  12  inches  long  by  2|  inches  wide,  with 

scales  as  follows  :  the  edge  divided  in  \  degrees  from  0  to  180  degrees, 
scales  of  J,  h  I,  b  i  l  h  1,  4>  U,  scale  of  chords  and  scale  of 

40  on  lower  edge.  Reverse  side,  scales  of  10,  15,  20,  25,  30,35,  40,  45, 
50,  60  parts  to  the  inch,  scale  of  chords  and  diagonal  scale  of  y^5ths, 


Price. 

$1  50 

2  25 

3  00 
8  75 


4  25 


5  75 

4  75 

II  00 


40  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

BOXWOOD  SCALES  AND  PB0TKACT0KS. 

No. 

450.  Boxwood  Protractor,  6  inches  long,  If  inches  wide,  whole  degrees,  with 

6  scales  of  equal  parts,  4  scales  of  feet  and  inches,  2  scales  of  chords, 
and  diagonal  scale,  .......... 

451.  Boxwood  Scale,  G  inches  long,  same  as  in  School  Cases  of  Instruments, 


452. 

452.  Boxwood  Chain  Scale,  12  inches  long,  graduated  on  two  edges  with  either 

10  and  10  parts,  or  with  10  and  20  parts,  orwith  20and  40  parts,  or  with 
30  and  5'  parts,  or  with  40  and  60  parts,  or  with  50  and  60  parts, 

453.  Boxwood  Off-set  Scales,  2  inches  long,  graduated  10  by  10,  10  by  20, 

20  by  40,  30  by  50,  40  by  60,  each,  ...... 


tl  i  ti  ]  !»i  i  Jo  i  Jz  i  i’|4  j  IS  1  «8 

it 

It!  i\t  \  ila  1  sir  3k  1  iltl  ilst 

3(3  j  4I0  i  4^  1  Vl4- 1 '  E  1 

T  zte 

.  alo  1  *18  1  ilfi  1  H4- 

HO  I  1  14-1  12  1  1  |t4. 

.  ....  QOEtN  tkCOPHlLA 

V#  I'nhqnk 

— il  21  3i  '  41  ~  '  S 

— 

771  .i 6.-^  -.r 

II  21 

M  III  ~ '  lit  M 

J  if  iZ 

mill  >  1 

(9 

~  w.  zfk  s 

' - liil.iinfaftP 

454. 

454.  Boxwood  Scale,  12  inches  long,  with  16  scales,  as  follows  :  £,  T\,  f,  •§, 

h  ft  4i  ft  I;  l£,  If,  2,  2\,  2\  and  3  inches  to  the  foot,  the  first  di¬ 
vision  of  each  scale  subdivided  in  12  parts,  each,  .  .  .  . 

455.  Same  as  No.  454,  but  with  the  first  division  of  each  scale  subdivided 

into  ten  parts,  each,  .......... 

456.  Boxwood  Scale,  12  inches  long,  with  12  scales,  as  follows  :  Ts?,  f,  f,  f, 

I,  l,  If,  If,  If,  2  and  3  inches  to  the  foot,  the  first  division  of  each 
scale  subdivided  into  12  parts,  and  diagonal  scale  reading  to  Tf^ths 
and  s^yths  of  an  inch,  each,  ........ 

45V.  Same  as  No.  456,  but  has  the  first  division  of  each  scale  subdivided  into 
10  parts,  earh,  ........... 


4u8. 

458.  Boxwood  Scale,  12  inches  long,  one  side  rounded,  the  o'.her  flat,  with 

the  following  scales,  the  graduations  of  which  are  all  brought  to  the 
edge:  ^  h  f,  f,  I,  f,  h  1,  H»  U.  If,  ?»  2*  and  3  inches  to  the 

foot,  the  first  division  of  each  scale  subdivided  into  12  parts,  each, 

459.  Same  as  No.  458,  but  has  the  first  division  of  each  scale  subdivided  into 

10  parts,  each,  . 


460.  Triangular  Scale  of  German  silver,  silver  plated,  12  inches  long, 
graduated  £,  f,  f,  f,  f  and  1  inch  to  the  foot,  each,  . 


r 


Prick. 

$0  50 
20 


1  25 

25 


1  25 
1  25 

1  25 
1  26 


1  25 
1  25 


6  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  00.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YOEK.  41 


No. 


461.  Triangular  Scale  of  German  Silver,  silver  plated,  12  inches  long, 
graduated 


one 

edge  with  scales 

of  J,  1  and  2  inches  to  the  foot. 

Do. 

do. 

h  h  an(f  1  inch  to  the  foot. 

Do. 

do. 

6ths,  12ths.  24ths,  24ths  and  48ths  of 
of  an  inch. 

Do. 

do. 

6  and  12  inches  to  the  foot. 

Do. 

do. 

lOths,  lOOlhs  and  lOOOths  of  a  foot. 

Do. 

do. 

lOths,  20ths,  30ths,  40ths,  50ths  and 
60ths  of  an  inch,  each,  . 

Puck 


$6  00 


462.  Triangular  Scale  of  Boxwood,  24inches  long,  graduated  10,  20,  30,  40,  50 


and  60  to  the  inch  ;  or,  20,  30,  40,  50,  60  and  80,  to  the  inch,  .  .  5  00 

463.  Do.  do.  do.  do.  12  inch,  2  00 

464.  Do.  do.  do.  do.  6  inch,  1  50 

464£.  Triangular  Scales  of  Boxwood  for  Off-sets,  2  inches  long,  10,  20,  30, 

40,  50  and  60  parts,  ..........  75 


sT.Sr.ST  O 


t  \  t  \ 


V  Y  AnXwaoa 


465. 


465.  Triangular  Scale  of  Boxwood,  24  inches  long,  graduated  X3X,  x3f,  £,  §, 

£,  £,  1,  l£,  3  inches  and  16ths  to  the  foot,  .  .  .  .  .  5  00 

466.  Do.  do.  do.  12  inches  long,  2  00 

467.  Do.  do.  do.  6  do.  1  50 

Boxwood  Triangular  Scales,  6  and  12  inches  put  in  strong  paper  boxes,  and  mailed  to  any 
address  at  an  additional  cost  per  scale  of  25  cents. 


PAPEE  SCALES. 


480.  Paper  Scale,  printed  on  card-paper,  lj  inch  wide,  12  inches  long,  gradu¬ 

ations  on  one  edge  inches  and  lOths,  and  the  other  feet  and  lOOths,  10 

481.  Paper  Scale,  same  as  480,  one  edge  20  parts  to  the  inch,  the  other  edge 

40, .  10 

482.  Paper  Scale,  same  as  481,  one  edge  inches  and  sixteenths,  the  other 

edge  inches  and  forty-eighths,  ........  10 

483.  Paper  Scales,  printed  on  card-paper,  19  inches  long,  for  architects  and 

engineers,  in  sets  of  6  scales,  per  set, . 1  00 


Series  A  contains  6  scales,  one  each,  divided  to  J,  £,  f,  1,  l£,  and  3 
inches  to  the  foot. 

Series  B  contains  6  scales,  one  each,  divided  to  T35,  £,  Ts5,  f,  and  | 
inch  to  the  foot. 

Series  C  contains  6  scales,  one  each,  divided  to  10,  20,  30,  40,  50  and  60 


parts  to  the  inch. 

484.  Single  Scale  of  any  of  the  above  series,  A,  B,  C — each  scale,  .  .  20 

485.  Paper  Scales,  same  as  483,  divided  either  to  f,  l£,  l£  or  If  inches  to 

the  foot,  each, .  20 


The  advantages  of  these  scales  are — they  expand  and  contract  nearly  the 
same  as  drawing-paper,  do  not  soil  the  work,  and  distances  can  be 
set  off  from  them  without  the  use  of  dividers. 

We  manufacture  to  order  scales  to  any  divisions,  in  ivory,  boxwood,  whitewood,  or  rubber. 


42  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

STEEL  RULES,  GAUGES,  SQUARES,  CALIPERS  FOR 
MACHINISTS,  STRAIGHT  EDGES,  &c. 


500. 

No.  Price. 

500.  24  Inch  Steel  Rule,  graduated  to  inches,  8ths,  lOths,  12ths,  14ths,  16ths, 


20ths,  24ths,  28ths,  32ds,  48ths,  50ths,  64ths  and  lOOths  of  an  inch,  .  $4  00 


501. 

12  inches, 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

2  00 

502. 

9  do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

1  50 

503. 

6  do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

1  00 

504. 

4  do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

75 

505. 

3  do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

50 

CENTRE  GANGES. 


506.  Gauge  made  of  Steel,  2  inches  long,  for  grinding  and  setting  screw  tools,  50 


STEEL  SQNARES 


501.  Heavy  Headed  Square,  made  of  hardened  steel,  for  machinists,  gradu- 


ated  to  inches  and 

32ds  of  an  inch, 

hlade  3  inches  long,  . 

2  50 

508. 

Do. 

do. 

blade  4 

do. 

3  00 

509. 

Do. 

do. 

blade  6 

do. 

3  50 

510. 

Do. 

do. 

blade  9 

do. 

4  00 

511. 

Do. 

do. 

blade  12 

do. 

6  00 

JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  43 
No.  Price. 

4 

511J.  Light  Squares,  made  of  hardened  steel,  for  machinists,  graduated  on 
one  side  to  inches,  16th  and  64ths  of  an  inch,  and  on  the  other  side 
to  inches,  32ds  and  64ths  of  an  inch,  sides  2  inches  long,  .  .  .  $1  50 

512.  Same  as  No.  511J,  sides  3  inches  long,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  2  00 

513.  Same  as  No.  5 1 1 sides  4  inches  long,  graduated  on  both  sides  to  inches, 

16ths  and  32ds  of  an  inch,  ........  2  50 

514.  Same  as  No.  513,  sides  6  inches  long, . 3  50 


AMES’  PATENT  UNIVERSAL  SQUARE. 


This  square  combines,  in  a  most  convenient  form,  five 
different  instruments,  viz.,  The  Try-Square,  the  Miter, 
the  T-Sqcare,  the  Graduated  Rule,  and  (what  is  entirely 
new)  the  Centre-Square,  for  finding  the  centre  of  a  circle. 

Fig.  1  explains  its  application  as  a  Centre-Square. 
Put  the  instrument  over  the  circle,  as  the  end  of  the  bolt 
or  shaft,  with  the  arms  b  a,  a  e  resting  against  the  cir¬ 
cumference,  in  which  position  one  edge  of  the  rule,  a  d, 
will  cross  the  centre.  Mark  a  straight  lino  in  this  posi¬ 
tion;  apply  the  instrument  again  to  another  part  of  the 
circumference,  and  mark  another  line  crossing  the  first. 
The  point  where  the  two  lines  cross  each  other  will  be 
the  centre  of  the  circle.  The  whole  is  the  work  of  a  mo¬ 
ment.  Fig.  2  explains  the  application  of  the  instrument 
as  a  carpenter’s  Try-Square,  n,  and  an  Outside  Square, 
l  ;  Fig.  3,  as  a  Miter  ;  Fig.  4,  as  a  T-Square  and  a  Gradu¬ 
ated  Rule  ;  Figs.  5  and  6  as  an  Outside  Square  for  draw¬ 
ing,  and  a  T-Square  for  machinists. 

The  tongue  D  A,  (Fig.  1,)  being  fastened,  as  it  is,  into 
the  triangular  frame  b  a  e,  cannot  bo  moved  or  knocked 
from  its  place, — in  this  respect  constituting  a  great  im¬ 
provement  over  the  carpenter's  Try-Square,  T-Square, 
and  Miter  in  common  use.  The  instruments  are  made  of 
the  best  material,  neatly  finished,  and  perfectly  true. 

“  As  a  centre-square  alone,  it  is  invaluable  to  every 
mechanic.  ...  In  short,  it  combines,  in  a  most  con¬ 
venient  form,  so  many  useful  instruments,  no  mechanic’s 
list  of  tools  can  well  be  complete  without  a  Universal 
Square.” — Scientific  American,  Sept.  22, 1855. 


515. 


515. 

Ames’  Patent 

Universal  Square, 

blade  6  inches  long,  . 

. 

• 

3  00 

516. 

Do. 

do. 

8  do. 

. 

• 

4  00 

517. 

Do. 

do. 

10  do. 

. 

5  00 

518. 

Do. 

do. 

12  do. 

• 

6  00 

WILLIS’  ODONTOGRAPH. 


This  is  an  instrument  recently  invented  by  Prof.  R.  Willis,  of  Cambridge  University, 
England,  for  describing  the  correct  form  of  the  teeth  of  wheels,  and  the  templets  and 
cutters  used  in  making  them.  All  wheels  of  the  same  pitch,  but  of  different  sizes, 
having  their  teeth  drawn  with  this  instrument,  will  run  together  correctly. 

519.  Willis’  Odontograph,  for  drawing  the  teeth  of  small  wheels  by  diamet¬ 

rical  pitch,  when  only  a  single  arc  is  required,  with  drawing  and 
direction  for  use,  ..........  2  50 

520.  Willis’  Odontograph,  for  drawing  the  teeth  of  larger  wheels  by  circular 

pitch,  where  it  is  necessary  to  have  separate  arcs  for  flanks  and  faces, 
with  drawing  and  direction  for  use, . 


4  00 


44  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  *  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


STEEL  CALIPEES. 


No. 

521.  Plain  Steel  Caliper,  2  inches  long,  graduated  to  64th  of  an  inch,  . 

522.  Do.  do.  3  inches  long,  divided  to  64th  of  an  inch, 


SIJll  FRONT  SIDE. 


■ 1  jinn 

iiii[i!>i|!iiijiiii|i!ii|iii!|liN|iiii|iiii[iiii|iiii|iMi|iiii|iiii|iiiijiTii]i[n,|irri[iiii|[nijiiiijiiii|~ 

D.B.&S.  Frcnr.R.I.  *  . 

ih  |  |  1 1  1 1 1  n  1 1  1 1 1  1 1  1  1 1 1 1 1 1  n  i  I1?! 

r 

_r 

16  32  64'  j 

REVERSE  SIDE. 


523.  Verniered  Steel  Calipers,  2J  inches  long,  the  lower  edge  of  front  side 

graduated  to  inches  and  16ths  of  an  inch,  and  reading  by  the  vernier 
to  32ds  and  64ths  of  an  inch  ;  and  the  upper  edge  of  same  side  gradu¬ 
ated  to  inches  and  50ths  of  an  inch.  The  lower  edge  of  the  reverse 
side  graduated  to  inches  and  40ths  of  an  inch,  and  reading  by  the 
vernier  to  lOOOths  of  an  inch.  The  upper  edge  of  same  side  gradu¬ 
ated  to  centimeters  and  millimeters, . 

524.  Same  as  No.  523,  but  in  morocco  case, . 


Price. 

$3  50 
4  50 


5  00 

6  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  4  CO., 


PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  45 


No.  525. 

525.  Verniered  Steel  Caliper,  same  as  No.  523,  but  with  micrometer  adjust¬ 
ing  screw  to  vernier, . $6  00 

626.  Same  as  No.  525,  in  morocco  box,  ........  7  00 


FRONT  8IDE 


527.  Verniered  Caliper,  made  of  hardened  steel,  6  inches  long,  on  front  side 
graduated  to  inches  and  40ths,  and  reading  by  the  vernier  to  lOOOtlis 
of  an  inch.  On  reverse  side  graduated  to  inches  and  64ths  of  an 
inch, and  no  vernier  reading;  micrometer  adjusting  screw  to  vernier, 


with  morocco  box,  ..  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  25  00 

528.  Same  as  No.  527,  12  inches  long, . .  30  00 

529.  Same  as  No.  527,  24  inches  long, .  36  00 

Printed  instructions  accompany  No.  527. 


46 

JAMES 

W.  QUEEN 

&  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 

STRAIGHT  EDGES. 

No. 

Price. 

550. 

Steel  Straight  Edges,  60  inches  long,  with  one 

edge  bevelled, 

$8  75 

551. 

Do. 

do. 

48 

do. 

do. 

do. 

6  75 

552. 

Do. 

do. 

36 

do. 

do. 

do. 

4  62 

553. 

Do. 

do. 

30 

do. 

do. 

do. 

3  62 

554. 

Do. 

do. 

24 

do. 

do. 

do. 

2  76 

555. 

Whitewood  Straight  Edges,  20  inches  long,  with  one  edge  bevelled, 

25 

556. 

Do. 

do. 

30 

do. 

do.  do. 

35 

557. 

Do. 

do. 

40 

do. 

do.  do. 

55 

558. 

Do. 

do. 

50 

do. 

do.  do. 

70 

559. 

Do 

do. 

60 

do. 

do.  do. 

1  00 

CHAPTER  IX. 

TRIANGLES,  CURVES,  DRAWING  BOARDS,  FASTENING 
TACKS,  HORN  CENTRES,  T  SQUARES,  PENTAGRAPHS, 
AND  PARALLEL  RULERS. 


560.  Whitewood  Triangles,  angles  30,  60  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular  5  to 


7  inches  long, each,  ..........  15 

561.  Whitewood  Triangles,  angles  30,  60  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular  8  to 

10  inches  long,  each, .  20 

562.  Whitewood  Triangles,  angles  30,  60  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular  11 

to  12  inches  long,  each,  .........  25 

563.  Whitewood  Triangles,  angles  45,  45  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular  3  to 

6  inches  long,  each, .  20 

564.  Whitewood  Triangles,  angles  45,  45  and  90  degrees,  isosceles  sides  7  to 

10  inches  long,  each, . .  25 

565.  Whitewood  Triangles,  framed  with  open  centre,  angles  30,  60,  and  90 

degrees,  perpendicular  6  to  10  inches  long, .  70 

566.  Whitewood  Triangles,  framed  with  open  centre,  angles  30,  60  and  90 

degrees,  perpendicular  11  to  15  inches  long,  .  .  .  .  .  1  00 

567.  Whitewood  Triangles,  framed  with  open  centre,  angles  30,  60  and  90 

degrees,  perpendicular  16  to  20  inches  long, . 1  25 

568.  Whitewood  Triangles,  framed  with  open  centre,  angles  45,  45  and  90 

degrees,  isosceles  sides  4  to  7  inches  long, .  50 

569.  Whitewood  Triangles,  framed  with  open  centre,  angles  46,  45  and  90 

degrees,  isosceles  sides  8  to  11  inches  long, .  75 

570.  Whitewood  Triangles,  framed  with  open  centre,  angles  45,  45  and  90 

degrees,  isosceles  sides  12  to  15  inches  long,  ...  .  1  25 

571.  Ovals,  43  in  set,  ...........  5  00 

572.  Parabolas,  12  in  set,  ..........  2  75 

673.  Hyperbolas,  6  in  Bet,  ..........  1  25 


t 


I 


No. 

600. 

601. 

602. 

603. 

604. 

605. 

606. 


610. 

611. 

612. 

613. 

614. 

615. 

616. 

617. 

618. 

619. 

620. 
621. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  47 


600. 

India-Rubber  Triangles,  angles  30,  60  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular  3  inches, 
30  cents;  do.  4  inches,  40 cents ;  do.  5  inches,  60  cents ;  do.  6  inches,  60  cents, 
do.  7  inches,  70  cents;  do.  8  inches,  80  cents,  each. 

India-Rubber  Triangles,  angles  80,  60  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular  9  inches, 
95  cents;  do.  10  inches,  $1.10;  do.  11  inches,  $1.25,  each. 

India-Rubber  Triangles,  angles  30,  60  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular  12  inches, 
$1  35;  do.  13  incaes,  $1.50;  do.  14  inches,  $1.65;  do.  15  inches,  $1  80,  each, 

India-Rubber  Triangles,  angles  45,  45  and  90  degrees,  isosceles  sides  3  inches, 
35  cents;  do.  4  inches,  60  cents ;  do.  5  inches,  60  cents  ;  do.  6  inches,  75  cents; 
do.  7  inches,  90  cents,  each. 

India-Rubber  Triangles,  angles  45,  45  and  90  degrees,  isosceles  sides  8  inches, 
$1.00;  do.  9  inches,  $1.15;  do.  10  inches,  $1.30,  each. 

India-Rubber  Triangles,  angles  45,  45  and  90  degrees,  isosceles  sides  11  inches, 
$1.65;  do.  12  inches,  $1.75;  do.  13  inches,  $2.00,  each. 

India-Rubber  Triangles,  angles  45,  45  and  90  degrees,  isosceles  sides  14  inches, 
$2.25;  do.  15  inches,  $2.50,  each. 


0U3. 


610. 


German  Silver  Triangle,  angles  30,  60  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular  6 

inches  long, each, . 

German  Silver  Triangles,  angles  30,  60  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular 

7  inches  long,  each, . 

German  Silver  Triangle,  angles  30,  60  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular 

8  inches  long, each, . 

German  Silver  Triangle,  angles  30,  60  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular 

9  inches  long,  each,  .....  . 

German  Silver  Triangle,  angles  30,  60  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular 

10  inches  long, each,  ....  . 

German  Silver  Triangle,  angles  30,  60  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular 

11  inches  long, each,  .......... 

German  Silver  Triangle,  angles  30,  60  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular 

12  inches  long,  each, . 

German  Silver  Triangle,  angles  30,  60  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular 

14  inches  long,  each, . 

German  Silver  Triangle,  angles  30,  60  and  90  degrees,  perpendicular 

15  inches  long,  each, . . 

German  Silver  Triangle,  angles  45,  45  and  90  degrees,  isosceles  sides 

4  inches  long, . 

German  Silver  Triangle,  angles  45,  45  and  90  degrees,  isosceles  sides  5 

inches  long,  ......... 

German  Silver  Triangle,  angles  45,  45  and  90  degrees,  isosceles  sides  6 

inches  long, . 


2  50 

3  00 

3  50 

4  00 

4  50 

5  00 

5  50 

6  00 
6  50 
2  25 

2  50 

3  00 


1 


48  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 

No.  Paros, 

622.  German  Silver  Triangle,  angles  45,  45  and  90  degrees,  isosceles  sides  7 

inches  long, . .  $3  50 

623.  German  Silver  Triangle,  angles  45,  45  and  90  degrees,  isosceles  sides  8 

inches  long, . .  4  00 

624.  German  Silver  Triangle,  angles  45,  45  and  90  degrees,  isosceles  sides  9 

inches  long,  .  . .  4  50  m 

625.  German  Silver  Triangle,  angles  45,45  and  90  degrees,  isosceles  sides  10 

inches  long,  .  ......  ft  00 


630.  Cross  Section  Triangles,  set  of  seven  Cross  Section  Triangles  made  of 

hard  rubber  as  follows,  }  to  1,  £  tp  1,  f  to  1,  1  to  1,  lj  to  1,  l£  to  1, 

2  to  1,  per  set, . 4  25 

631.  Single  Triangles  of  set  No.  630,  each, . •  .  75 


BATTEE  SLOPES. 


635.  635. 


« 


635.  Set  of  three  forms  of  hard  rubber  for  Batters  of  walls  and  rock,  giving  the 

following  slopes,  1  in.  4,  1  in.  5, 1  in.  6,  1  in.  8,  1  in.  10,  1  in.  12,  per  set,  2  00 

636.  Single  forms  of  set  No.  635,  containing  any  two  slopes,  each,  .  .  75 

IEEEGULAB  CUBVES. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  GO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  49 


1 


No. 

650.  Whitewood  Irregular  Curves,  5  to  9  inches  long,  various  patterns,  each, 

651.  Do.  do.  10  to  12  do.  do.  do. 

652.  Do.  do.  13  to  18  do.  do.  do. 

653.  India  Rubber  Irregular  Curves,  5,  6  or  7  inches  long, 

654.  Do.  do.  8,  9  or  10  do.  . 

655.  Do.  do.  12,  14  or  15  do.  . 


Prick. 
$0  25 
35 
50 
75 
1  25 
1  50 


4 


50  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


RAILROAD  REGULAR  CURVES. 


No.  Price, 

660.  Railroad  Curves,  of  card  board.  Set  of  24  curves  of  the  following  radii: 

1L  2,  2},  3,  3$,  4,  4J,  5,  5J,  6,  6J,  7,  7*,  8,  8J,  9,  10,  11,  12,  13,  14,  15, 

17,  20  and  24  inches,  in  wood  box,  per  set, . $4  60 

661.  Railroad  Curves,  of  card  board.  A  set  of  50  curves  of  the  following 

radii:  1J,  2,  2J,  3,  3$,  4,  4},  5,  5.},  6,  6J,  7,  7£,  8,  8J,  9,  9J,  10J,  11, 

11$,  12,  13,  14,  15,  16,  18,  19,  20,  21,  22,  23,  24,  26,  28,  30,  34,  38,  42, 

46,  50,  55,  60,  70,  80,  90,  100,  110,  120  inches,  in  wood  box,  per  set,  9  00 

662.  Railroad  Curves,  of  card  board.  A  set  of  100  curves  of  the  following 

radii :  1*,  If,  2,  2$,  2*,  2f,  3,  3},  3$,  3f,  4,  4*,  4$,4f,  5,  5$,  5},  5|,  6,  6$, 

6j,  6|,  7,  71,  7},  7J,  8,  81,  8-1,  8f,  9,  91,  9$,  9f,  10,  10$,  10$,  lOf,  11, 

111,  12>  1 3 ,  14,  15,  16,  17,  18,  19,  20,  21,  22,  23,  24,  26,  28,  30,  32,  33, 

34,  36,  38,  40,  43,  46,  49,  50,  55,  58,  61,  65,  69,  73,  77,  80,  85,  90,  95, 

100,  105,  110,  115,  120,  125,  130,  135,  140,  145,  150,  155,  160,  165,  170, 

175,  180,  185,  190,  200,  210,  220,  223,  240  inches,  in  wood  box,  per  set,  15  00 

663.  Railroad  Curves,  of  card  board.  A  set  of  25  curves  from  30  minutes  to 


7  degrees  by  every  15  minutes,  cut  to  a  scale  of  400  feet  to  the  inch, 
in  wood  box,  per  set,  .........  5  00 

664.  Same  as  No.  663.  A  set  of  70  curves  from  25  minutes  to  4  degrees  by 

every  5  minutes,  and  from  4  degrees  to  10  degrees  by  every  15  min¬ 
utes,  in  wood  box,  per  set,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  15  00 

665.  Railroad  Curves  of  wood.  Set  of  43  curves  of  radii  from  3$  to  200 

inches,  per  set,  ..........  9  00 


DRAWING  BOARDS. 


670.  673. 


670.  Drawing  Board,  of  soft  pine  wood,  with  cherrywood  clamps  across  the 

ends,  21  by  16  inches, . 

671.  Do.  do.  do.  26  by  18  inches, 

672.  Do.  do.  do.  39  by  25  inches, 

673.  Framed  Drawing  Board,  of  well  seasoned  walnut,  the  centre  of  soft  pine, 

and  removable,  17  by  11  inches  size  of  centre  board, 

674.  Do.  do.  21  by  16  inches  size  of  centre  board, 

675.  Do.  do.  26  by  18  do.  do. 

676.  Do.  do.  39  by  25  do.  do. 


1  25 

1  75 
3  00 

2  00 

2  50 

3  50 
6  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  4,  0.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  51 


BERGNER’S  PATENT  SECTION  LINER. 


683. 


683.  Bergner’s  Patent  Section  Liner,  in  morocco  case,  .  .  .  $12  00 

SAMPLES  OF  WORK  DONE  WITH  RERGNER’S  PATENT  SECTION  LINER. 


This  Instrument  is  for  indicating 
sections  of  objects  in  mechani¬ 
cal  and  architectural  drawings, 
for  drawing  screw  threads,  lay¬ 
ing  out  the  spaces  for  brick 
work,  letterings  on  drawings, 
and  all  cases  where  narrow 
spaced  parallel  lines  are  need¬ 
ed.  With  it,  a  person  of  mod¬ 
erate  ability  or  practice  can 
produce  an  effect  of  uniformity 
and  neatness,  in  sectional  draw¬ 
ings,  almost,  or  quite  equal  to 
the  engine  dividing  of  engrav¬ 
ings.  The  instrument  consists 


52  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


of  a  ruler,  covered  on  the  under  side  with  india-rubber  cloth,  a  triangle  with  a  clamp¬ 
ing-screw,  passing  through  near  one  of  its  edges,  and  a  plate,  with  the  necessary 
arrangement  for  producing  a  movement  over  equal  spaces.  The  several  parts  are 
placed  together  as  represented  in  the  engraving,  there  being  a  little  spring  beneath 
the  front  edge  of  the  top  plate,  which  presses  against  one  edge  of  the  ruler  while  the 
triangle  is  clamped  against  the  other  edge.  The  ruler  may  be  placed  upon  the  paper 
in  any  desired  position,  the  india-rubber  cloth  underneath  keeping  it  there  with  per¬ 
fect  security,  and  it  thus  acts  as  a  guide  for  the  triangle,  which  can  be  moved  along 
over  equal  steps  by  alternately  pressing  down  the  ivory  button  and  letting  it  spring 
back.  This  movement  is  produced  by  the  action  of  a  little  pawl  upon  the  ruler, 
which  is  always  to  be  kept  pretty  sharp  so  that  it  will  take  a  quick  and  certain  hold. 
The  length  of  the  steps  taken,  or  the  distance  between  the  lines  drawn,  is  regulated 
by  the  screw  above  the  spring,  the  distance  moved  over  each  time  being  greater  as 
the  spring  is  allowed  to  have  more  play.  By  changing  the  clamp.ng-screw  on  the 
triangle,  any  edge  can  be  placed  against  the  ruler. 


FASTENING  TACKS  AND  HORN  CENTRES. 


690. 

691. 

694.  695. 

700. 

701. 

No. 

Prick. 

690. 

Fastening  Tacks, 

of  Brass,  heads  flat,  }  inch  diameter,  . 

per  doz.  $0  25 

691. 

Do. 

do. 

do.  heads  round,  4  inch  diameter, 

do. 

35 

692. 

Do. 

do. 

do.  do.  j7^  do. 

. 

do. 

45 

693. 

Do. 

do. 

of  German  Silver,  heads  rounded,  }  in. 

diam., 

do. 

50 

693i> 

.  Do. 

do. 

do.  do.  X 

do. 

do. 

60 

694. 

Do. 

do. 

.do.  flat  heads,  X  in.  diam.,very  superior,  do. 

75 

695. 

Do. 

do. 

do.  do.  f  do. 

do. 

do. 

1  00 

696. 

Do. 

do. 

do.  do.  %  do. 

do. 

do. 

1  25 

697. 

Do. 

do. 

do.  do.  |  do. 

do. 

do. 

1  50 

698. 

Do. 

do. 

of  Steel,  round  heads,  }  inch  diameter, 

# 

.  do. 

60 

699. 

Do. 

do. 

of  Brass,  right  angled, 

.  do. 

75 

700. 

Horn  Centre,  each,  ........ 

20 

701. 

Do 

with  German  Silver  Rim,  each, 

• 

• 

35 

702.  Bearwood  T  Square,  fixed  head,  blade  15  inches  long,  each, 


703. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

20 

do. 

do. 

704. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

25 

do. 

do. 

705. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

30 

do. 

do. 

35 

50 

60 

75 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  k  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  53 


No. 


Prjoe. 


706. 

Pearwood  T  Square,  fixed  head, 

blade  35  inches  long,  each, 

$0  90 

707. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

40 

do.  do. 

1 

00 

708. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

50 

do.  do. 

1 

50 

709. 

Do. 

do. 

single  head  to  turn,  20  inches  long,  each, 

1 

00 

710. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

25 

do.  do. 

1 

25 

711. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

30 

do.  do. 

1 

35 

712. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

35 

do.  do. 

1 

40 

713. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

40 

do.  do. 

1 

50 

714. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

50 

do.  do. 

1 

75 

715. 

Do. 

do. 

double 

do. 

20 

do.  do. 

1 

00 

716. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

25 

do.  do. 

1 

25 

717. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

30 

do.  do. 

'  1 

35 

718. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

35 

do.  do. 

1 

40 

719. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

40 

do.  do. 

1 

50 

720. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

50 

do.  do. 

1 

75 

721. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

24 

do.  and  with  edges 

of  blade  inlaid  with  brass,  each, 

2 

25 

722. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do.  30  inches  long, 

2 

50 

723. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do.  42  do. 

3 

50 

724. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do.  50  do. 

4 

50 

OENTROLINEAD. 


730.  Nicholson’s  Centrolinead,  of  wood,  for  perspective  drawing,  long  arm 

65  inches,  short  arms  24  inches,  each,  .  .  .  .  .  .  10  00 


PANTOGRAPHS. 


734.  Pantograph 

of  common  wood  arms,  .... 

• 

3 

00 

735. 

Do. 

pearwood,  arms  22  inches  long,  . 

• 

5 

50 

736. 

Do. 

ebony, in  box,  arms  24  inches  long,  . 

• 

25 

00 

727. 

Do. 

brass,  do.  24  do. 

• 

50 

00 

738. 

Do. 

do.  do.  30  do. 

• 

60 

00 

54  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


PARALLEL  RULERS. 

* 


No. 

Price. 

750. 

Parallel  Rulers, 

ebony, 

brass  mounted, 

6  inches  long, 

each, 

.  $0 

25 

751. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

9 

do. 

do¬ 

50 

752. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

12 

do. 

do. 

75 

753. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

15 

do. 

do. 

.  1 

00 

754. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

18 

do. 

do. 

1 

25 

755. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

24 

do. 

do. 

2 

50 

756. 

Do. 

German  silver  mounted.  12 

inches  long,  each, 

l 

25 

759.  Parallel  Ruler,  all  German  silver,  on 


760. 

Do. 

do. 

d 

761. 

Do. 

do. 

d 

Do. 

all  brass, 

on  rollers, 

9 

763. 

Do. 

do. 

dff. 

12 

764. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

15 

765. 

Do. 

ebony, 

do. 

12 

766. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

15 

767. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

18 

jllers,  12  inches  long’,  .  .  IP  55 

o.  15  do.  .  .  13  50 

o.  18  do.  .  .  15  00 

inches  long,  .  .  .  .  5  00 

do.  .  .  .  .  6  50 

do.  .  .  .  .  8  50 

do.  ....  3  25 

do.  .  .  .  4  OP 

do.  .  .  .  .  5  00 


/ 


768.  Parallel  Ruler,  ebony,  ivory  graduated  edges,  on  rollers,  12  inches  long, 

769.  Do.  do.  do.  do.  15  do. 

770.  Do.  do.  do.  do.  18  do. 


5  00 

6  50 

7  50 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


55 


CHAPTER  X. 


No. 

800. 


DRAWING  STATIONERY. 

WHATMAN’S  HOT  AND  COLD-PRESSED  DRAWING  PAPERS,  SELECTED. 

BEST  QUALITY. 


Price 


Demy, 

20x15 

inches, 

.  per  sheet,  $0  09 

per  quire, 

$1  00 

Medium, 

22x17 

do. 

.  do. 

12 

do. 

1  50 

Royal, 

24x19 

do. 

.  do. 

15 

do. 

2  00 

Super-royal, 

27x19 

do. 

.  do. 

18 

do. 

2  50 

Imperial, 

30x21 

do. 

do. 

25 

do. 

3  50 

Atlas, 

33x26 

do. 

.  do. 

30 

do. 

5  25 

Double  Elephant, 

40x26 

do. 

.  do. 

40 

do. 

6  00 

Antiquarian, 

52x31 

do. 

do. 

2  00 

do. 

30  00 

We  only  keep  the  best  Whatman’s  Paper  in  stock,  but  to  parties  desiring  it,  can 
furnish  the  second  quality  at  about  15  per  cent,  below  the  above  prices. 


802. 


CONTINUOUS  DRAWING  PAPER.  EXTRA  WHITE. 
In  rolls  of  30  to  50  pounds. 

German  make,  36  inches  wide,  per  pound 


Do. 

36 

do. 

thin  superior, 

do. 

60, 

do.  . 

35 

Do. 

42 

do. 

thick, 

do. 

40, 

do.  . 

30 

Do. 

42 

do. 

do.  superior, 

do. 

60, 

do.  . 

45 

Do. 

42 

do. 

thin, 

do. 

40, 

do.  . 

25 

Do. 

54 

do. 

thick, 

do. 

55, 

do.  . 

50 

Do. 

54 

do. 

thin, 

do. 

65, 

do.  . 

35 

Best  egg  shell,  59 

do. 

thick, 

do. 

60, 

do.  . 

75 

Do. 

do.  59 

do. 

medium, 

do. 

60, 

do.  . 

55 

Do. 

do.  59 

do. 

thin, 

do. 

60, 

do.  . 

45 

25 


803.  MUSLIN  BACKED  CONTINUOUS  DRAWING  PAPER.  EXTRA  WHITE. 

In  rolls  of  10  yards. 

Best  German  Paper,  42  inches  wide,  per  roll  $9.00,  per  yard, 

Do.  do.  54  do.  do  14  00,  do. 

Do.  do.  59  do.  do.  18  00,  do. 

804.  CONTINUOUS  DRAWING  PAPER,  BUFF  TINT,  FOR  WORKING  DRAWINGS. 

BksT  English  make,  in  rolls  of  50  to  80  pounds. 

40  inches  wide,  medium  thickness,  per  pound  $0.50,  per  yard, 

54  do.  do.  do.  60,  do. 

Best  American  make,  in  rolls  of  50  to  100  pounds. 

30  inches  wide,  thick,  per  pound  $0.16,  per  yard,  .... 


805. 


42 

do. 

do. 

do. 

16, 

do. 

48 

do. 

do. 

do. 

16, 

do. 

64 

do. 

do. 

do. 

16, 

do. 

1  00 

1  50 

2  00 


25 

35 

10 

16 

18 

20 


Full  rolls  only  of  continuous  paper  sold  by  the  pound  at  above  rates. 

TRACING  OR  VELLUM  CLOTH. 


In  Rolls  of  24  yards,  both  sides  glazed,  or  face  glazed  and  back  dull,  suitable  for 

pencil  marks. 


Do. 

30 

do. 

do. 

9.50, 

do. 

50 

Do. 

36 

do. 

do. 

11.50, 

do. 

60 

Do. 

42 

do. 

do. 

15.50, 

do. 

75 

Patent,  18 

do. 

do. 

7.00, 

do. 

40 

Do. 

30 

do. 

do. 

10.00, 

do. 

60 

Do. 

36 

do. 

do. 

12.00, 

do. 

70 

Do. 

42 

do. 

do. 

16.00, 

do. 

80 

35 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


56 


No. 

806. 

807. 

808. 

809. 

810. 
811. 
812. 

813. 

814. 


817. 

818. 
819. 


FRENCH  TRACING  PAPER. 


FINE  QUALITY,  VERY  CLEAR  AND  STRONG. 


In  Sheets.  Royal,  19x25  inches,  .... 

Do.  Super-Royal,  21x26  inches, 

Do.  Double  Elephant,  28x40  inches,  . 

In  Rolls,  11  yards  long  and  43  inches  wide,  per  yard,  $ 
Do.  22  do.  do.  do.  do. 


per  quire, 
do. 
do. 

per  roll, 
do. 


Vegetable  Royal,  19x25  inches,  per  quire  $2.20,  per  sheet,  . 
Do.  Super  Royal,  21x26  do.  do.  3.50,  do. 

Do.  Double  Elephant,  28x40  do.  do.  10.00,  do. 

Do.  in  rolls  of  22  yards,  54  inches  wide,  per  roll, 


THE  NEW  LINEN  TRACING  PAPER. 


Transparent,  very  strong,  and  waterproof. 

In  Rolls  of  20  yards,  36  inches  wide,  per  roll  $4.40,  per  yard,  . 
Do.  do.  48  do.  do.  5.85,  do. 

Do.  do.  54  do.  do.  6.70,  do. 


Price. 
$1  00 

1  50 

2  50 

1  50 

2  60 
15 
40 
65 

5  00 


35 

45 

50 


HUFTY’S  DOUBLE-LENGTH  PROFILE  PAPER. 

The  following  plates,  formerly  the  property  of  Mr.  J.  Hufty  of  this  city,  are  ac» 
knowledged  by  all  civil  engineers  to  be  the  best  yet  gotten  up  for  Railroad  Profile 
Drawing.  The  advantage  which  they  possess  over  all  others  is  that  they  are  double 
the  length,  (*.  e.  42  inches  long,  all  others  being  21  inches  long),  and  a  greater  num¬ 
ber  of  feet  can  be  laid  down  without  joining  sheets,  therefore,  the  inaccuracies  of 
joining  two  sheets  is  necessarily  less  frequent. 

820.  Plate  A. — Rulings  42  inches  long  by  15  inches  wide,  Horizontal  Divis¬ 

ions,  four  to  the  inch  ;  Vertical  Divisions,  twenty  to  the  inch,  and 
having  every  tenth  horizontal  division  line  and  every  fiftieth  vertical 
division  line  heavier  than  the  others.  Price,  per  sheet,  ...  40 

821.  Plate  A. — Rulings  42  inches  long  by  6|  inches  wide,  Horizontal  Divis¬ 

ions,  four  to  the  inch;  Vertical  Divisions,  twenty  to  the  inch,  and 
having  every  tenth  horizontal  division  line  and  every  fiftieth  vertical 
division  line  heavier  than  the  others.  Price,  per  sheet,  ...  30 

822.  Plate  B. — Rulings  42  inches  long  by  13  inches  wide,  Horizontal  Divis¬ 

ions,  four  to  the  inch  ;  Vertical  Divisions,  thirty  to  the  inch,  and 
having  every  fourth  horizontal  division  line  and  every  twenty-fifth 
vertical  division  line  heavier  than  the  others.  Price,  per  sheet,  .  40 

823.  Plate  B. — Rulings  42  inches  long  by  6^  inches  wide,  Horizontaf  Divis¬ 

ions,  four  to  the  inch;  Vertical  Divisions,  thirty  to  the  inch,  and 
having  every  fourth  horizontal  division  line  and  every  twenty-fifth 
vertical  division  line  heavier  than  the  others.  Price,  per  sheet,  .  30 

824.  Plate  C. — Horizontal  Divisions,  five  to  the  inch;  Vertical  Divisions, 

twenty-five  to  the  inch,  and  having  every  fifth  horizontal  division 
line  and  every  twenty-fifth  vertical  division  line  heavier  than  the 
others.  Price,  per  sheet,  .........  40 

CONTINUOUS  OR  ROLL  PROFILE  PAPER. 

After  a  long  series  of  experiments,  we  are  now  prepared  to  supply  a  perfect  article 
of  Profile  Paper  in  continuous  rolls  of  any  length,  (22  inches  wide),  and  of  the  follow¬ 
ing  scales : 

825.  Plate  A. — Rulings  22  inches  wide,  Horizontal  Divisions  four  to  the  inch ; 

Vertical  Divisions,  twenty  to  the  inch,  and  having  every  tenth  hori¬ 
zontal  division  line  and  every  fiftieth  vertical  division  line  heavier 
than  the  others.  Price,  per  yard,  . .  30 

826.  Plate  B. — Rulings  22  inches  wide,  Horizontal  Divisions,  four  to  the  inch ; 

Vertical  Divisions,  thirty  to  the  inch,  and  having  every  fourth  hori¬ 
zontal  division  line  and  every  twenty-fifth  vertical  division  line 
heavier  than  the  others.  Price,  per  yard,  ......  30 

827.  Plate  B. — Rulings  9  inches  wide,  Horizontal  Divisions,  four  to  the  inch  ; 

Vertical  Divisions,  thirty  to  the  inch,  and  having  every  fourth  hori¬ 
zontal  division  line  and  every  twenty-fifth  vertical  division  line 
heavier  than  the  others.  Price,  per  yard,  . .  20 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  57 


MUSLIN  BACKED  BOLL  PROFILE  PAPER. 


828.  Muslin  Backed  Roll  Profile  Paper,  of  either  Plate  A  or  B,  22  inches  wide, 

in  rolls  of  20  yards,  per  yard,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  $0  75 

829.  Muslin  Backed  Roll  Profile  Paper,  Plate  B,  9  inches  wide,  in  rolls  of  20 

yards,  per  yard, .  50 

Plate  B  corresponds  to  that  in  sheets  known  as  Brown's  Profile  Paper. 

CROSS  SECTION  PAPERS. 

830.  Topographical  Paper,  14x17  inches,  ruled  400  feet  to  the  inch,  per  sheet, 

12  cents,  .........  per  quire,  1  50 

831.  Trautwine’s  Cross  Section  and  Diagram,  10  feet  to  inch,  for  embankments 

of  14  and  24  feet,  roadway,  and  for  excavations  of  18 -and  28  feet, 
rulings  19fxl2  inches,  .......  per  sheet,  25 

832.  Cross  Section  Papers,  rulings  22x16  inches,  8  feet  to  inch,  .  do.  25 

833.  Do.  do.  do.  do.  10  do.  .  do.  25 

834.  Do.  do.  do.  do.  10  do.  every  fifth 

line  heavy, . per  sheet,  25 

835.  Cross  Section  Papers,  rulings  22x16  inches,  16  feet  to  inch,  per  sheet,  .  25 

All  the  Profile  and  Cross  Section  Papers  can  he  f  urnished,  pr  inted  with  red  or  green  lines. 


LYONS’  TABLES. 


840.  Lyons’  Tables.  A  set  of  Tables  for  finding  at  a  glance  the  true  cubical 
contents  of  Excavation  and  Embankments  for  all  Bases,  and  for  every 
variety  of  Ground  and  Side  Slopes.  By  M.  E.  Lyons,  C.  E. 


Sheet  No.  1.  General  Table  for  all  Bases  and  all  Slopes. 


Do. 

Do. 

2. 

3. 

For  Side  Hill  Cuts  and  Fills. 
Base  12  feet  Slopes, 

1J  to 

Do. 

4. 

do. 

14 

do. 

1|  to 

Do. 

5. 

do. 

15 

do. 

|  to 

.  Do. 

6. 

do. 

15 

do. 

1  to 

Do. 

7. 

do. 

15 

do. 

•  . 

1J  to 

Do. 

8. 

do. 

16 

do. 

|  to 

Do. 

9. 

do. 

16 

do. 

1  to 

Do. 

10. 

do. 

18 

do. 

£  to 

Do. 

11. 

do. 

18 

do. 

f  to 

Do. 

12. 

do. 

18 

do. 

1  to 

Do. 

13. 

do. 

18 

do. 

Ij  to 

Do. 

14. 

do. 

20 

do. 

lj  to 

Do. 

15. 

do. 

24 

do. 

I  to 

Do. 

16. 

do. 

24 

do. 

li  to 

Do. 

17. 

do. 

25 

do. 

H  to 

Do. 

18. 

do. 

26 

do. 

.  • 

l|  to 

Do. 

19. 

do. 

28 

do. 

l  to 

Do. 

20. 

do. 

30 

do. 

1  to 

Do. 

21. 

do. 

30 

do. 

li  to 

Do. 

22. 

do. 

30 

do. 

l|  to 

Do. 

23. 

do. 

32 

do. 

1  to 

Do. 

24. 

do. 

32 

do. 

U  t0 

The  Tables  are  printed  in  clear,  bold  type  on  tinted  paper,  sheets  25x16  inches. 
They  may  be  used  by  candle-light  without  injuring  the  eyesight.  Each  sheet  is  com¬ 
plete  in  itself,  and  embraces  all  that  is  wanted  in  connection  with  the  Base  or  Slope 
designated,  whether  on  level  or  side-hill  cross  section. 

Per  sheet,  25  cents ;  bound  in  one  volume, . $8  50 

A  sample  book  of  all  our  papers  from  800  to  835  sent  on  application. 


58  JAMES  W  QUEEN  &  00.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


FIELD  BOOKS. 

No.  Price. 

841.  Level  Book,  7x4  inches,  made  of  superior  drawing  paper,  per  dozen,  $6  00 


842.  Do.  6£x4  do.  extra  smooth  paper,  .  .  do.  4  50 

842  Profile  Level  Books,  7x4  inches,  made  of  superior  drawing  paper,  do.  7  50 

843.  Transit  Books,  7x4  inches,  made  of  superior  drawing  paper,  do.  6  00 

844.  Do.  G£x4  do.  extra  smooth  paper,  .  .  do.  4  50 

845.  Record,  7^x5  inches,  made  of  superior  writing  paper,  .  do.  9  00 

846.  Cross  Section  Books,  8  inches  long  by  7  wide,  for  Topography,  do.  12  00 


BOUND  PROFILE  BOOKS. 


These  books  are  for  field  or  office  purposes,  being  printed  on  both  sides,  of  a  tough 
thick  paper,  and  bound  in  flexible  covers  convenient  for  the  pocket.  Each  page  will 
contain  a  profile  of  three  thousand  feet  in  length,  so  that  each  folio  will  contain  an 
average  section  of  a  road  as  usually  laid  out  for  construction.  Railroad  and  other 
engineers  will  find  them  very  useful.  Size  of  book  9£  by  5f  inches.  The  rulings 
correspond  to  our  large  profile  plates  A  and  B. 

847.  Plate  A,  25  leaves  imitation  Turkey  morocco,  with  elastic  band,  .  3  50 


Do. 

50 

do. 

do.  do.  do. 

5  00 

Do. 

100 

do. 

do.  do.  do. 

8  00 

Do. 

50 

do. 

Turkey  morocco,  turned  edges,  with  elastic  band, 

6  00 

Do. 

100 

do. 

do.  do.  do. 

9  00 

848.  Plate  B,  25 

do. 

imitation  Turkey  morocco,  with  elastic  band, 

3  50 

Do. 

50 

do. 

do.  do.  do. 

5  00 

Do 

100 

do. 

do.  do.  do. 

8  00 

Do. 

50 

do. 

Turkey  morocco,  turned  edges,  with  elastic  band, 

6  00 

Do. 

100 

do. 

do.  do.  do. 

9  00 

PAPER  PROTRACTORS. 

850.  Whole  Circle  Protractor,  12  inches  diameter,  half  degrees,  on  drawing 


paper,  each,  ...........  30 

851.  Whole  Circle  Protractor,  12  inches  diameter,  half  degrees,  on  Bristol 

boards,  each,  ...........  40 

852.  Half  Circle  Protractor,  5  inches  diameter,  half  degrees,  on  Bristol 

boards,  each,  .......  „ ...  25 

853.  Lyman’s  System  Chart  of  Bolts  and  Nuts,  with  description,  each,  .  2  00 


855. 


859. 

PORCELAIN  SLABS. 


For  India  Ink  and  Colors. 


Containing  3  holes  or  cups  and  1  slanting  division. 


855. 

Measuring 

2f  by  1|  inches,  .... 

•  •  • 

each, 

20 

856. 

Do. 

3f  by  2f  do . 

•  •  • 

do. 

35 

857. 

Do. 

4|  by  2f  do . 

•  •  *  • 

do. 

40 

858. 

Do. 

4f  by  3  do.  .... 

. 

do. 

50 

CABINET  NESTS. 

Porcelain  Saucers  in  Nests  ;  fitted  on  each  other. 

859. 

Containing  5  Saucers  and  a  Cover,  21  inches  in 

diameter,  per  nest. 

75 

860. 

Do. 

5  do.  do.  2f  do. 

do.  do. 

. 

1  00 

861. 

Do. 

5  do.,  do.  do. 

do.  do. 

. 

1  25 

JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  00.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  59 


WINSOE  &  NEWTON’S  WATEE  OOLOES. 


Whole  Cake.  862.  Half  Cake. 

862.  Whole  cakes,  30  cents  each ;  half  cakes,  15  cents  each. 


Antwerp  Blue, 
Bistre, 

Blue  Black, 

British  Ink, 

Brown  Ochre, 

Brown  Pink, 

Bronze, 

Burnt  Roman  Ochre, 
Burnt  Sienna, 

Burnt  Umber, 
Chinese  White, 
Chrome  Yellow, 
Cologne  Earth, 
Constant  White, 

Deep  Chrome, 
Dragon’s  Blood, 


Emerald  Green, 

Flake  White, 

Gamboge, 

Hooker’s  Green,  No.  1, 
Hooker’s  Green,  No.  2, 
Indigo, 

Indian  Red, 

Italian  Pink, 

Ivory  Black, 

King’s  Yellow, 

Lamp  Black, 

Light  Red, 

Naples  Yellow, 

Neutral  Tint, 

New  Blue, 

Olive  Green, 


Payne’s  Grey, 
Prussian  Blue, 
Prussian  Green, 
Raw  Sienna, 

Raw  Umber, 

Red  Chalk, 

Red  Lead, 

Red  Ochre, 
Roman  Ochre, 
Sap  Green, 

Terre  Verte, 
Vandyke  Brown, 
Venetian  Red, 
Vermilion, 
Yellow  Lake, 
Yellow  Ochre. 


Orange  Chrome, 

863.  Whole  cakes,  60  cents  each;  half  cakes,  30  cents  each. 


Black  Lead, 
Brown  Madder, 
Chalon’s  Brown, 
Crimson  Lake, 
Indian  Yellow, 


Mars  Yellow, 
Neutral  Orange, 
Purple  Lake, 
Roman  Sepia, 
Reuben’s  Madder, 


Scarlet  Lake, 
Scarlet  Vermilion, 
Sepia, 

Warm  Sepia. 


864.  Whole  cakes,  85  cents  each ;  half  cakes,  45  cents  each. 

Cobalt  Blue,  |  Orange  Vermilion,  |  Violet  Carmine. 

865.  Whole  cakes,  $1.15  each;  half  cakes,  60  cents  each. 


Aureolin, 

Burnt  Carmine, 
Cadmium  Yellow, 
Cadmium  Orange, 
Carmine, 


Pale  Cadmium  Yellow, 
Pink  Madder, 

Pure  Scarlet, 

Rose  Madder, 
Viridian. 


French  Blue, 

Gallstone, 

Green  Oxide  of  Chromium, 

Indian  Purple, 

Intense  Blue, 

Lemon  Yellow, 

866.  Whole  cakes,  $1.80  each;  half  cakes,  90  cents  each. 

Field’s  Orange  Vermilion,  I  Mars  Orange,  I  Smalt, 

Madder  Carmine,  '  Purple  Madder,  '  Ultramarine  Ash. 

Color  Boxes  furnished  to  order,  to  hold  6,  12,  18,  or  24  whole  or  half  cakes. 

WINSOE  &  NEWTON’S  WATEE  00L0E  LIQUIDS- 


Extract  of  Ox  Gall,  60  cents. 

Indian  Ink,  50 

Chinese  White,  50 


In  Glass 

Bottles. 

866*. 

Carmine, 

60  cents. 

867|. 

866§. 

Indelible  Brown  Ink, 

60 

868. 

867. 

Prout’s  Brown, 

60 

868*. 

867*. 

Gold  Iuk, 

50 

60  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


QUEEN’S  LIQUID  INDIAN  INK. 

This  ink  is  specially  recommended,  working  up  easily  and  smoothly,  and  leaving 
a  beautiful,  well-marked,  and  permanent  impression. 

869.  In  half-ounce  glass  bottles,  same  as  No.  868, . $0  35 

869£.  In  one  ounce  do.  do.  .  60 


OSBOKNE’S  WATEE  00L0ES. 


87o. 

870.  Walnut  Chests,  with  Lock,  Drawer,  Paint  Stone,  Water  Glass,  India  Ink, 


Brushes, 

and  12  colors, 

$10  00 

87i. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

18  do. 

11  50 

872. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

24  do. 

14  00 

873. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

BEUSHES. 

do. 

24  half  cakes 

10  00 

875. 


875.  Camel  Hair  Pencil,  ordinary  quality,  2  inches  long,  each, 

Do.  do.  2^  do.  do. 

Do.  do.  3  do.  do. 

876.  Camel  Hair  Pencils,  medium  quality,  2  inches  long,  each, 

Do.  do.  2^  do.  do. 

Do.  do.  3  do.  do. 

877.  Camel  Hair  Pencils,  fine  quality,  2  inches  long,  each,  . 

Do.  do.  2£  do.  do. 

Do.  do.  3  do.  do. 


02 

03 

04 

03 

04 

05 

05 

06 

08 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  fU 


8*78 


No.  Price. 

878.  Camel  Hair  Pencils,  fine  quality,  black  wood  handles,  and  metal  tubes, 

Nos.  1  and  2,  each,  ..........  $0  15 

3  and  4,  do.  ..........  10 

5  and  6,  do.  ..........  10 


879. 

879.  Double  Camel  Hair  Wash  Pencils,  fine  quality,  metal  tubes,  wood  handles, 


No.  1,  each, .  40 

2,  do .  50 

3,  do .  60 


880. 


880.  Large  Camel  Hair  Pencils,  in  swan  quill,  fine  quality, 

Nos.  0  and  1,  each,  .........  50 

2  and  3,  do.  .........  40 

4,  5  and  6,  do.  .........  25 

881.  Red  Sable  Hair  Pencils,  l£  inch  to  2  inches  long,  each,  ...  15 

Do.  do.  2  do.  2£  do.  do.  ...  20 

Do.  do.  ty  do.  3|  do.  do.  ...  25 


882.  Red  Sable  Hair  Pencils,  with  black  wood  handles. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  each,  ..... 

3  and  4,  do.  ..... 

5  and  6,  do.  ...... 

883.  Brown  Sable  Hair  Pencils,  with  black  wood  handles, 

-  Nos.  1  and  2,  each,  ...... 

3  and  4,  do.  ...... 

5  and  6,  do . 


G2 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


900. 


903. 


904. 


905. 


no.  INDIA  INK. 

900.  India  Ink,  Sticks  six-sided  gilt,  2  inches  long,  each,  . 

901.  Do.  round,  lion’s  head,  gilt,  2$  inches  long,  each, 

902.  Do.  do.  4  inches  long,  each, 

903.  Do.  oval,  lion’s  head,  3  inches  long,  each, 

904.  Do.  octagon,  gilt,  4$  inches  long,  each,  . 

905.  India  Ink,  Windsor  &  Newton’s  best,  Sticks  square,  3$  inches  long,  each, 


Price. 
$0  25 
40 
75 
40 

1  25 

2  50 


INDIA  KUBBEfi. 

906.  A.  W.  Faber’s,  First  Quality,  White ;  pieces  If-  by  f  inches,  each, 

907.  Do.  do.  do.  If  by  1  do. 

908.  Do.  do.  do.  ‘  l|  by  lj-  do. 

909.  Do.  do.  do.  2  by  If  do. 

910.  Do.  do.  Black,  pure  gum,  2  by  If  do. 

911.  Do.  do.  do.  2fbylf  do. 

912  Do.  Combined  Ink  and  Pencil  Erasers,  each, 

912$.  Do.  do.  do.  mammoth,  each, 

LEAD  PENCILS. 

913.  A.  W.  Faber’s  Hexagonal,  gilt,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  per  dozen,  . 

914.  Do.  Pure  Siberian  Lead,  Nos.  BBBBBB,  BBB,  BB,  B,  HB,  F, 

H,  HH,  HHH,  HHHHHH;  very  superior,  20  cents  each, 
per  dozen, . . 

915.  Do.  small,  round,  for  Divider  Points,  per  dozen,  . 

916.  J.  W.  Queen’s  Hexagonal,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  per  dozen,  .  .  .  . 

917.  Red,  Green,  Blue  and  Yellow  Pencils,  per  dozen,  .  .  .  .  . 

918.  J.  W.  Guttknecht’s  Pencils,  Red  at  one  end,  Blue  at  the  other,  per  dozen, 


06 

10 

15 

20 

20 

35 

30 

40 


i  00 


1  75 

75 

60 

2  00 
2  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


63 


No. 


Price. 


919.  Faber’s  Artist’s  Pencil,  hexagon,  gilt,  each, 

919$.  Leads  for  do.,  6  in  a  box,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  per  box, 

920.  Faber’s  Artist’s  Pencil,  with  Siberian  Lead, 

920$.  Leads  for  do.,  6  in  a  box,  Nos.  4B  to  6H,  per  box, 

The  leads  of  Nos.  919$  and  920$  will  fit  the  new  pencil- 
Alteneder  sets,  Nos.  150,  284,  &c. 


.  $0  26 
60 
35 
85 

holders  in  Swiss  and 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


921.  Mouth  Glue,  per  piece, . •  05 

922.  Gillott’s  Mapping  Pens,  per  dozen, . 75 

923.  Do.  do.  on  cards,  with  holder,  per  dozen,  ...  75 

924.  Do.  Lithographic  Crow  Quill  Pens,  on  card,  with  holder,  per  dozen,  75 


925. 


925.  Rogers  &  Son’s  Steel  Blade  Eraser,  cocoa  handles,  each, 

926.  Do.  do.  do.  ivory  handles, 

Gillott’s  extra  fine  Steel  Pens,  No.  303,  per  gross  $1.66,  per  dozen, 
“Falcon,”  “Commercial,”  and  “  Business”  Pens,  per  gross, 

Best  Foolscap  Paper,  per  ream  $6.50,  per  quire, 

Do.  Letter  do.  do.  5.25,  do.  .... 

Do.  Commercial  Note,  do.  4.00,  do.  .... 

Superior  Post  Office  Paper,  buff  tint,  per  ream  11.00,  per  quire, 

Printed  Legal  Cap  Paper,  specially  ruled  for  specifications  and  contracts, 


per  ream  10.60,  per  quire,  60 

Flat  Paper,  smooth,  extra,  16x21,  per  ream, . 9  50 

Do.  do.  do.  18x23,  do.  . 13  50 

Superior  White  Envelopes,  per  thousand  5.25,  per  package,  ...  25 

Do.  Buff  do.  do.  4.25,  do.  ...  15 

Do.  do.  do.  “  legal,”  (large  size)  per  thousand  8.75,  package,  30 

Arnold’s  Writing  Fluid,  per  quart, . •  .  87 

Blue  Ink,  per  bottle,  . .  26 

David’s  Carmine,  2  ounce  bottles,  with  glass  stoppers,  per  bottle,  .  .  50 

Rubber  Bands,  $  inch  wide,  2  inches  long,  per  gross  1.15,  per  dozen,  .  12 

Do.  $  do.  2$  do.  do.  1.40,  do.  .  .  15 

Do.  $  do.  3  do.  do.  1.65,  do.  .  .  20 

Do.  $  do.  3$  do.  do.  2  00,  do.  .  .  25 

Do.  $  do.  2  do.  do.  2.25,  do.  .  .  25 

Do.  $  do.  2$  do.  do.  2.60,  do.  .  .  30 

Do.  $  do.  3  do.  do.  2.75,  do.  .  .  35 

Do.  $  do.  3$  do.  do.  3.00,  do.  .  .  40 

Do.  $  do.  assorted  length,  do.  2.00. 

Do.  ^  d-o.  1$  inches  long  for  tickets,  &c.,  per  gross,  .  25 

All  other  sizes  Rubber  Bands  furnished  at  proportional  rates. 

Mucilage,  per  quart  1.25,  per  cone  (3  oz.),  ......  25 

Red  Chalk  Pencils  for  Marking  Stakes,  per  dozen,  .  •  .  .  .  1  25 

Red  Chalk,  in  lumps,  per  pound,  ........  30 

Arkansas  Oil  Stones,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  25  to  2  00 


Copying  Books,  Copying  Ink  and  Presses,  Blotting  Paper,  and  all  articles  of  Sta¬ 
tionery  needed  in  Engineer’s  offices  furnished  at  reasonable  rates. 

Envelopes,  Letter  and  Note  Heads,  Cardfs,  &c.,  printed  and  lithographed  at  usual 
prices. 


60 

75 

25 

75 

35 

30 

25 

65 


64  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


i 


CHAPTER  XI. 
POCKET  COMPASSES. 


933. 


•* 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  65 
No.  Price. 

930.  Pocket  Compass,  round  red  wood  case,  no  stop  to  needle,  each,  .  $0  50 


931. 

Do. 

square  do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

.  , 

50 

932. 

Pocket  Compass, 

,  of  Brass,  round, 

1^  inches 

diameter, 

with  cover,  no 

stop  to  needle, 

, each,  . 

mahogany  case,  l£ 

50 

933. 

Pocket  Compass, 

in.  square, 

with  stop  to  needle, 

each, 

I 

50 

934. 

Do. 

do.  2 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

2 

00 

935. 

Do. 

do.  2£ 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

2 

25 

936. 

Do. 

do.  3 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do 

2 

75 

937.  Pocket  Compass,  brass  round,  with  cover,  1|  inches  diameter,  with  stop 

to  needle,  ........  1  25 

938.  Do.  brass  round,  with  cover,  lj  inches  diameter,  with  slop 

and  agate  centre  to  needle,  ...  1  75 

939.  Do  watch  pattern,  brass,  1  in.  diameter,  no  stop  to  needle,  75 


940. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

1 

00 

941. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

l 

do. 

with  stop 

do. 

1 

00 

942. 

Do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

1 

25 

943.  945. 

943.  Pocket  Compass,  of  brass,  round,  lj  in.  diameter,  with  stop  and  agate 

cetatre  to  needle, . 1  50 

944.  Do.  watclr  pattern,  brass,  2  in.  diameter,  with  stop  and 

agate  centre  to  needle,  .  .  .  .  .  .  2  00  * 

945.  Do.  watch  pattern,  brass,  lj  inches  diameter,  with  hinged 

cover  and  stop  to  needle, . %  00’ 


5 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK 


Price. 


66 

No. 

946.  Pocket  Compass,  watch  pattern,  brass,  1|  inches  diameter,  with  hinged 

cover,  stop  and  agate  centre  to  needle,  .  .  $2  50 

947.  Do.  watch  pattern,  German  Silver,  1^  inches  diameter, 

hinged  cover,  stop  and  agate  centre  to  needle,  .  3  00 


948.  Pocket  Compasses ;  gilt,  watch  pattern,  with  stop,  enamelled  dial  and 

agate  centre  ;  1  to  2  inches  diameter,  in  morocco  cases,  (a  very  superior 
London  article ,  such  as  are  used  by  officers  in  the  British  army,)  If  inches 
diameter,  each,  ........... 

949.  Same  as  No.  948,  but  If  inches  diameter,  each,  . 

950.  Charm  Compasses,  gilt,  to  hang  to  watch  guard,  each,  . 

951.  Do.  solid  gold,  to  hang  to  watch  guard,  each, 


6  00 
8  00 
25 


SUN  DIAL  COMPASSES. 


952.  953. 


952.  Pocket  Compass  and  Sun  Dial,  red  wood  box,  with  cover,  each,  .  .  50 

953.  Do.  mahogany  case.,  with  Universal  Sun  Dial,  each,  .  .  8  00 

954.  Do.  brass,  with  Levels  and  Leveling  Screws  and  Universal 

Sun  Dial,  each, . 14  00 

955.  Do.  brass,  with  Hinged  Cover  and  Sun  Dial,  2  in.  diameter,  4  00 

956.  Do.  do.  do.  2j  do.  5  50 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


6? 


No. 

957.  Prismatic  Azimuth  Compass,  of  Brass,  2f  inches  diameter,  . 

958.  Do.  do.  4  do. 

959.  Geological  Compass,  of  Brass,  with  pendulum  for  ascertaining  the  angle 

of  dip  in  rocks,  each,  .......... 

960.  Geological  Compass,  same  as  No.  959,  but  made  of  German  Silver, 


Price. 
$18  00 
22  00 

4  50 

5  50 


961. 


961.  Miner’s  Compass,  for  tracing  iron  ore, . 12  00 

This  consists  essentially  of  a  dipping  needle,  about  2J  inches  long,  which  inclines 
towards  any  mass  of  iron,  and  thus  discovers  its  position. 

When  used  for  tracing  ore,  the  observer  should  hold  the  ring  in  his  hand,  and  keep 
the  needle  north  and  south,  standing  with  his  face  to  the  west. 

If  held  horizontal,  it  serves,  of  course,  as  an  ordinary  pocket  compass. 

6 


Prick. 


68  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 

No. 

9«2.  Surveying  Compass,  with  folding  sights,  needle  3^  inches  long,  nonius 
on  side  of  compass,  box  for  adding  and  subtracting  magnetic  varia¬ 
tions,  two  straight  levels,  Jacob  Staff  mountings,  ....  $18  09 

963.  Surveying  Compass,  same  as  No.  962,  but  without  nonius,  needle  3| 

inches  long, . 15  00 

964.  Surveying  Compass,  same  as  No.  962,  without  levels  and  nonius,  needle 

3  J  inches  long,  j . 14  00 

965.  Surveying  Compass,  same  as  No.  964,  but  needle  inches  long,  .  12  00 


All  the  Compasses  from  No.  957  to  965  inclusive ,  have  Morocco  Boxes. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

SURVEYOR'S  COMPASSES,  TRANSITS,  LEVELS  AND 

LEVELING  RODS. 


966. 


966.  Surveying  Compass,  4  inch  needle,  12£  inch  plate,  two  straight  levels, 

Jacob  Staff  mountings,  and  sights  graduated  for  taking  angles  of 
elevation  and  depression,  . .  30  00 

967.  Surveying  Compass,  5  inch  needle,  15£  inch  plate,  two  straight  levels, 

outkeeper  and  Jacob  Staff  mountings,  and  sights  graduated  for 
taking  angles  of  elevation  and  depression,  .  .  .  .  .  35  00 

968.  Surveying  Compass,  6  inch  needle,  15£  inch  plate,  two  straight  levels, 

outkeeper  and  Jacob  Staff  mountings,  and  sights  graduated  for 
taking  angles  of  elevation  and  depression, .  40  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  69 


No.  900.  Prick. 

969.  Surveying  Compass,  4  inch  needle,  I2£  inch  plate,  two  straight  levels, 

outkeeper  and  nonius  for  adding  or  subtracting  the  magnetic  varia¬ 
tions  of  the  needle,  and  sights  graduated  for  reading  angles  of  ele¬ 
vation  and  depression,  .........  $40  00 

970.  Surveying  Compass,  same  as  No.  969,  but  with  5  inch  needle  and  15£ 

inch  plate,  ............  45  00 

971.  Surveying  Compass,  same  as  No.  969,  but  has  6  inch  needle  and  15| 

inch  plate,  ............  50  00 


THE  RAILROAD  COMPASS. 


973. 


The  Railroad  Compass  has  the  Main  Plate,  Levels,  Sights  and  Needle  of  the  ordinary 
Surveying  Compass,  but  has  also  underneath  the  main  plate  a  divided  circle  or  limb 
by  which  horizontal  angles  to  single  minutes  can  be  read  independently  of  the  needle. 

973.  Railroad  Compass,  5  inch  needle  and  with  one  vernier  to  limb,  and 

sights  graduated  to  read  angles  of  depression  or  elevations,  .  .  $65  00 


Prici. 


10  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  00.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 

No. 

974.  Railroad  Compass,  5J  inch  needle  and  with  one  vernier  to  limb,  and 

sights  graduated  to  read  angles  of  depression  or  elevations,  .  .  $70  00 

975.  Railroad  Compass,  5J  inch  needle  and  with  two  verniers  to  limb,  and 

sights  graduated  to  read  angles  of  depression  or  elevations,  .  .  80  00 

976.  Tripod,  with  cherry  legs,  furnished  to  any  of  the  Compasses  from  No. 

962  to  975,  ............  8  00 

977.  Tripod,  with  cherry  legs,  with  parallel  plates  and  leveling  screws 

and  clamp  and  tangent  movement,  furnished  to  any  of  the  Com¬ 
passes  from  962  to  975, .  18  00 

All  the  Compasses  from  No.  966  to  975  inclusive,  are  packed  in  handsome  Mahogany  Boxes. 


VERNIER  TRANSIT. 


The  Vernier  Transit,  or  Transit  Compass,  has  the  same  general  properties  as  the 
Vernier  Compass  No.  969,  but  is  furnished  with  a  Telescope  in  place  of  the  ordinary 
sights.  The  Telescope  is  from  ten  to  twelve  inches  long,  and  sufficiently  powerful  to 
see  and  set  a  flag  at  a  distance  of  two  miles,  in  a  clear  day. 

978.  Transit  Compass,  with  needle  4  inches  long,  and  light  tripod,  .  •  $75  00 

979.  Transit  Compass,  same  as  No.  978,  but  with  vertical  circle  3J  inches 

diameter  and  clamp  and  tangent  movement  to  Telescope,  .  .  90  00 

980.  Transit  Compass,  with  needle  5  inches  long  and  light  tripod,  .  .  80  00 

981.  Transit  Compass,  same  as  No.  980,  but  with  vertical  circle  3J  inches 

diameter  and  clamp  and  tangent  movement  to  Telescope, 


95  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  T1 

Price. 

982.  Transit  Compass,  with  needle  6  inches  and  light  tripod,  .  .  $85  00 

98.3.  Transit  Compass,  same  as  No.  982,  but  with  vertical  circle  and  clamp 

and  tangent  movement  to  Telescope,  ......  100  00 

Sights  with  folding  joints  on  Telescope  to  either  Transit  Compass  from 

978  to  983,  ............  8  00 

Right  Angle  Sights  on  standards  of  either  Transit  Compass  from  978  to  983,  8  00 


SURVEYOR’S  TRANSITS. 


985. 


The  Surveyor’s  Transit,  as  above  illustrated,  has  a  Telescope,  from  ten  to  twelve 
inches  long,  constructed  with  the  finest  lenses  ;  under  the  telescope  a  level  is  attached 
for  taking  such  levels  as  may  occur  in  the  practice  of  a  surveyor.  On  one  end  of  the 
axis  of  the  telescope  a  divided  circle,  4  \  inches  diameter,  is  attached,  for  reading  to  min¬ 
utes  angles  of  elevation  and  depression.  The  rim  of  the  compass  box  is  divided  to  J 
degrees,  and  is  provided  with  a  nonius  for  adding  and  subtracting  the  magnetic  varia¬ 
tions  of  the  needle.  The  limb  on  the  divided  circle  outside  the  compass  box,  is  pro¬ 
vided  with  two  verniers  at  right  angles  to  the  telescope  and  read  to  minutes.  The 
tripod  head  is  arranged  with  shifting  centre,  for  setting  the  instruments  quickly  over 
a  given  point  without  the  trouble  of  altering  the  position  of  the  legs.  The  tripod  legs 
are  made  of  very  strong  mahogany. 


V 2  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 

No-  Price. 

085.  Surveyor’s  Transit,  with  two  verniers  to  limb,  level  under  Telescope, 
vertical  circle  4^  inches  diameter,  with  clamp  and  tangent  Screw  to 
axis  of  Telescope,  needle  4  inches  long,  . $195  00 

986.  Survejmr’s  Transit,  same  as  No.  985,  but  without  vertical  circle  to  axis 

of  Telescope, . 181  00 

987.  Surveyor’s  Transit,  same  as  No.  985,  but  without  level  under  Telescope 

and  without  vertical  circle  and  clamp  and  tangent  screw  to  axis 
of  Telescope, .  160  00 

988.  Surveyor’s  Transit,  same  as  No.  985,  but  with  needle  5  or  5  J  inches  long,  200  00 

989.  Surveyor’s  Transit,  same  as  No.  988,  but  without  vertical  circle  to  axis 

of  Telescope, .  186  00 

990.  Surveyor’s  Transit,  same  as  No.  988,  but  without  either  level,  vertical 

circle  or  clamp,  and  tangent  screw  to  Telescope,  ....  165  00 

991.  Surveyor’s  Transit,  with  one  vernier  to  limb,  level  under  Telescope, 

vertical  circle  4J  inches  diameter,  with  clamp  and  tangent  screw  to 

axis  of  Telescope,  needle  5  or  5£  inches  long,  .  .  .  .  .  175  00 

992.  Surveyor’s  Transit,  same  as  No.  991,  but  without  vertical  circle,  .  .  161  00 

993.  Surveyor’s  Transit,  same  as  No.  991,  but  without  either  level,  vertical 

or  clamp,  and  tangent  screw  to  Telescope,  .....  140  00 


The  Surveyor's  Transits ,  from  No.  985  to  993,  weigh  about  13  lbs.  each. 


ENGINEER'S  TRANSIT. 


The  description  given  on  page  69  for  the  Surveyor’s  Transit  will  apply  for  the  En¬ 
gineer’s  Transit,  excepting  that  the  latter  has  the  axis  or  centre  running  from  the 
lower  parallel  plate  of  the  tripod  head  to  the  centre  plate  of  the  instruments,  thus  se¬ 
curing  greater  accuracy  for  laying  of  angles.  The  upper  part  of  the  Transit  does  not 
separate  from  the  tripod  head,  as  in  the  Surveying  Transit,  but  is  permanently  at¬ 
tached  to  the  parallel  plates  and  leveling  screws,  and  when  put  in  its  box,  is  unscrewed 
from  the  tripod  at  the  lower  parallel  plate. 

994.  Engineer’s  Transit,  with  two  verniers  to  limb,  level  under  Telescope, 

vertical  circle  4j  inches  diameter,  with  clamp  and  tangent  screw  to 

axis  of  Telescope,  4  inch  needle,  .  .  ....  $210  00 

995.  Engineer’s  Transit,  same  as  No.  994,  but  without  vertical  to  axis  of 

Telescope, <  .  .  .  •  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  196  00 

996.  Engineer’s  Transit,  same  as  No.  994,  but  without  either  level,  vertical 

circle  or  clamp  and  tangent  screw  to  Telescope,  ....  175  00 

997.  Engineer’s  Transit,  with  two  verniers  to  limb,  level  under  Telescope, 

vertical  and  clamp  and  tangent  screw  to  Telescope,  needle  4£  or  5 
inches  long,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  215  00 

998.  Engineer’s  Transit,  same  as  No.  997,  but  without  level  under  Telescope,  201  00 

999.  Engineer’s  Transit,  same  as  No.  997,  but  without  either  level  under 

Telescope,  vertical  circle  or  clamp,  and  tangent  screw  to  Telescope,  180  00 


All  the  Transit  Instruments  from  No.  979  to  999  inclusive ,  are  furnished  with  handsome 
Mahogany  Boxes. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  k  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  73 


o 

o 


SOLAE  COMPASS. 


No.  Prick. 

1001.  Burt’s  Solar  Compass,  with  adjusting  socket  and  leveling  tripod,  .  $220  00 
1004.  Micrometer  Telescope,  1G  to  20  inches  long,  with  rack  movement  to 

object  glass  and  movable  clips  to  attach  to  compass  sights,  .  .  25  00 


74  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


ENGINEER'S  LEVEL. 

4 


1005. 


No.  Pwoa 

1005.  Y  Level,  of  the  most  approved  form  and  construction,  with  Telescope 
either  16,  18,  20  or  22  inches  long.  In  this  instrument  the  Telescope 
is  made  to  revolve  readily  and  truly  in  the  Ys  by  rings  of  bell-metal, 
which,  when  desired,  may  be  firmly  clamped  by  the  clips,  and  held 
in  any  position.  It  has  a  rack-and-pinion  movement  to  both  object 
and  eye  glasses,  an  adjustment  for  centering  the  eye-piece,  and 
another  for  insuring  the  accurate  projection  of  the  object  glass  in  a 
straight  line.  Both  of  these  are  completely  concealed  from  obser¬ 
vation  and  disturbance  by  a  thin  ring,  which  slides  over  them.  The 
Ys  of  this  level  are  made  large  and  strong,  of  the  best  bell-metal, 
and  each  have  two  nuts,  both  being  adjustable  with  the  ordinary 
steel  pin.  The  level  bar  is  made  round,  of  well-hammered  brass, 
and  shaped  so  as  to  possess  the  greatest  strength  irt  the  parts  most 
subject  to  sudden  strains.  The  tripod  head  has  the  same  plates 
and  leveling  screws  as  that  of  the  Engineer’s  Transit,  .  .  .  $135  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


75 


1006. 


No. 

1006,  American  Dumpy  or  Builder’s  Level,  with  Telescope  15  inches  long, 

1007.  Do.  do.  do.  11  do. 


1008. 


Price. 
$75  00 
60  00 


1008.  French  Leveling  Instrument,  without  Telescope, . 


20  00 


16 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


No. 


1010. 


1011. 


1012. 

Price. 


1010.  Philadelphia  Leveling  Rod,  made  of  seasoned  mahogany,  .  .  .  $18  00 

1011.  New  York  Leveling  Rod,  made  of  seasoned  satin  wood,  .  .  .  16  00 

1012.  Boston  Leveling  Rod,  made  of  seasoned  mahogany,  .  .  .  .  16  00 

1013.  Ranging  Poles,  6  feet  long,  with  steel  pointed  shoe,  and  divided  off  in 

feet,  which  are  painted  red  and  white,  alternately,  .  .  .  .  4  00 

1014.  Ranging  Poles,  8  feet  long,  with  steel  pointed  shoe,  and  divided  off  in 

feet,  which  are  painted  red  and  white,  alternately,  .  .  .  .  4  60 

1015.  Ranging  Poles,  10  feet  long,  with  steel  pointed  shoe,  and  divided  off  in 

feet,  which  are  painted  red  and  white,  alternately,  .  .  .  .  5  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  .  77 


HA HD  LEVELS. 


1016. 


1017 


No. 

1016.  Reflecting  Hand  Level,  for  Engineers,  . 

1017.  Locke’s  Hand  Level,  made  of  German  Silver, 

1018.  Do.  '  do.  do.  Brass, 

101 8 J.  Barometer  for  Surveying  Expeditions,  8000  feet, 


Pricjs. 
$6  00 
12  00 
10  00 
27  50 


1019.  Clynometer  or  Slope  Level,  small  size,  in  morocco  box,  .  .  .  .  8  00 

1020.  Do.  do.  large  size,  do.  ...  12  00 

1021.  Do.  do.  do.  with  perpendicular  sights,  .  15  00 


1022. 


1022. 

1023. 

1024. 

1025. 

1026. 
1027. 


Pocket  Levels,  mounted  in  Brass,  3  inches  long, 

Do.  do.  do.  6  do. 

Do.  do.  do.  9  do. 

Do.  do.  do.  12  do. 

Ground  Level  Bulbs,  2  to  6  inches  long,  each  from  50  cents  to  $2  50 


Unground  do. 


do. 


do. 


do 


12  to  60  cents. 


75 

1  50 

2  25 

3  00 


78  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 


POCKET  SEXTANTS,  ODOMETERS,  CHAINS,  TAPE 
MEASURES  AND  POCKET  RULES, 


1030.  103.. 

No. 

1030.  Pocket  Sextant,  with  Telescope,  very  accurate,  .... 

1031.  Odometer,  for  measuring  distances  traveled  by  a  carriage,  . 

1031£.  Surveyor’s  Cross,  for  turning  right  angles,  .... 

SURVEYOR’S  AND  ENGINEER’S  CHAINS. 


Price. 
$40  00 
20  00 
3  00 


1032. 


1032.  Surveyor’s  Chain,  2  poles,  50  links,  No.  9,  wire  oval  rings, 


1033. 

Do. 

2 

do. 

40 

do. 

8,  do. 

• 

1034. 

Do. 

2 

do. 

50 

do. 

8,  do. 

• 

1035. 

Do. 

2 

do. 

50 

do. 

7,  do. 

•  * 

1036. 

Do. 

4 

do. 

100 

do. 

9,  wire  round  rings, 

•  • 

2  00 
2  75 

2  75 

3  75 
3  50 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO., 

PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 

T9 

No. 

1037.  Surveyor’s  Chain, 

4  poles,  100  links,  No.  8, 

wire  oval  rings, 

Price. 

$4  50 

1038. 

Do. 

4  do.  100 

do. 

7, 

do. 

5  50 

1039. 

Do. 

4  do.  100 

do. 

12, 

best  steel  wire, 

brazed 

1040. 

Do. 

2  do.  50 

do. 

12, 

links  and  rings-, 
best  steel  wire, 

brazed 

14  00 

1041. 

Engineer’s  Chain, 

50  feet,  50 

do. 

7, 

links  and  rings, 
wire, 

•  ' 

7  00 

4  00 

1042. 

Do. 

100  do. 100 

do. 

7, 

do. 

6  00 

1043. 

Do. 

50  do.  50 

do. 

12, 

best  steel  wire, 

brazed 

1044. 

Do. 

100  do.  100 

do. 

12, 

links  and  rings, 
best  steel  wire, 
links  and  rings, 

brazed 

8  00 

• 

15  00 

GRTFMMAN'S  PATENT  CHAINS. 


1045.  66  feet,  No.  15  Tempered  Steel  Wire,  100  links,  weight  1}  lbs.,  with  10 

extra  links,  ......... 

1046.  33  feet,  No.  15  Tempered  Steel  Wire,  50  links,  weight  f  lbs.,  with  5 

extra  links,  ....... 

1047.  100  feet,  No.  15  Tempered  Steel  Wire,  200  links,  weight  2  lbs.,  with  15 

extra  links, 

1048.  50  feet,  No.  15  Tempered  Steel  Wire,  100  links,  weight  1  lb.,  with  10 

extra  links,  ......... 

1049.  33  feet,  No.  12  Wire,  5  tallies,  with  5  extra  links,  weight  114  lbs.,  . 

1050.  66  do.  12  do.  10  do.  10  do.  do.  3  b  do. 

1051.  50  do.  12  do.  5  do.  5  do.  do.  21  do. 

1052.  100  do.  12  do.  10  do.  10  do.  do.  4|  do. 

1053.  Spring  Balance  to  use  with  either  of  the  above-named  chains,  . 

1054.  50  feet,  No.  18  Tempered  Steel  Wire,  100  links,'  no  rings,  with  attach¬ 

ments  of  spring-balance,  level  and  thermometer,  for  very  accurate 
measurements,  weight  £  lbs., . 

1055.  Set  of  10  Marking  Pins,  very  light,  with  leather  case,  ’ 

1056.  Brass  Plummet,  to  use  with  light  chain, . 

1057.  Lead  do.  do.  do.  ... 


10  00 
6  00 
14  00 

8  00 

7  00 

14  00 

8  00 

15  00 
2  00 


17  00 
2  00 
2  00 
1  50 


1058.  1060. 


1058  Marking  Pins,  of  steel  wire,  11  in  a  set,  per  set, . 2  00 

1059.  Marking  Pins,  of  tempered  steel,  15  in.  long,  £  in.  wide,  11  in  a  set, 

per  set, . 

1060.  Plumbob,  of  brass,  with  steel  point  and  screw  top,  .... 

1061.  Same  as  No.  1060,  but  all  steel,  ....  ... 


7  50 
2  50 
2  50 


80 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


CHESTERMAN’S  LINEN  TAPE  MEASURES. 

No,  Price. 

1065.  Best  Linen  Tape  Measure,  in  strong  leather  case,  50  feet  long,  in  lOths 

or  12ths,  each,  ...........  $1  50 

1066.  Best  Linen  Tape  Measure,  in  strong  leather  case,  100  feet  long,  in  lOths 

or  12ths,  each,  ...........  2  75 

Chesterman’s  Wire  Woven  Tape  Measures,  leather  cases;  this  tape  is 
made  of  linen  thread  interwoven  with  fine  brass  wire,  not  so  liable  to 


stretch  as  the  usual  linen  tape,  and  better  calculated  to  withstand 
the  effect  of  moisture. 


10(77. 

Metallic  Tape  Measure,  24  feet  long, 

in  lOths  or 

12ths, 

each, 

# 

2  50 

1068. 

Do. 

do. 

83 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

8  00 

1069. 

Do. 

do. 

40 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

• 

3  25 

1070. 

Do. 

do. 

50 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

• 

3  76 

1071. 

Do. 

do. 

66 

do. 

do. 

do 

do. 

• 

4  25 

1072. 

Do. 

do. 

70 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

• 

4  60 

1073. 

Do. 

do. 

75 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

, 

4  75 

1074. 

Do. 

do. 

80 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

# 

5  00 

1075. 

Do. 

do. 

100 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

. 

6  60 

Chesterman's  Metallic  Tapes  furnished  without  boxes  at  one  half  the  above  prices. 


1065. 


1076. 


1085. 


OHESTERMAN’S  STEEL  TAPE  MEASURES. 

Steel  Tape  Measures ;  all  steel,  to  wind  up  in  a  box,  same  as  linen 
measures,  the  most  accurate,  durable,  and  portable  measures. 

1076.  Steel  Tape  Measure,  10  feet  long,  in  lOths  or  12ths,  in  German  Silver 

case,  each,  ...........  4  25 

1077.  Steel  Tape  Measure,  10  feet  long,  tape  divided  on  one  side  to  12ths, 

and  on  the  other  to  centimetres  and  millimeters,  .  .  .  .  4  50 


1078. 

Steel  Tape  Measure, 

25  feet  long, 

in  lOths 

or  12ths, 

each,  . 

.  '  6  50 

1079. 

Do. 

do. 

33 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

8  00 

1080. 

Do. 

do. 

40 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

9  00 

1081. 

Do. 

do. 

50 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

.  10  60 

1082. 

Do. 

do. 

66 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

. 

.  14  00 

1083. 

Do. 

do. 

75 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

.  16  00 

1084. 

Do. 

do.  100 

do. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

. 

20  50 

1085.  Steel  Tape  Measure,  3  feet  long,  in  German  Silver  case,  with  spring  and 

stop,  tape  divided  into  lOths  or  12ths  of  a  foot,  .  .  .  .  2  00 

1086.  Steel  Tape  Measure,  4  feet  long,  in  German  Silver  case,  with  spring  and 

stop,  tape  divided  into  lOths  or  12ths  of  a  foot,  .  .  .  .  2  25 

1087.  Steel  Tape  Measure,  5  feet  long,  in  German  Silver  case,  with  spring  and 

stop,  tape  divided  into  lOths  or  12ths  of  a  foot,  .  .  .  .  2  50 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  81 

^°-  Price. 

1088.  Steel  Tape  Measure,  6  feet  long,  in  German  Silver  case,  with  spring  and 

stop,  tape  divided  into  lOtlis  or  12ths  of  a  foot,  .  .  .  .  $2  75 

1089.  Steel  Tape  Measure,  3  feet  long,  tape  divided  on  one  side  to  12ths  of  a 

foot,  and  the  other  side  to  centimeters  and  millimeters,  .  .  .  2  25 

1090.  Steel  Tape  Measure,  4  feet  long,  tape  divided  on  one  side  to  12ths  of  a 

foot  and  the  other  side  to  centimeters  and  millimeters,  .  .  .  2  50 

1091.  Steel  Tape  Measure,  5  feet  long,  tape  divided  on  one  side  to  12ths  of  a 

foot,  and  the  other  side  to  centimeters  and  millimeters,  .  .  .  2  75 

1092.  Steel  Tape  Measure,  6  feet  long,  tape  divided  on  one  side  to  12ths  of  a 

foot,  and  the  other  side  to  centimeters  and  millimeters,  .  .  .  3  00 

1093.  Linen  Tape  Measure,  3  feet  long,  in  silver  plated  cases,  with  spring 

and  stop,  ............  75 

1094.  Linen  Tape  Measure,  5  feet  long,  in  silver  plated  cases,  with  spring 

and  stop,  ............  l  00 

1095.  Linen  Tape  Measure,  6  feet  long,  in  silver  plated  cases,  with  spring 

and  stop, . 1  25 


POCKET  EULES. 


1100. 


1100. 

One  Foot, 

four  Fold 

boxwood,  each,  ....... 

25 

1101. 

Do. 

do. 

do.  brass  edges,  bound,  .... 

60 

1102. 

Do. 

do. 

ivory,  brass  mounted, . 

1  00 

1103. 

Do. 

do. 

ivory,  German  Silver  mounted,  .... 

1  70 

1104. 

Do. 

do. 

ivory,  German  Silver  mounted  graduated  in  8th s, 
lOths,  12ths,  lGths  and  lOOths,  for  engineers,  . 

ivory,  graduated  in  8ths,  lOths,  12ths,  and  16ths, 
with  German  Silver  edges,  bound  . 

2  25 

1105. 

Do. 

do. 

3  26 

1106.  Two  Feet,  four  Fold  ;  boxwood, 

6 


1110. 


36- 


82  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 
No. 

1107.  Two  Feet,  Four  Fold  ;  boxwood,  Brass  bound,  with  drafting  scales, 

1108.  Do.  do.  ivory,  German  Silver  mounted,  with  8th,  10th  and 

16th  inches,  and  f  and  1  inch  drafting  scales, 

1109.  Do.  do.  ivory,  same  as  No.  1108,  German  Silver,  bound, 

1110.  Two  Feet,  Six  Fold  Rules;  boxwood,  graduated  8th,  10th,  100th  and 

16th  inches,  ..... 

1111.  Do.  do.  do.  ivory,  graduated  8th,  10th  and  16th  inches, 

1112.  Gear  or  Cog  Wheel  Rules,  for  calculating  the  number  of  cogs  to  be  cut, 

of  any  desired  size,  in  a  certain  diameter.  Made  of  boxwood  ;  two 
feet  long,  two-fold,  brass  bound;  graduated  from  5ths  to  16ths  of 
inches  ;  with  descriptive  table.  Each, . 


1113.  Combination  Rule,  One  Foot,  Two  Fold,  boxwood.  This  is  the  most  con¬ 

venient  and  useful  pocket-rule  ever  made ;  it  combines  in  itself  a 
Carpenter's  Rule,  Spirit  Level,  Square  Plumb,  Bevel,  Indicator  Brace, 
Scale,  Draughting  Scale  of  equal  parts,  T  Square.  Protractor,  Right 
angle  Triangle,  and  with  a  straight  edge  can  be  used  as  a  Parallel 
Ruler,  all  the  parts  of  which,  in  their  separate  applications,  are  per¬ 
fectly  reliable,  ........... 

1114.  Combination  Rule,  One  Foot,  Two  Fold;  ivory,  same  as  above,  . 

An  explanation  and  directions  for  use  accompanies  each  of  the  Com¬ 
bination  Rules. 

1115.  Two  Feet,  Two  Fold,  Boxwood  Slide  Rule,  Routledge’s,  jyith  book,  . 


Price. 
$1  50 

6  00 
8  50 

1  25 
7  50 


4  00 


3  50 
8  00 


1  75 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  83 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

CATALOGUE  OF  SCIENTIFIC  BOOKS. 


ARCHITECTURE,  CARPENTRY  AND  BUILDING. 

ABERDEEN.  Grecian  Architecture.  By  Earl  of  Aberdeen.  (Weale’s  series,)  $0  40 
ALLEN.  Cottage  Building.  By  C.  B.  Allen.  (Weale’s  series,)  .  .  40 

ALLEN.  Rural  Architecture  ;  being  a  Complete  Description  of  Farm-Houses, 

Cottages  and  Out-Buildings.  By  L.  F.  Allen.  12mo,  .  .  .  1  50 

ARCHITECT’S  (The)  Guide;  or,  Office  and  Pocket  Companion,  for  Archi¬ 
tects,  Engineers,  &c.  By  W.  D.  Haskoll,  G.  Rennie,  F.  Rogers  and  P. 
Thompson.  1  vol.  16mo,  cloth,  . . 1  50 

ASHPITEL.  Treatise  on  Architecture,  including  the  Arts  of  Constructive 
Building,  Stone-Masonry,  Arch-Carpentry,  Roof-Joinery  and  Strength 
of  Materials.  Edited  by  Arthur  Ashpitel.  1  vol.  4to,  cloth.  Illustrated. 
Edinburgh,  18G7.  .........  1  .  15  00 

AUSTIN.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  Calcareous  and  Hydraulic  Limes  and 

Cements.  By  J.  G.  Austin.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  London,  1862,  .  .  2  00 

BARNARD.  School  Architecture.  By  Henry  Barnard.  3d  edition.  1  vol. 

8vo,  cloth.  New  York,  1849,, .  2  00 

BELL.  Carpentry  Made  Easy.  By  W.  F.  Bell.  1  vol.  8vo,  .  .  .  5  00 

BICKNELL’S  VILLAGE  BUILDER.  Elevations  and  Plans  for  Cottages, 

Villas,  Suburban  Residences,  Farmhouses,  Stables  and  Carriage  Houses, 

Stone  Fronts,  School-houses,  Churches,  Court-houses  and  a  Model  Jail. 

4to.  Troy,  1870, . .  12  00 

BLACKBURNE.  .  Rural  and  Suburban  Architecture,  being  a  series  of  designs 
for  suburban  and  rural  villas.  Edited  by  E.  L.  Blackburne  and  other 
eminent  architects.  1  vol.  4to,  half  morocco.  London,  1869,  .  18  00 

BLENKARN.  Practical  Specifications  of  Works  executed  in  Architecture, 

&c.  By  J.  Blenkarn.  1  vol.  8vo.  London,  1865,  ...  .  .  6  00 

BOWLER.  Chapel  and  Church  Architecture,  with  Designs  for  Parsonages. 

By  Rev.  G.  Bowler.  Folio,  illustrated,  .  .  .  .  .  .  10  00 

BROOKS.  Erection  of  Dwelling  Houses,  with  Specifications,  Quantities  of 

Materials,  &c.  27  plates.  By  S.  H.  Brooks.  (Weale’s  series,)  .  .  1  00 

- Modern  Architecture  ;  being  a  series  of  Designs  for  Street  Elevations, 

Shop  Fronts,  Euildings  adapted  for  Towns,  with  Specifications,  &c.  By 

S.  H.  Brooks.  1  vol.  quarto.  London,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  21  00 

- New  Designs  for  Chimney  Pieces,  with  Elevations,  Sections,  Profiles, 

and  Plans.  By  S.  H.  Brooks.  6  parts,  royal  4to.  London,  .  .  .  15  00 

BULLOCK.  The  American  Cottage  Builder.  By  J.  Bullock.  1  vol.  8vo, 

cloth.  Philadelphia,  1869, . .  .  3  50 

- The  Rudiments  of  Architecture  and  Building.  By  J.  Bullock.  8vo,  cloth,  3  50 

BURN.  Model  Designs  for  Mansions,  Villas,  Cottage  Residences,  Park  En¬ 
trances  and  Lodges,  being  Plans,  Elevations,  Sections,  Detailed  Draw¬ 
ings,  and  Descriptive  Specifications.  Arranged  by  Robert  Scott  Burn. 

1  vol.  quarto,  half  morocco, . 15  00 

BURNELL.  Rudimentary  Treatise  on  Limes,  Cements,  Mortars,  Concretes, 

Mastics,  Plastering,  &c.  By  Geo.  R.  Burnell.  Filth  Edition,  with  Ap¬ 
pendices.  (Weale’s  series,)  .........  60 

BURY.  Styles  of  Architecture.  By  T.  Bury.  (Weale’s  edition,)  .  .  60 

i 


84  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


CAMPIN'.  On  the  Construction  of  Iron  Roofs,  a  Theoretical  and  Practical 
Treatise.  By  Francis  Campin,  C.  E.  With  woodcuts  and  plates  of  roofs 
lately  executed.  Small  4to,  cloth.  New  York,  1868,  .  .  .  .  $3  00 

CHAMBERS.  A  Treatise  on  the  Decorative  Part  of  Civil  Architecture,  by 
Sir  Wm.  Chambers,  F.S.A. ;  with  Illustrations,  Notes,  &c.,  by  Joseph 
Gwilt,  F.S.S.  New  ed.  rev.  By  W.  H.  Leeds.  Royal  4to,  cloth,  .  .  8  00 

CLEVELAND  AND  BACKUS.  Cottage  and  Farm  Architecture,  .  .  4  00 

CROFF.  Model  Suburban  Architecture,  embodying  Designs  for  Dwellings 
of  Moderate  Cost,  together  with  elaborate  and  extensive  Villas,  &c.,  &c. 

By  C.  B.  Croff,  Architect.  1  vol.  quarto.  1870,  .  ...  5  00 

CUMMINS  AND  MILLER.  Designs  for  Street  Fronts,  Suburban  Houses  and 
Cottages.  By  M.  F.  Cummins  and  C.  C.  Miller,  Architects.  1  vol,  large 
4to,  cloth.  Troy,  1868, . .  10  00 

-  Modern  American  Architecture,  containing  designs  and  plans  for 

Villas,  Farm-houses,  School-houses,  Cottages,  City  Residences,  Churches, 

&c.  Also  Trussed  Roofs,  Interior  Stone  Finish,  and  many  exterior  de¬ 
tails.  By  M.  F.  Cummins  and  C.  C.  Miller,  Architects.  1  vol.  4to, 
cloth.  Troy,  1868,  (scarce) . 

CUPPER.  The  Universal  Stair-Builder,  being  a  New  Treatise  on  the  Con¬ 
struction  of  Stair-Cases  and  Hand-Rail.  By  R.  A.  Cupper.  4to,  .  6  00 

DAVY.  The  Architect,  Engineer  and  Operative  Builder’s  Constructive 
Manual ;  being  a  Practical  and  Scientific  Treatise  on  the  Construction  of 
Artificial  Foundations  for  Buildings,  Railways,  &c.  By  C.  Davy.  1  vol. 

8vo.  London,  1841, . .  .  .  .  .  .  6  00 

DE  GRAFF.  The  Modern  Geometrical  Stair-Builder’s  Guide.  By  S.  De 

Graff,  Architect.  4to,  illustrated.  Philadelphia,  1868,  .  .  .  5  00 

DELASSAUX  AND  ELLIOTT.  Street  Architecture.  A  Series  of  Shop 
Fronts  and  Facades.  By  V.  Delassaux  and  J.  Elliott.  Engraved  on 
Steel  by  Philip  Brandon.  1  vol.  folio.  London,  1855,  .  .  .  .  6  25 

DEMANET.  Guide  Pratique  du  Constructeur  Maconnerie.  By  A.  Demanet. 

1  vol.  12mo,  paper,  and  1  vol.  plates.  Paris,  1864,  .  .  .  .  2  00 

DENTON.  The  Farm  Homesteads  of  England:  a  collection  of  plans  of  the 
most  approved  specimens  of  Farm  Architecture.  Edited  by  J.  Bailey 
Denton,  C.E.  2d  edition.  4to,  cloth.  London,  1865,  .  .  .  "5  00 

DESIGNS  (Original)  for  English  Cottages,  containing  Views,  Elevations, 

Plans  and  all  Detail  Drawings,  &c.,  &c.  By  a  Practical  Surveyor  and 


Builder.  1  vol.  quarto.  London,  1866,  .  .  .  .  .  .  10  50 

DICTIONARY  of  Terms  used  by  Builders,  Architects,  &c.  (Weale’s  series,)  2  00 

DOBSON.  Brick  and  Tile  Making.  By  E.  Dobson.  New  edition,  revised 

by  Robert  Mallet.  London,  1868.  (Weale’s  series,)  .  .  .  .  1  50 

-  Foundations  and  Concrete  Works.  By  E.  Dobson.  (Weale’s  series,)  75 

-  The  Art  of  Building.  By  E.  Dobson.  (Weale’s  series,)  ...  75 

-  Masonry  and  Stone  Cutting.  By  E.  Dobson.  (Weale’s  series,)  .  1  25 


fleers  Works.  Edited  by  E.  Dobson.  3d  edition,  with  the  additions  on 
design  by  E.  Lacy  Garbett.  8vo,  cloth,  illustrated.  London,  1858,  .  4  50 

DOWNING.  Cottage  Residences.  By  A.  J.  Downing.  8vo,  cloth,  .  .  3  00 

-  Hints  to  Persons  about  Building  in  the  Country.  By  A.  J.  Downing. 

New  York,  1868, .  2  00 

-  Architecture  of  Country  Houses.  By  A.  J.  Downing.  8vo,  cloth,  .  6  00 

-  A  Treatise  on  Landscape  Gardening  and  Rural  Architecture,  by  the 

late  A.  J.  Downing,  with  Supplement  by  H.  W.  Sargent.  1  vol.  thick 

8vo,  cloth.  Finely  illustrated,  . 6  50 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  85 


ESTERBROOK  AND  MONCKTON.  American  Stair-Builder.  ByW.  P.  Ester- 

brook  and  J.  H.  Monckton.  Illustrated.  4to, . $8  00 

FAIRBAIRN.  The  Application  of  Cast  and  Wrought  Iron  to  Building  Pur¬ 
poses.  By  Wm.  Fairbairn,  C.E.  3d  edition.  New  York,  1864.  Illus¬ 
trated.  I  vol.  8vo,  cloth, . 2  00 

-  Fourth  English  edition,  8vo,  cloth,  n  London,  1870,  .  .  .  .  8  00 

FIELD.  City  Architecture ;  or  Designs  for  Dwelling  Houses,  Stores,  Hotels, 

&c.  In  20  plates.  With  Descriptions  and  an  Essay  on  the  Principles 
of  Design.  By  M.  Field.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  New  York,  1854,  .  .  3  00 

FRANCIS.  On  the  Strength  of  Cast  Iron  Pillars.  With  Tables  for  the  Use 
of  Engineers,  Architects  and  Builders.  By  J.  B.  Francis,  Civil  Engineer. 

1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  New  York,  1865,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  2  00 


GARBETT.  Principles  of  Design.  By  E.  L.  Garbett.  (Weale’s  series,)  .  80 

GILLMORE.  Practical  Treatise  on  Limes,  Hydraulic  Cements  and  Mortars. 

By  Major-General  Q.  A.  Gillmore.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  New  York,  1867,  4  00 

HATFIELD.  The  American  House-Carpenter.  By  R.  G.  Hatfield.  7th  ed., 

8vo,  cloth.  New  York,  1869,  .........  3  50 

HIBBARD.  Rustic  Adornments  for  Homes  of  Taste.  By  Shirley  Hibbard. 

New  edition,  revised,  corrected  and  enlarged.  With  colored  Plates,  and 

two  hundred  and  thirty  Wood-cuts.  1  vol.  small  4to.  London,  L870,  .  9  00 

HOLLEY.  Country  Seats,  containing  Designs  for  Cottages,  Villas,  Man¬ 
sions,  &c.  By  H.  H.  Holley.  1  vol.  4to.  New  York,  1866,  .  .  .  5  00 

HOLLY.  Carpenters  and  Joiners’  Hand-Book.  By  W.  Holly.  1  vol.  18mo, 

cloth.  New  York,  1868,  . .  75 

HUGHES.  Gardening  Architecture  and  Landscape  Gardening,  illustrating 
the  Architectural  Embellishment  of  Gardens.  By  J.  A.  Hughes.  Lon¬ 
don,  1866.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth, . 7  50 

HURST.  A  Hand-Book  of  Formulae,  Tables  and  Memoranda  for  Architectu¬ 
ral  Surveyors.  By  J.  T.  Hurst.  1  vol.  32mo,  oblong.  Philada.,  1868,  2  00 

JACQUES.  The  House:  A  Manual  of  Rural  Architecture,  or  How  to  Build 
Country  Houses  and  Out-Buildings.  With  numerous  Original  Plans. 

By  D.  H.  Jacques.  Revised  edition.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth,  .  .  .  1  50 


LAFEVER.  The  Beauties  of  Modern  Architecture.  Illustrated  with  48 


plates.  8vo, . 6  00 

LAXTON.  Bricklayers’  Tables.  By  Henry  Laxton,  C.E.  1  vol.  4to.  Lon¬ 
don,  1869,  ............  2  50 

LEEDS.  Orders  of  Architecture.  By  W.  H.  Leeds.  (Weale’s  series,)  .  40 


LORING  AND  JENNEY.  Principles  and  Practice  of  Architecture  ;  com¬ 
prising  46  folio  plates  of  Plans,  Elevations  and  Details  of  Churches, 
Dwellings,  &c.,  constructed  by  the  authors,  S.  E.  Loring  and  W.  L.  B. 

Jenney.  4to,  cloth.  Chicago,  1869,  (scarce)  ..... 

LOTH.  The  Practical  Stair-Builder.  A  complete  Treatise  on  the  Art  of 
Building  Stairs  and  Hand-Rails.  Illustrated  with  thirty  plates.-  By  C. 

E.  Loth.  1  vol.  4to,  cloth.  Troy,  1868, .  10  00 

MITCHELL.  A  Rudimentary  Manual  of  Architecture,  being  a  History  and 
Explanation  of  the  Principal  Styles  of  European  Architecture,  Ancient, 
Mediaeval  and  Renaissance,  &c.,  &c.,  to  which  is  appended  a  Dictionary 
of  Terms.  By  Thomas  Mitchell.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth,  illustrated.  Lon¬ 


don,  1870, .  5  25 

NICHOLSON.  Carpenters’  New  Guide.  By  P.  Nicholson.  Revised  by  K. 

N.  Davies,  and  containing  New  Designs  for  Roofs,  Domes,  &c.  By  S. 

Sloan.  4to.  Philadelphia,  1860,  . .  4  50 

_  A  Treatise  on  the  Construction  of  Stair-Cases  and  Hand-Rails.  By 

P.  Nicholson.  1  vol.  4to.  London.  1847,  ....  6  00 


86  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


PARKER.  An  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Gothic  Architecture.  By  J.  H.  $2  50 
Parker,  P.S.A.  3d  edition,  revised  and  enlarged.  8vo, 

PUGIN.  Examples  of  Gothic  Architecture.  By  A.  W.  Pugin.  3  vols.  4to. 

Illustrated.  London,  1850, . .  .  36  15 

-  The  True  Principles  and  Revival  of  Christian  Architecture.  By  A. 

W.  Pugin,  Architect.  1  vol.  4to,  cloth.  London,  1853,  .  .  .  1  50 


England  and  France,  during  the  years  1828,  1829  and  1830.  By  A. 

Pugin,  Architect.  1  vol.  4to.  London,  1844,  .  .  .  18  00 

PYNE.  Practical  Rules  on  Drawing,  for  the  Operative  Builder  and  Young 

Student  in  Architecture.  By  George  Pyne.  1  vol.  4to.  London,  1864,  3  15 

REID.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  the  Manufacture  of  Portland  Cement,  to 
which  is  added  a  translation  of  M.  A.  Lipourtz’s  work,  describing  a  new 
method  adopted  in  Germany  of  manufacturing  that  cement.  By  W.  F. 

Reid.  1  vol.  8vo.  London,  1868, . .  4  50 

-  A  Practical  Treatise  on  Concrete  and  Howto  Make  it.  With  Obser¬ 
vations  on  the  Use  of  Cements,  Limes  and  Mortars.  By  Henry  Reid,  C.E. 

1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  London,  1869, . I  50 

RIDDELL.  Architectural  Designs  for  Model  Country  Residences,  illustrated 
by  Colored  Drawings  of  Elevations  and  Ground  Plans,  accompanied  by 
General  Descriptions.  By  J.  Riddell.  1  vol.  oblong  4to,  .  .  .  15  00 

-  The  New  Elements  of  Hand-Railing  in  Concise  Problems.  Calcu¬ 
lated  to  bring  this  most  useful  science  within  the  reach  of  every  capacity. 

By  Robert  Riddell.  1  vol.  quarto.  Illustrated  with  40  accurate  Plates. 
Philadelphia,  1870,  . .  7  00 

ROBINSON  AND  TREDGOLD.  Carpentry  and  Joinery.  With  plates. 

(Weale’s  series,)  ...........  40 

ROBINSON,  TREDGOLD  AND  PRICE.  Roofs  for  Public  and  Private  Build¬ 
ings.  (Weale’s  series,) .  60 

ROBINSON.  The  Parks,  Promenades  and  Gardens  of  Paris,  described  and 
considered  in  relation  to  the  wants  of  our  own  Cities,  and  of  Public  and 
Private  Gardens.  By  W.  Robinson,  F.L.S.  Illustrated.  8vo,  cloth. 

London,  1869.  . . .  .  9  00 

SHAW.  Civil  Architecture  ;  being  a  complete  Theoretical  and  Practical 
System  of  Building,  containing  the  Fundamental  Principles  of  the  Art. 

By  Edward  Shaw.  To  which  is  added  a  Treatise  on  Gothic  Architec¬ 
ture,  &c.  By  T.  W.  Silloway  and  George  M.  Harding,  Architects.  Il¬ 
lustrated  by  102  plates,  engraved  on  copper.  1  vol.  4to.  Philada.,  1870,  10  00 

SHAW.  Details  of  Elizabethan  Architecture.  By  Henry  Shaw,  F.S.A. 

1  vol.  4to.  Pickering,  1839,  .........  12  50 

-  The  Encyclopaedia  of  Ornament.  By  Henry  Shaw,  F.S.A.  1  vol.  4to. 

Pickering,  1842, .  10  50 

SILLOWAY.  Text-Book  of  Modern  Carpentry.  By  T.  W.  Silloway.  Illus¬ 
trated.  12mo.  Boston,  1858, .  2  00 

SLOAN.  Homestead  Architecture,  containing  Designs  for  Villas,  Cottages, 

Farm-Houses,  &c.  By  S.  Sloan.  Plates.  8vo, . 4  50 

- - —  Constructive  Architecture.  A  Guide  to  the  Practical  Builder  and 

Mechanic.  By  S.  Sloan.  Illustrated.  4to,  . . 9  00 


fices,  Private  Residences  and  Mercantile  Buildings.  By  S.  Sloan.  Illus¬ 
trated.  Folio,  ...  15  00 

-  The  Model  Architect.  A  Series  of  Designs  for  Cottages,  Villas,  Sub¬ 
urban  Residences,  &c.  Plates.  By  S.  Sloan.  2  vols.  4to,  .  .  25  00 

SMEATON.  The  Builder’s  Companion.  By  A.  C.  Smeaton.  Illust’d.  16mo,  1  50 

SMITH.  Parks  and  Pleasure  Grounds  ;  or,  Practical  Notes  on  Country  Resi¬ 
dences,  Villas,  Public  Parks  and  Gardens.  By  C.  H.  J.  Smith.  1  vol. 

12mo,  cloth, . 2  25 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  87 

SMITH.  On  the  Acoustics  of  Public  Buildings,  and  the  Science  of  Sound.  By 

T.  R.  Smith,  Architect.  1.  vol.  12mo,  flex.  Illust’d.  (Weale’s  series,)  $0  60 

STEVEN'S.  The  Book  of  Farm  Buildings,  their  arrangement  and  construc¬ 
tion.  By  Ilenry  Stevens,  F.R.S.E.,  and  Robert  Scott  Burn,  C.E.  Edin¬ 
burgh,  1801.  1  vol.  8vo,  .  . . *  .  15  75 

STRICKLAND.  On  Cottage  Construction  and  Design,  with  Specifications 

and  Plans.  By  C.  W.  Strickland.  8vo,  cloth,  .  .  .  .  .  3  00 

TARN.  The  Science  of  Building.  An  Elementary  Treatise  on  the  Princi¬ 
ples  of  Construction.  By  E.  W.  Tarn.  1  vol.  8vo.  Illustrated  with 
forty-seven  wood  engravings.  London,  1870,  .  .  .  .  .  3  50 


TOMLINSON.  Warming  and  Ventilation.  By  C.  Tomlinson.  (Weale’s  series,)  1  20 
-  Construction  of  Door-Locks.  By  C.  Tomlinson.  (Weale’s  series,)  .  60 

TREDGOLD.  The  Elementary  Principles  of  Carpentry.  By  Thomas  Tred- 
gold,  C.E.  5th  edition,  revised  and  enlarged.  1  large  4to,  extra  cloth. 

London,  1870,  .  . .  .  12  50 

VAUX.  Villas  and  Cottages.  New  edition,  revised  and  enlarged.  By  C. 

Vaux.  8vo,  . . 3  00 

VITRUVIUS’S  Architecture.  Translated  by  J.  Gwilt.  (Weale’s  Series,)  .  2  00 

WALKER.  Useful  Hints  on  Ventilation.  Explanatory  of  its  leading  prin¬ 
ciples,  and  designed  to  facilitate  their  application  to  all  kinds  of  Build¬ 
ings.  By  W.  Walker,  Engineer.  12mo,  cloth.  Manchester,  1850,  .  50 

WARING.  Architectural  Studies  in  Burgos.  By  J.  B.  Waring.  1  vol. 

folio,  cloth,  ............  25  00 

WEIDENMANN.  Beautifying  Country  Homes  ;  a  Hand-book  of  Landscape 


Gardening.  Illustrated  by  plans  of  places  already  improved.  By  J. 
Weidenmann.  1  vol.  quarto.  New  York,  1870,  .  .  .  .  .  15  00 

WHEELER.  Rural  Homes;  or,  Sketches  of  Houses  suited  to  American 
Country  Life,  with  original  Plans,  Designs,  &c.  By  Gervaise  Wheeler. 

1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  New  York,  1868,  .  .....  2  00 

-  Homes  for  the  People  in  Suburb  and  Country,  the  Villa,  the  Mansion 

and  the  Cottage,  adapted  to  American  Climateand  Wants.  By  Gervaise 
Wheeler,  Architect.  Revised  ed.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  New  York,  1868,  3  00 

WICKES.  A  Handy  Book  of  Villa  Architecture,  being  a  series  of  Designs 
for  Villa  Residences  in  various  styles.  By  C.  Wickes.  4to,  half  morocco. 


London,  1859,  ............  25  OO 

WIGHTWICK.  Hints  to  Young  Architects.  By  George  Wightwick.  Second 

issue.  12mo,  cloth.  London,  1860,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  3  50 

WOODWARD.  The  National  Architect.  By  George  E.  Woodward  and 

Edward  G.  Thompson.  1  vol.  4to.  New  York,  1869,  .  .  .  .  12  00 

-  Country  Homes.  By  George  E.  and  F.  W.  Woodward,  Architects. 

8th  edition,  revised  and  enlarged.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth,  .  .  .  1  50 


-  Architecture  and  Rural  Art.  By  George  E.  Woodward.  No.  1,  1867. 

1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  New  York,  .  .  .  .  .  ...  .  1  50 

“  “  No.  2,  1868,  .  .  1  50 

YOUNG.  A  Series  of  Designs  for  Shop  Fronts,  Porticoes  and  Entrances  to 
Buildings,  Public  and  Private.  By  John  Young,  Architect.  4to,  boards. 

London,  1843,  ............  5  00 

DBAWING  AND  PAINTING. 

APPLETON’S  Cyclopaedia  of  Drawing.  Edited  by  W.  E.  Worthen.  New  edi¬ 


tion,  enlarged.  New  York,  1869.  cloth,  .  .  .  .  .  .  10  60 

Half  morocco,  . . . 12  50 


BINNS.  An  elementary  Treatise  on  Orthographic  Projection,  with  numerous 

illustrations.  By  Wm.  Binns.  8vo,  cloth, .  3  60 


88  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


BINNS.  Second  Course  of  Orthographic  Projection  ;  being  a  continuation  of 
the  New  Method  of  Teaching  the  Science  of  Mechanical  Drawing,  with 
some  practical  remarks  on  the  Teeth  of  Wheels.  By  Wm.  Binns”  1  vol 
8vo.  London,  1869, 

'  '  ••••••••» 

BRADLEY.  Practical  Geometry,  Linear  Perspective  and  Projections,  in¬ 
cluding  Tsometrical  Perspective  Projections  of  the  Sphere,  and  the  Pro¬ 
jection  of  Shadows.  By  Thomas  Bradley.  Illustrated.  1  vol  8vo 
cloth.  London,  1846, . 

BURCIIETT.  Practical  Geometry.  A  Course  of  Construction  of  Plane 
Geometrical  Figures  for  the  use  of  Art  Schools.  By  R.  Burchett.  1  vol 
*  12mo,  cloth.  London,  1861, . 

- —  Linear  Perspective,  for  the  Use  of  Schools  of  Art.  By  R.  Burchett. 

1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  London,  1867, . 

BURN.  The  Illustrated  Drawing  Book,  for  the  use  of  Schools,  Students,  and 
Artisans:  containing  Pencil  Drawing,  Figure  and  Art,  Perspective  En¬ 
graving  ;  with  upwards  of  300  illustrations.  By  Robert  Scott  Burn  1 
vol.  8  vo.  London,  1869, 

'  /  *••••••« 

-  Ornamenta1  Drawing  and  Architectural  Design ;  with  Notes,  Histori¬ 
cal  and  Practical.  By  Robert  Scott  Burn,  Upwards  of  300  illustrations. 

1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  London, 

/  **••••• 

—  The  Illustrated  Architectural  Engineering  and  Mechanical  Drawing 
Book.  By  Robert  Scott  Burn.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  London,  1853,  .  * 

COPLEY.  A  set  of  Alphabets  of  all  the  Various  Hands  of  Modern  Use,  with 
Examples  in  each  Style ;  also,  the  Mechanical  and  Analytical  Construc¬ 
ts0^  of  Letters,  Figures,  and  Titles.  Drawn  and  arranged  by  Frederick 
S.  Copley.  1  vol.  oblong.  New  York,  1870, . 

DAVIDSON.  Orthographic  and  Isometrical  Projection,  Development  of  Sur¬ 
faces  and  Penetration  of  Solids;  together  with  One  Hundred  Questions 
lor  Examination.  By  E.  A.  Davidson.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth,  illustrated. 
London,  1869, . 

—  Elements  (The)  of  Building,  Construction,  and  Architectural  Draw¬ 
ing.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth,  illustrated,  London,  1869,  .... 

- —  Linear  Drawing,  showing  the  application  of  Practical  Geometry  to 

Irade  and  Manufactures.  By  E.  A.  Davidson.  12mo,  cloth.  London 
1869,  ...... 

*••••••• 

—  Drawing,  for  Carpenters  and  Joiners,  with  250  illustrations  and 
drawing  copies.  By  E.  A.  Davidson.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  London,  1870, 

A  Treatise  on  Shades  and  Shadows,  and  Linear  Perspective  Bv 
C.  Davies.  1  vol.  8vo, . 

DICKSEE.  The  School  Perspective ;  being  a  Course  of  Instruction  in  Lin¬ 
ear  Perspective.  2d  edition.  By  J.  R.  Dicksee.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth 
London,  1862 .  ’ 


ENGINEERS  and  Machinists’  Drawing-Book.  A  complete  course  of  Instruc¬ 
tion  for  the  Practical  Engineer.  Illustrated  by  numerous  Engravings. 
1  vol.  4to,  half  morocco,  . 


ENTHOFFER. 
Drawing. 
York,  1870, 


Manual  of  Topography  and  Text  Book  of  Topographical 
By  J.  Enthoffer,  U.  S.  Coast  Survey.  8vo,  with  atlas.  New 


HARDING.  Drawing  Models  and  their  Uses.  By  J.  D.  Harding.  5th  edition 

12mo,  paper.  Illustrated.  London, 

/••••••« 

HAYTER.  An  Introduction  to  Perspective,  Practical  Geometry,  Drawing 

wviT  aintl“g‘  A  n6W  and  Perfect  explanation  of  the  mixture  of  colors” 
With  practical  directions  for  Miniature,  Crayon  and  Oil  Painting  By 
Charles  Hayter.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  With  numerous  woodcuts  and  col¬ 
ored  plates.  London,  1854. 

HEATHER.  A  Treatise  on  Mathematical  Instruments.  By  T.  F.  Heather 
fith  edition.  (Weale’s  Series.)  . 


$4  50 

2  50 

3  00 
3  50 

1  00 

1  00 
1  00 

3  00 

1  00 
1  00 

1  00 

1  75 

3  75 

2  50 

21  00 

15  00 
50 

5  25 
60 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  89 


JOHNSTON.  The  Practical  Draughtsman’s  Book  of  Industrial  Design,  and 
Machinists’  and  Engineers’  Drawing  Companion.  By  Win.  Johnston. 

4 to.  Illustrated, . $10  00 

JONES.  One  Thousand  and  one  Initial  Letters,  designed  and  illuminated. 

By  Owen  Jones.  1  vol.  4to.  London,  1864, .  18  00 

KEAM.  A  Iland-Book  of  Map  Drawing.  By  P.  Keam.  1  vol.  small  quarto. 

Philadelphia,  1869,  ...........  80 

KENTISH.  Treatise  on  a  Box  of  Instruments  and  the  Slide  Rule.  By  Thos. 

Kentish.  Illustrated.  12mo,  cloth,  .......  1  25 

LAING.  Manual  of  Illumination  on  Paper  and  Vellum.  By  J.  W.  Bradley, 

B.A.,  and  T.  G.  Goodwin,  B.A.  7th  edition,  revised  and  enlarged,  and 

with  practical  notes.  By  J.  J.  Laing.  12mo,  paper.  London,  1869,  .  50 

-  A  Companion  to  the  Manual  of  Illumination.  Drawn  by  J.  J.  Laing. 

12mo,  paper.  London,  1867,  .........  50 


MAHAN.  Industrial  Drawing;  comprising  the  Description  and  Uses  of 

Drawing  Instruments,  &c.  By  D.  H.  Mahan.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  .  .  3  00 

-  Descriptive  Geometry,  as  Applied  to  the  Drawing  of  Fortifications 

and  Stone-Cutting.  For  Use  of  the  Cadets  of  the  U.  S.  Military  Academy. 

By  D.  H.  Mahan.  1  vol.  8vo,  plates,  cloth,  . . 1  50 

MINIFIE  (Wm.)  Mechanical  Drawing.  A  Text-Book  of  Geometrical  Draw¬ 
ing,  for  the  Use  of  Mechanics  and  Schools,  in  which  the  Definitions  and 
Rules  of  Geometry  are  familiarly  explained;  the  Practical  Problems  are 
arranged  from  the  most  simple  to  the  more  complex,  and  in  their  de¬ 
scription  technicalities  are  avoided  as  much  as  possible.  With  Illustra¬ 
tions  for  Drawing  Plans,  Sections,  and  Elevations  of  Buildings  and 
Machinery ;  an  Introduction  to  Isometrical  Drawing,  and  an  Essay  on 
Linear  Perspective  and  Shadows.  Illustrated  by  over  200  diagrams, 
engraved  on  steel.  With  an  Appendix  on  the  Theory  and  Application 
of  Colors.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  7th  edition.  1867,  .  .  .  .  .  4  00 

- -  Geometrical  Drawing,  Abridged  from  the  octavo  edition,  for  the  Use 

of  Schools.  By  Wm.  Minifie.  Illustrated  with  48  steel  plates.  5th 


edition.  1  vol.  12mo,  ..........  2  00 

MORRIS.  A  Popular  Outline  of  Perspective  Orthographic  Projection.  By 

Thomas  Morris.  1  vol.  16mo,  cloth.  London,  1869,  .  .  .  .  1  75 

ORNAMENTAL  and  Early  English  Alphabets,  Initial  Letters,  &c.,  for  En¬ 
gravers,  Designers,  Marble  Masons,  Painters,  Decorators.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  3  00 

PRANG.  Alphabets — Plain,  Ornamented  and  Illuminated.  A  selection  by 

L.  Prang  &  Co.  Oblong,  cloth,  ........  2  50 


PROGRESSIVE  (The)  Drawing  Book,  containing  a  series  of  easy  and  com¬ 
prehensive  lessons  for  Drawing  Landscapes,  Architecture,  &c.,  with 
Treatise  on  Perspective.  Illustrated,  oblong,  cloth,  (out  of  print) 

HOPES.  Linear  Perspective,  for  the  Use  of  Schools  and  Students  in  Draw¬ 
ing.  By  Joseph  Ropes.  Fourth  edition,  revised  by  the  author.  1  vol. 


8vo,  cloth,  ............  1  50 

RUSKIN.  Lectures  on  Architecture  and  Painting.  By  John  Ruskin. 

Plates.  12mo, . 1  50 

_  Elements  of  Perspective  ;  arranged  for  the  use  of  Schools.  By  John 

Ruskin.  Illustrated.  12mo, . 1  00 

_  Elements  of  Drawing;  in  three  Letters  to  Beginners.  By  John  Ruskin. 

Illustrated.  12mo,  ...........  1  00 

RYAN.  Systematic  Drawing  and  Shading.  By  Charles  Ryan.  1  vol.  12mo, 

cloth.  Illustrated.  London,  1869, .  1  00 

SIMMS.  A  Treatise  on  Mathematical  Instruments  employed  in  Surveying, 

Levelling,  and  Astronomy.  By  F.  W.  Simms.  1  vol.  12mo,  .  .  .  1  75 

SMITH.  A  Manual  of  Topographical  Drawing.  By  R.  S.  Smith.  1  vol. 

8vo.  Plates, . 2  00 

, -  Manual  of  Linear  Perspective.  By  R.  S.  Smith.  1  vol.  8vo,  .  .  2  00 


90  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


SOPWITH.  A  Treatise  on  Isometrical  Drawing  as  Applicable  to  Geological 
and  Mining  Plans.  By  T.  Sopwith.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  (Very  scarce.) 

STANLEY.  A  Descriptive  Treatise  on  Mathematical  Drawing  Instruments, 
their  Construction,  Uses,  Qualities,  Selections,  Preservation,  and  Sugges¬ 
tions  for  Improvement ;  with  Hints  upon  Drawing  and  Coloring.  By 
Wm.  Ford  Stanley.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  London,  1866, 

WARREN.  Manual  of  Elementary  Geometrical  Drawing,  involving  Three 
Dimensions.  By  S.  E.  Warren.  Plates.  12mo,  cloth,  . 

-  A  Manual  of  Drafting  Instruments.  By  S.  E.  Warren, 

-  A  Manual  of  Linear  Perspective.  By  S.  E.  Warren,  .  .  .  . 

-  Plane  Problems  in  Elementary  Geometry.  By  S.  E.  Warren,  . 

-  General  Problems  of  Shades  and  Shadows.  By  S.  E.  Warren,  . 

-  Orthographic  Projections  of  Descriptive  Geometry.  By  S.  E.  Warren, 

-  Elements  of  Machine  Construction  and  Drawing,  or  Machine  Drawing. 

By  S.  Edward  Warren,  C.E.  1  vol.  8vo,  with  vol.  of  plates.  New 
York,  1870,  . . 

WILME.  A  Hand-Book  for  Plain  and  Ornamental  Mapping,  Engineering, 
and  Architectural  Drawing.  By  B.  P.  Wilme.  2d.  edition.  London, 
1863.  1  vol.  4to,  half  morocco.  Plates,  colored  (scarce,) 


ENGINEERING,  MACHINERY,  AND  MECHANICS. 

AINSLIE.  A  Treatise  on  Land  Surveying.  By  John  Ainslie.  A  new  and 
enlarged  edition,  embracing  Railway,  Military,  Marine  and  Geodetical 
Surveying.  By  Wm.  Galbraith.  1  vol.  8vo,  arid  atlas,  cloth. 

AIRY.  The  Practical  Theory  of  the  Continuous  Arch.  By  W.  Airy,  C.E, 
8vo,  cloth.  London,  1870, . 

APPLETON’S  Dictionary  of  Mechanics,  Machines,  Engine  Work,  and  Engi¬ 
neering.  Containing  over  4000  Illustrations,  and  nearly  2000  pages. 
2  vols.  8vo,  half  morocco.  New  York,  1869, . 

AUSTIN.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  Calcareous  and  Hydraulic  Limes  and 
Cements.  By  J.  G.  Austin.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  London,  1862,  . 

BAKER.  Diagrams.  Giving  Weights  of  Iron  Girders  up  to  200  feet  span. 
By  B.  Baker.  London,  1866,  ......... 

-  Land  and  Engineering  Surveying.  By  T.  Baker.  (Weale’s  series.) 

-  Railway  Engineering;  or,  Field-Work  Preparatory  to  the  Construc¬ 
tion  of  Railways.  1  vol.  8vo.  By  T.  Baker,  ...... 

-  Long-Span  Railway  Bridges.  By  B.  Baker.  (Reprinted  from  Engi¬ 
neering,  revised  and  extended.)  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  London,  1867, 

-  On  the  Strength  of  Beams,  Columns,  and  Arches,  considered  with  a 

view  to  deriving  methods  of  ascertaining  the  Practical  Strength  of  any 
given  Section  of  the  Beam,  Column  or  Arch;  in  Cast-Iron,  Wrought 
Iron  or  Steel.  1  vol.  thick  12mo,  cloth,  illustrated.  London,  1870, 

-  Treatise  on  the  Mathematical  Theory  of  the  Steam  Engine,  By  T. 

Baker,  C.E.  3d  edition.  (Weale’s  series.) . 

BARLOW.  On  the  Strength  of  Materials.  Revised  by  the  Author’s  sons,  P. 
W.  and  W.  H.  Barlow,  with  numerous  and  important  additions.  Edited 
by  Wm.  Humber,  C.E.  New  edition,  with  new  plates,  and  enlarged.  1 
vol.  8vo,  cloth, . 

BASHFORTH.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  the  Construction  of  Oblique  Bridges, 
with  spiral  and  with  equilibrated  courses,  with  12  plates.  By  F.  Bash- 
forth,  M.A.  8vo,  cloth, . . 

-  A  General  Table  for  Facilitating  the  Calculation  of  Earthworks,  &c., 

with  a  Table  of  Proportionate  Parts.  8vo,  cloth, . 


$2  00 

1  50 
1  25 
1  00 
1  25 

3  50 

4  00 

7  50 


10  50 

1  50 

18  00 

2  00 

1  50 
80 

2  50 
2  00 

3  00 
4) 

9  00 

4  50 
2  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  91 


BEAZELEY.  Tables  of  Tangential  Angles  and  Multiples  for  Setting  out 
Curves,  from  5  to  200  Radius.  Printed  on  48  cards.  Cloth  box.  By 
Alex.  Beazeley.  London,  1868,  .  .  .  .  .  .  ■  . 

BESANT.  A  Treatise  on  Hydro-Mechanics.  By  W.  H.  Besant,  M.A.  2d 
edition.  Cambridge,  1867.  8vo,  cloth,  ..... 

BLAND.  Arches,  Piers,  and  Buttresses.  By  W.  Bland.  (Weale’s  series,) 

BLAKE.  Notices  of  Mining  Machinery,  and'  Mechanical  Appliances  in  use 
chiefly  in  the  Pacific  States  and  Territories,  for  Mining,  Raising  and 
Working  Ores,  with  Comparative  Notices  of  Foreign  Apparatus  for  sim¬ 
ilar  purposes.  By  W.  P.  Blake.  8vo,  cloth.  Washington,  1871, 

BOILLAU.  A  New  and  Complete  Set  of  Traverse  Tables,  showing  the  differ¬ 
ences  of  latitudes  and  the  departures  to  every  minute  of  the  quadrant, 
and  to  five  places  of  decimals,  &c.,  &c.  Ry  Capt.  J.  T.  Boillau.  1  vol. 
8vo,  cloth.  London,  1839,  (out  of  print)  ...... 

BOURNS.  The  Principles  and  Practice  of  Engineering,  Trigonometrical, 
Subterraneous  and  Marine  Surveying.  With  an  appendix.  By  Chas. 
Bourns.  Third  edition.  London,  1867.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  . 

BOX.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  Mill  Gearing,  Wheels,  Shafts,  Riggers,  &c. 
By  Thomas  Box.  8vo,  cloth.  London,  1869,  ...... 

BREES.  An  Introduction  to  the  present  practice  of  Surveying  and  Levell¬ 
ing,  being  a  plain  explanation  of  the  Subject  and  of  the  Instruments 
Employed,  illustrated  with  suitable  Plans,  Sections,  and  Diagrams,  also 
with  engravings  of  the  Field  Instruments.  By  S.  C.  Brees,  C.E.  8vo, 
cloth,  (out  of  print) . 

BROWN.  Engineering  Facts  and  Figures,  edited  by  A.  B.  Brown,  for  the 
years  1863,  ’64,  ’65,  ’66,  ’67,  and  ’68.  12mo,  cloth.  Each  per  vol. 

BUCK.  A  Practical  and  Theoretical  Essay  on  Oblique  Bridges.  By  G.  W. 
Buck,  C.E.  2d  edition,  corrected  by  W.  H.  Barlow.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth, 

BURGOYNE.  Blasting  and  Quarrying  of  Stone,  and  Blowing-up  of  Bridges. 

By  Sir  J.  Burgoyne.  (Weale’s  series.)  . . 

-  Road-Making  and  Maintenance  of  Macadamized  Roads.  By  Sir  J. 

Burgoyne.  (Weale’s  series.)  ......... 

BURN.  On  the  Construction  of  Horse  Railways  for  Branch  Lines  and  Street 
Traffic.  By  Chas.  Burn,  C.E.  2d  edition,  revised  and  enlarged.  1  vol. 
12mo,  paper.  London,  1860,  (out  of  print)  ...... 

BURNELL  and  LAW.  Civil  Engineering.  By.  G.  R.  Burnell  and  H.  Law. 
(Weale’s  series.) . 

BURR.  Instructions  in  Practical  Surveying.  Typographical  Plan  Drawing, 
and  Sketching  Ground  without  Instruments.  4th  edition.  By  Geo.  D. 
Burr.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth,  ......... 

BYRNE.  Pocket-Book  for  Railroad  and  Civil  Engineers  ;  containing  New, 
Exact,  and  Concise  Methods  for  Laying  Out  Railroad  Curves,  Switches, 
&c.  Illustrated.  1  vol.  18mo.  By  Oliver  Byrne,  ..... 

-  The  Hand-Book  for  the  Artisan,  Mechanic,  and  Engineer.  Illustra¬ 
ted.  1  vol.  8vo.  By  Oliver  Byrne,  .  , . 

-  The  Practical  Model  Calculator,  for  the  Engineer,  Mechanic,  Manu¬ 
facturer  of  Engine-Work,  Naval  Architect,  Miner,  and  Millwright.  8vo. 

By  Oliver  Byrne, . 

-  The  Essential  Elements  of  Practical  Mechanics,  based  on  the  princi¬ 
ple  of  work  designed  for  Engineering  Students.  By  Oliver  Byrne. 
Philadelphia,  1868.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth,  ....... 

COLBURN.  Locomotive  Engineering,  and  the  Mechanism  of  Railways.  By 
Zerah  Colburn.  2  vols.  cloth.  London,  1871,  ..... 


$1  40 

5  25 
60 

2  00 


2  50 
2  50 


2  50 
6  00 

60 

60 

1  80 

3  00 

1  75 
5  00 

4  50 

3  63 
20  00 


92 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  k  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


CRAIK.  The  Practical  American  Millwright  and  Miller,  comprising  the  Ele¬ 
mentary  Principles  of  Mechanics,  Mechanism,  and  Motive  Power.  By 
David  Craik.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  Philadelphia,  1870,  .  .  .  .  $5  00 

CRESY.  An  Encyclopedia  of  Civil  Engineering.  By  E.  Cresy.  1  vol.  8vo. 

Illustrated,  ............  16  80 

CROSS.  Engineer’s  Field  Book.  By  C.  S.  Cross,  C.E.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth. 

New  York,  1855,  ...........  1  50 

DAVIES.  Elements  of  Surveying  and  Levelling.  By  Charles  Davies.  Re¬ 
vised  edition.  12mo,  sheep.  New  York,  1870,  .  .  .  .  .  2  50 

DEMPSEY.  The  Practical  Railway  Engineer.  By  G.  Drysdale  Dempsey,  C.E. 

4th  edition,  revised.  1  vol.  4to,  cloth,  .  .  .  .  .  .  26  25 

-  Tubular  and  Iron  Girder  Bridges,  including  the  Britannia  and  Conway 

Bridges.  By  G.  D.  Dempsey.  (Weale’s  series.)  .  .  .  .  75 

-> -  Examples  of  Brick  Bridges,  Sewers,  and  Culverts,  for  Roads,  Rail¬ 

ways  and  Drainage.  By  G.  D.  Dempsey,  C.E.  Text,  4to,  plates  folio, 
paper.  London,  1850,  (scarce)  *....... 

-  Working  Drawings  of  Stations,  Engine  Houses,  Manufactories,  Ware¬ 
houses,  Workshops.  &c.,  &c.  By  G.  D.  Dempsey,  C.E.  Text  4to,  plates 
folio,  paper.  London,  1856,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  26  25 

DIX.  A  Treatise  o;i  Land  Surveying.  By  Thomas  Dix.  1  vol.  8vo,  boards. 

London,  1808,  ............  3  00 

DIXON.  The  Practical  Millwrights’  and  Engineers’  Ready-Reckoner.  By 

Thomas  Dixon.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth,  .  ......  1  00 

DOBSON.  Foundations  and  Concrete  Works.  ByE.  Dobson.  (Weale’s  series.)  75 

DONALDSON.  A  Treatise  on  the  Art  of  Constructing  Oblique  Arches  with 

Spiral  Courses.  By  William  Donaldson.  London,  1867.  8vo,  cloth,  .  1  50 

DUNCAN.  Practical  Surveyor’s  Guide.  By  Andrew  Duncan.  Illustrated. 

12mo,  cloth,  ............  1  25 

EASTON.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  Street  or  Horse-Power  Railways  ;  their 
Location,  Construction,  and  Management.  By  Alexander  Easton,  C.E. 
Illustrated  by  23  plates.  8vo,  cloth,  .......  2  00 

ENGINEERS’  and  Machinists’  Drawing-Book.  A  Complete  Course  of  In¬ 
struction  for  the  Practical  Engineer.  Illustrated  with  numerous  engra¬ 
vings.  1  vol.  4to,  half  morocco,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  21  00 

ENTIIOFFER.  Manual  of  Topography  and  Text  Book  of  Topographical 
Drawing.  By  J.  Enthoffer,  U.  S.  Coast  Survey.  1  vol.  8vo,  with  atlas. 

New  York,  1870,  ...........  15  00 

EVANS.  The  Young  Millwright  and  Miller’s  Guide.  By  0.  Evans.  (Scarce.) 

FAIRBAIRN.  An  Account  of  the  Construction  of  the  Britannia  and  Conway 
Tubular  Bridges.  With  a  complete  History  of  their  Progress.  By  Wm. 
Fairbairn,  C.E.  1  vol.  8vo.  London,  1849,  .  .  .  .  .  .  15  00 

-  Useful  Information  for  Engineers.  By  Wm.  Fairbairn,  C.E.  3  vols. 

12mo,  cloth, .  ...  15  75 

-  On  the  Application  of  Cast  and  Wrought  Iron  to  Building  Purposes. 

By  Wm.  Fairbairn,  C.E.  8vo,  cloth, . .  2  00 

FENWICK.  Subterraneous  Surveying,  and  Ranging  the  Line  without  the 
Magnet.  By  T.  Fenwick.  With  Additions  by  T.  Baker.  (Weale’s 
series,) . . 1  00 

FLINT.  The  Railways  of  the  United  States,  their  History  and  Statistics. 

By  II.  M.  Flint.  12mo,  cloth.  Philadelphia,  1868,  .  .  .  .  1  75 

FROME.  Outline  of  the  Method  of  Conducting  a  Trigometrical  Survey,  for 
the  Formation  of  Geographical  and  Topographical  Maps  and  Plans.  By 
Colonel  Frome,  Royal  Engineers.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  Third  edition. 

London,  1862, .  6  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  93 


GILLESPIE.  Practical  Treatise  on  Surveying.  By  W.  M.  Gillespie.  1  vol. 
8vo.  Illustrated.  ........... 

-  Manual  of  the  Principles  and  Practice  of  the  Road-Making.  By  W. 

M.  Gillespie.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth,  10th  edition,  enlarged, 

-  A  Treatise  on  Levelling,  Topography  and  Higher  Surveying.  By 

Wm.  Gillespie,  L.L.D.  Edited  by  Cady  Staley,  A.M.  8vo,  cloth.  Illus¬ 
trated.  New  York,  1870,  ......... 

GILLMORE.  Practical  Treatise  on  Limes,  Hydraulic  Cements,  and  Mortars. 
By  Gcnl.  Q.  A.  Gilmore.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  ...... 

GRISWOLD.  Railroad  Engineers’  Pocket  Companion.  By  W.  Griswold. 
12mo,  tucks,  ............ 

GROVER.  Estimates  and  Diagrams  of  Railway  Bridges  in  the  Embankments 
of  Double  or  Single  Lines  ;  also  Culverts  of  various  dimensions.  By  J. 
W.  Grover,  C.E.  4to,  cloth.  London,  1870,  ...... 

HAMILTON.  Useful  Information  for  Railway  Men.  Compiled  by  W.  G. 
Hamilton,  Engineer.  Second  edition,  revised  and  enlarged,  600  pages, 
pocket  form,  morocco.  New  York,  1869,  ...... 

HART.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  the  Construction  of  Oblique  Arches.  By 
John  Hart.  3d  edition.  1  vol.  8vo,  ....... 

HASKOLL.  Railway  Construction,  for  the  Use  of  the  Engineer,  Constructor, 
and  Student;  describing  the  Most  Recent  and  Approved  Methods  for  the 
Complete  Formation  of  a  Railway.  By  W.  D.  Haskoll,  C.E.  2  vols. 
imperial  8vo.  Illustrated,  .....  t  ..  . 

-  Second  Series  of  Railway  Construction  and  for  the  East.  By  W.  D. 

Haskoll,  C.E.  2  vols.  imperial  8vo,  90  large  folding  plates  and  letter- 
press  ;  containing  Stations,  Stores,  Stone,  Brick,  Timber  and  Iron 
Bridges,  Aqueducts,  and  Culverts,  Wrought  Iron  Girders,  &c.,  Docks, 
Jetties,  Cranes,  &c.,  &c.  Scales  in  French  and  English,  cloth, 

The  Two  Series  together,  4  vols.  ........ 

-  Examples  of  Bridge  and  Viaduct  Construction,  of  Masonry,  Timber 

andiron.  By  W.  D.  Haskoll,  C.E.  New  edition  revised.  Imperial  folio. 
Illustrated,  ............ 

-  Engineer’s  Mining,  Surveyor’s  and  Contractors’  Field  Book.  By  W. 

Davis  Haskoll.  London,  1866.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth,  .... 

-  The  Practice  of  Engineering  Field  Work.  By  W.  Davis  Haskoll. 

Vol.  I.  8vo.  London,  1869,  ......... 

-  Land  and  Marine  Surveying,  in  reference  to  the  preparation  of  plans 

for  roads,  railways,  canals,  rivers,  water  supply,  docks,  and  harbors,  with 
description  and  use  of  surveying  instruments.  By  W.  Davis  Haskoll, 
C.E.  London,  1868.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  ....... 

HASLETT.  The  Mechanics’,  Machinists’,  and  Engineers’  Practical  Book  of 
Reference.  By  C.  Haslctt.  16mo,  tucks,  ...... 

IIASWELL  Engineers’  and  Mechanics’  Pocket-Book.  By  C.  II.  Haswell. 
2d  edition,  revised  and  enlarged  to  663  pages.  Tucks,  .... 

-  Mechanics  Tables.  By  C.  II.  Haswell,  ...... 

-  Mensuration.  By  C.  H.  Haswell,  ....... 

...iJPT.  Theory  of  Bridge  Construction;  with  practical  illustrations.  By 
H.  Haupt.  8vo,  ........... 

HAWES.  System  of  Rectangular  Surveying  employed  in  Subdividing  the 
Public  Lands  of  the  United  States.  Being  a  Manual  of  the  United  States 
Government  Surveying,  &c.  By  J.  II.  Hawes.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  Phil¬ 
adelphia,  1868,  ........... 

HENCK.  Field-Book  for  Railroad  Engineers.  By  J.  B.  Henck.  Tucks, 

HUGHES.  The  American  Miller  and  Millwright’s  Assistant.  By  W.  C. 
Hughes  Revised  and  enlarged,  12mo,  .  . . 


$3  00 
2  50 

2  50 
4  00 

1  75 

12  50 

2  00 

4  00 

26  25 


31  50 
52  50 

26  25 
6  00 
10  50 

6  25 

2  50 

3  00 
1  00 

1  25 

3  50 

3  00 

2  50 

1  50 


94  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


HUGHES.  Comprehensive  Tables  for  the  Calculations  of  Earthwork,  as  con¬ 
nected  with  Railways,  Canals,  Docks,  Harbors,  &c.  Giving  the  quantities 
for  each  base  and  slope  at  one  view.  With  a  practical  Treatise  on  Earth¬ 
work  in  General.  By  Edward  George  Hughes.  1  vol.  oblong.  London, 
1846,  . 

HUMBER.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  Cast  and  Wrought  Iron  Bridges  and 
Girders,  as  applied  to  Railway  Structures  and  to  Buildings  generally. 
By  Wni.  Humber,  C.E.  With  58  full  page  plates.  Imperial  4to,  half 
morocco,  .............. 

- —  A  Complete  Treatise  on  Cast  and  Wrought  Iron  Bridge  Construction, 

including  Iron  Foundations.  By  Wm.  Humber,  C.E.  2  vols.  4to,  half 
morocco.  London,  1870.  New  and  revised  edition,  .... 

-  Strains  in  Girders,  calculated  by  Formulte  and  Diagrams.  By  Wm. 

Humber,  C.E.  1  vol.  12mo,  illustrated  with  three  plates  and  100  wood- 
cuts.  New  York,  1869,  .......... 

-  A  Record  of  the  Progress  of  Modern  Engineering,  comprising  Civil, 

Mechanical,  Marine,  Hydraulic,  Railway  Bridge,  and  other  Engineering 
Works,  with  Essays  and  Reviews,  edited  by  W.  Humber,  Associate  Insti¬ 
tute  Civil  Engineers,  and  Member  of  the  Institute  of  Mechanical  Engi¬ 
neers.  For  1863.  4to,  half  morocco,  ....... 

Do.  do.  for  1864,  half  morocco, 

Do.  do.  for  1865,  do. 

JACOB.  Practical  Designing  of  Retaining  Walls.  By  Arthur  Jacob.  8vo, 
pamphlet.  London,  1867,  (scarce)  ....... 

JEFFERS.  Treatise  on  Nautical  Surveying.  By  Capt.  W.  N.  Jeffers,  U.S.N. 
8vo,  cloth,  illustrated.  New  York,  1871.  ...... 

JERVIS.  Railway  Property.  A  Treatise  on  the  Construction  and  Manage¬ 
ment  of  Railways.  By  John  B.  Jervis.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth, 

LEA.  Tables  of  the  Strength  and  Deflection  of  Timber.  By  Wm.  Lea.  1 
vol.  12mo,  cloth,  (out  of  print)  ........ 

LONG  AND  BUEL.  The  Cadet  Engineer;  or,  Steam  for  the  Student.  ByJ. 
II.  Long  and  R.  H.  Buel.  1  vol.  12mo,  ....... 

LOWNDES.  The  Engineer’s  Hand-Book.  By  C.  S.  Lowndes.  1  vol,  12mo, 
cloth,  ............. 

MACNEILL.  Tables  for  Facilitating  the  Calculation  of  Earth-work  in  the 
Cuttings  and  Embankments  of  Railways,  Canals,  and  other  Public  Works. 
By  Sir  John  Macneill.  2d  edition,  enlarged.  1  vol.  8vo, 

MAHAN.  An  Elementary  Course  of  Civil  Engineering.  By  D.  II.  Mahan. 
8vo,  cloth,  ............ 

MARTIN.  Screw-Cutting  Tables  for  the  use  of  Mechanical  Engineers,  show¬ 
ing  the  proper  arrangement  of  Wheels  for  cutting  the  threads  of  screws 
of  any  required  pitch.  By  W.  A.  Martin,  Engineer.  Royal  8vo,  oblong, 
cloth,  ..........  .  . 

MENZIES.  Management  and  Utilization  of  Sewage.  By  Wm.  Menzics.  1 
vol.  4to,  ............. 

MERRETT.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  the  Science  of  Land  and  Engineering 
Surveying,  Levelling,  Estimating  Quantities,  &c.,  with  illustrations  and 
Tables.  By  H.  S.  Merrett.  Royal  8vo,  ....... 

MERRILL.  Iron  Truss  Bridges  for  Railroads.  The  Method  of  Calculating 
Strains  in  Trusses,  with  a  Careful  Comparison  of  the  most  Prominent 
Trusses  in  Reference  to  Economy  in  Combination,  &c.  By  Brevet  Col¬ 
onel  William  E.  Merrill,  U.S. A.  illustrated.  4to,  cloth.  New  York,  1870, 

MURRAY.  Manual  of  Land  Surveying;  with  Tables  of  Logarithms,  Sines 
and  Tangents,  Natural  Tangents  and  Cotangents,  and  Traverse  Table. 
By  David  Murray,  .  .  .  , 

MIFFLIN.  On  Railway  Curves  and  Tangents.  By  S.  W.  Mifflin,  (scarce.) 


$14  00 


15  00 

60  00 

2  50 


31  50 
31  50 
31  50 

5  00 
2  00 

2  25 
2  50 

15  75 

4  00 

50 

6  25 

6  25 

5  00 

2  00 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  GO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  95 


MILLINGTON.  Elements  of  Civil  Engineering.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  .  .  $7  50 

MINIFIE.  Text-Book  of  Mechanical  Drawing.  By  Wm.  Minifie.  8vo,  cloth,  4  00 

MOLESWORTH.  Pocket-Book  of  Useful  Formulae,  and  Memoranda  for  Civil 
and  Mechanical  Engineers.  By  G.  L.  Molesworth.  1  vol.  32mo,  oblong, 
morocco,  gilt,  .  .  . . 2  00 

MOSELY.  The  Mechanical  Principles  of  Engineering  and  Architecture.  By 
Henry  Mosely,  M.A.,  F.R.S.  2d  American,  from  2d  London  edition,  with 
additions.  By  D.  II.  Mahan,  L.L.D.,  U.S.M.A.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  New 
York,  1886,  . . .  5  00 

NYSTROM.  Pocket-Book  of  Mechanics  and  Engineering.  By  J.  W.  Nystrom. 

11th  edition,  revised  and  enlarged,  ......  .  3  50 

OLIVER.  Tables  for  Setting  Out  Half-Widths  on  Railways,  Roads,  Canals, 

and  othfer  Public  Works.  By  J.  S.  Oliver.  12mo,  cloth.  London,  1870,  1  75 

OVERMAN.  Mechanics  for  the  Millwright,  Engineer,  Machinist,  Civil  Engi¬ 
neer,  and  Architect.  By  F.  Overman, . 1  50 

OWEN.  A  Brief  Practical  Treatise  on  the  Construction  and  Management 

of  Plank  Roads.  By  Robt.  Dale  Owen.  1  vol.  16mo,  .  .  .  .  1  25 

PALLET.  The  Miller,  Millwright,  and  Engineer’s  Guide.  By  H.  Pallet.  1 

vol.  12mo,  illustrated,  ..........  3  00 

PERSONAL  Recollections  of  English  Engineers  and  of  the  Introduction  of 
the  Railway  System  in  the  United  Kingdom.  By  a  Civil  Engineer.  1 
vol.  8vo.  London,  1868,  (price  reduced,)  .  .  .  .  .  .  3  50 

PLANE  TABLE  (The),  and  its  Use  in  Topographical  Surveying.  From  the 
Papers  of  the  U.  S.  Coast  Survey.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  Illustrated.  New 
York,  1869, .  2  00 

POOR.  Manual  of  the  Railroads  of  the  United  States  for  1870-71,  showing 
their  mileage,  stock,  bonds,  cost,  earnings,  expenses,  and  organizations, 

&c.,  By  H.  V.  Poor.  1  vol.  8vo.  New  York,  1870,  .  .  .  .  5  00 

RANKINE.  Civil  Engineering,  comprising  Engineering  Surveys,  Earthwork, 
Foundations,  Masonry,  Carpentry,  Metal-works,  Roads,  Railways,  Canals, 

Rivers,  Water-works,  Harbors,  &c.,  with  numerous  Tables  and  illustra¬ 
tions.  By  Wm.  J.  M.  Rankine,  C.E.  6th  edition.  1  vol.  crown  8vo, 

London,  1869,  ............  G  50 

-  Useful  Rules  and  Tables  for  Architects,  Builders,  Carpenters,  Coach- 

builders,  Engineers,  Founders,  Mechanics,  Shipbuilders,  Surveyors, 
Typefounders,  Wheelwrights,  &c.,  &c.  By  Wm.  J.  M.  Rankine,  C.E.  1 
vol.  post  8vo,  cloth.  London,  1866,  .......  3  50 

REID.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  Concrete  and  How  to  Make  it.  With  Obser¬ 
vations  on  the  Use  of  Cements,  Limes,  and  Mortars.  By  Henry  Reid,  C.E. 

1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  London,  1869,  ........  1  50 

ROEBLING.  Long  and  Short  Span  Railway  Bridges.  By  John  A.  Roebling. 

With  fine  Copperplate  Engravings,  and  Steel  Portrait  of  Author.  Large 

folio,  cloth.  New  York,  1869, .  25  00 

SCRIBNER.  Engineers’,  Contractors’,  and  Surveyors’  Pocket  Table-Book. 

By  J.  M.  Scribner.  18mo,  tucks,  ........  2  00 

- Mechanic’s  Companion.  By  J.  M.  Scribner.  18mo,  tuck,  .  .  2  00 

SIIUNK.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  Railway  Curves,  and  Location,  for  Young 

Engineers.  By  W.  F.  Shunk, . 2  00 

SIMMS.  A  Treatise  on  the  Principles  and  Practice  of  Levelling.  By  F.  W. 

Simms,  C.E.  5th  edition,  revised.  With  Law  on  Curves.  8vo,  cloth. 

New  York,  1870 .  2  50 

_  Practical  Tunnelling.  By  F.  W.  Simms,  C.E.  2d  edition.  Revised 

by  W.  Davis  Haskoll,  C.E.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  .  .  .  .  .  10  50 

_  A  Treatise  on  the  Principal  Mathematical  Instruments  employed  in 

Surveying,  Levelling,  and  Astronomy.  By  F.  W.  Simms,  F.R.A.S.  8th 
edition,  1  vol.  8vo, . 3  01 


96  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK 

» 

SMITH.  A  Treatise  on  Land  Surveying  in  Theory  and  Practice.  By  John 
A.  smith.  12mo,  cloth.  London,  1869,  .... 

SPON’S  Pocket  Tables  and  Memoranda  for  Engineers.  Selected  and  arranged 
uy  J.  i.  Hurst.  36mo,  morocco.  London,  1870, 

STEPHENSON.  The  Science  of  Railway  Construction,  for  the  use  of  Engi¬ 
neers,  by  Sir  M.  Stephenson,  &c.  (Weale’s  series,) 

STEVENSON.  Civil  Engineering  of  North  America.  By  David  Stevenson. 

( Weale  s  series,) . 

r  L'gh1tol°USeS-  By  David  ®tevens°n.  1  vol.  8vo,  illustrated.  Edin- 
ourgn,  Joo4,  , 

STIJART.  How  to  become  a  Successful  Engineer,  being  Hints  to  Youths 
burgh  1869d°Pt  ^  Drofession-  Bernar(i  Stuart.  18mo.  Edin- 

—  The  Naval  Dry  Docks  of  the  United  States.  By  Chas.  B.  Stuart.  II- 
“7^  24  finC  Steel  en£ravinSs-  4th  edition.  4to,  cloth.  New 
*  *  *  *  •  •  •  •  •  ,  . 
TEMPLETON.  Engineers,  Millwrights  and  Mechanics’  Pocket  Companion! 
By  W.  Templeton.  Revised  by  J.  W.  Adams.  Tucks,  .  . 

TRAUTWINE.  The  Field  Practice  of  Laying  out  Circular  Curves  lor  Rail¬ 
roads.  By  J.  C.  Trautwine,  C.E.  6th  edition,  revised  and  enlarged 
12mo,  morocco,  tucks.  Philadelphia,  1869, . S 

—  A  New  Method  of  Calculating  the  Cubic  Contents  of  Excavations  and 
Embankments  by  the  Aid  of  Diagrams.  By  J.  C.  Trautwine.  3d  edition, 
revised  and  enlarged.  Philadelphia,  1869, . 

- -  The  Civil  Engineer’s  Pocket-Book.  By  J.  C.  Trautwine.  Tucks, 

UNWIN.  Wrought-Iron  Bridges  and  Roofs.  Lectures  delivered  at  the 
Royal  Engineer  Establishment,  Chatham,  with  Examples  of  the  Calcula- 
tions  of  Stress  in  Girders  and  Roof  Trusses,  by  graphic  and  algebraic 
methods.  By  W.  C.  Unwin,  C.E.  8vo,  cloth.  London,  1869, 

WEALE.  Engineers’  Pocket  Book.  Published  annually.  By  John  Weale,  .' 

WEISSENBORN.  American  Engineering.  Illustrated  by  large  and  detailed 
engravings,  embracing  various  branches  of  Mechanical  Art.  By  G 
Weissenborn.  1  vol.  4to,  with  folio  plates, . ‘ 

WHILDIN.  Memoranda  on  the  Strength  of  Materials  used  in  Engineering 
Construction.  By  J.  K.  Whildin.  New  Edition,  .  .  . 

An  Elementary  and  Practical  Treatise  on  Bridge  Building.  By 
S.  Whipple,  C.  E.  New  York,  1872,  ..... 

WILLIAMS.  Elements  of  Mechanics  and  Hydrostatics.  By  the  Rev.  L.  F. 
Williams.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  Cambridge,  1854,  . 

-  Practical  Geodesy,  comprising  Chain  Surveying  and  the  Use  of  Sur¬ 
veying  Instruments,  Levelling  and  Tracing  of  Contours.  By  J  B  Wil¬ 
liams.  1  vol.  8vo.  London,  1846, . 


GEOLOGY,  MINERALOGY,  MINING,  METALLURGY. 

BARSTOW.  Sulphurets  ;  what  they  are  ;  how  concentrated  ;  how  essayed  ; 
and  how  worked;  with  a  Chapter  on  the  Blow-pipe  Assay  of  Minerals. 
By  Wm.  Barstow,  M.D.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  San  Francisco,  1867, 

BUDGE.  The  Practical  Miner’s  Guide  ;  with  a  Treatise  on  the  Art  and  Prac¬ 
tice  of  Assaying  Silver,  Copper,  Lead  and  Tin.  By  J.  Budge.  London 
1866.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth, . .  . 

DADDOW  AND  BANNAN.  Coal,  Iron  and  Oil  ;  or,  the  Practical  Miner.  A 
Plain  and  Popular  Work  on  our  Mines  and  Mineral  Resources,  and  Guide 
o  their  Economical  Development.  With  numerous  maps  and  engra¬ 
vings.  By  S.  H.  Daddow  and  Benj.  Bannan.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  . 


$2  50 
80 
1  00 
1  20 

1  75 

50 

6  00 

2  00 

2  00 

2  00 

5  00 

6  00 

3  00 

40  00 
2  00 

4  00 
1  50 

6  25 

1  25 

6  00 

7  50 


JAMES  W.  QTJEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  97 


D’ALTGNY.  Report  on  Mining,  and  the  Mechanical  Preparations  of  Ores. 

By  Henry  F.  D'Aligny.  1  vol.  8vo,  with  plates.  Pamphlet.  Washing¬ 
ton,  1870, .  ...  ...  $2  00 

DANA.  Manual  of  Geology,  treating  of  the  Principles  of  the  Science,  with 
special  Reference  to  American  Geological  History.  By  Prof.  J.  D.  Dana. 

Plates.  8vo,  half  morocco, . .  5  00 

-  Text-Book  of  Geology.  1  vol.  12mo.  By  Prof.  J.  D.  Dana,  .  .  2  00 

-  Manual  of  Mineralogy.  By  Prof.  J.  D.  Dana.  12mo,  .  .  .  2  25 

-  A  System  of  Mineralogy.  Descriptive  Mineralogy,  comprising  the 

most  recent  Discoveries,  by  Prof.  J.  D.  Dana,  aided  by  Prof.  Geo.  J. 

Brush.  5th  edition.  Illustrated.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  N.  Y.,  1868,  .  10  00 

GREENWELL.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  Mine  Engineering.  By  C.  C.  Green- 
well,  F.G.S.  2d  edition,  re-written  and  enlarged.  1  vol.  4to,  half  mor¬ 
occo,  colored  illustrations.  London,  1870,  .  .  .  .  .  .  21  00 

HAUGIITON’S  Manual  of  Geology.  Revised  edition.  1  vol.  16mo,  cloth,  .  3  75 

HOSKOLD.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  Mining,  Land  and  Railway  Surveying, 

&c.  By  H.  D.  Iloskold.  8vo,  cloth, . 7  50 

HUMBLE.  Dictionary  of  Geology  and  Mineralogy.  By  Wm.  Humble.  3d 

edition.  8vo,  cloth, . .  8  00 

JONES.  The  Treasures  of  the  Earth ;  or,  Mines,  Minerals  and  Metals.  By 

Wm.  Jones,  F.S.A.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  London,  1808,  .  .  .  2  50 

LYELL.  Elements  of  Geology.  By  Chas.  Lyell.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  .  .  3  50 

- -  Principles  of  Geology  ;  or  the  Modern  Changes  of  the  Earth  and  its 

Inhabitants  considered  as  illustrative  of  Geology.  By  Sir  Chas.  Lyell, 

Bart.  Tenth  and  entirely  revised  edition.  2  vols.  cloth.  London,  1807,  12  00 

OVERMAN.  Practical  Mineralogy,  Assaying  and  Mining,  &c.  12mo,  .  1  25 

-  A  Treatise  on  Metallurgy;  comprising  Mining  and  General  and  Par¬ 
ticular  Metallurgical  Operations.  372  wood  engravings.  8vo,  .  .  5  00 

PEPPER.  Play-book  of  Metals,  including  Personal  Narratives  of  Visits  to 

Coal,  Lead,  Copper  and  Tin  Mines,  &c.  Illustrated.  8vo,  cloth,  .  .  2  25 

RICKARD.  The  Miner’s  Manual.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth, . 5  50 

-  Practical  Mining,  fully  and  familiarly  described.  By  Geo.  Rickard. 

London,  1869.  12mo,  cloth, . 1  25 

SIMONIN.  Underground  Life  ;  or,  Mines  and  Miners.  By  L.  Simonin.  Trans¬ 
lated  and  adapted  to  the  present  state  of  British  mining,  and  edited  by 
H.  W.  Bristow,  F.R.S.  1  vol.  royal  8vo,  illustrated,  and  with  maps  and 
minerals  in  color.  New  York,  1869,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  16  00 

SMYTH.  A  Treatise  on  Coal  and  Coal  Mining.  By  Warrington  W.  Smyth, 

M.A.,  F.R.S.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  London,  1867, .  4  00 

VARLEY.  The  Engineer’s  Manual  of  Mineralogy  and  Geology.  By  Mrs. 

Varley.  London,  1846.  1  vol.  12mo.  (Scarce,) . 2  00 

HYDRAULICS  AND  HYDROSTATICS. 

BEARDMORE.  Manual  of  Hydrology,  with  Hydraulic  and  other  Tables. 

By  Nathaniel  Beardmore,  C.E., . i2  00 

BESANT.  Elementary  Hydrostatics.  By  W.  II.  Besant,  M.A.  2d  edition, 

12mo,  cloth.  London,  1867,  .  .  2  00 

-  A  Treatise  on  Hydro-Mechanics.  By  W.  H.  Besant,  M.A.  2d  edition. 

Cambridge,  1867.  8vo,  cloth, .........  5  25 

BIRCH.  The  Disposal  of  Town  Sewage.  By  R.  W.  P.  Birch,  C.E.  Pamph¬ 
let,  8vo.  London,  1870,  ..........  50 

BOX.  Practical  Hydraulics ;  a  Series  of  Rules  and  Tables  for  the  Use  of 
Engineers,  &c.  By  Thomas  Box.  2d  edition.  London,  1870.  1  vol. 

12mo,  cloth, . 

7 


2  50 


98  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


BURNELL  AND  LAW.  Hydraulic  Engineering.  By  G.  R.  Burnell  and  H. 

Law.  (Weale’s  series,)  . . $1  20 

COLBURN  AND  MAW.  The  Water-works  of  London,  together  with  a  series 
of  Articles  on  various  other  Water-works.  By  Zerah  Colburn  and  Wm. 

H.  Maw.  1  vol.  royal  8vo,  illustrated,  with  woodcuts  and  two  folding 
plates.  London,  1867,  (scarce) . 

OORFIELD.  A  Digest  of  Facts  Relating  to  the  Treatment  and  Utilization 
of  Sewage.  By  W.  H.  Corfield,  M.A.  Prepared  for  the  Committee  of 
the  British  Association.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  London,  1871,  .  .  .  3  50 

D’AUBUISSON.  A  Treatise  on  Hydraulics  for  the  use  of  Engineers.  By  J. 

F.  D’Aubuisson  de  Voissins.  Translated  from  the  French  by  Joseph 
Bennett,  C.E.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  (Scarce,)  . . 

DEMPSEY.  Draining  Districts  and  Lands.  By  G.D.  Dempsey.  (Weale’s  series,)  60 

- -  Drainage  and  Sewerage  of  the  Towns  and  Buildings.  By  G.  D. 

Dempsey.  (Weale’s  series,) . •  .  .  80 

DOWNING.  Elements  of  Practical  Hydraulics,  By  Samuel  Downing.  2d 

edition.  London,  1861.  Cloth,  8vo, . 4  00 

ELKINGTON.  A  Systematic  Treatise  on  Draining  Land,  drawn  up  from  the 

Communications  of  Joseph  Elkington,  by  J.  Johnstone.  1  vol.  4to,  cloth,  5  25 

EWBANK.  Hydraulics:  A  Description  and  Historical  Account  of  Hydrau¬ 
lics  and  other  Machines  for  Raising  Water,  Ancient  and  Modern.  By 
Thomas  Ewbank.  (out  of  print) 

FRANCIS.  Lowell  Hydraulic  Experiments  of  Hydraulic  Motors,  on  the  Flow 
of  Water  over  Weirs,  and  in  Canals  of  uniform  Rectangular  section  and 
of  short  length,  made  at  Lowell,  Mass.  By  Jas.  B.  Francis,  C.E.  New 
edition,  revised  and  enlarged.  1  vol.  4to,  cloth,  .  .  .  .  .  15  00 

FRENCH.  The  Principles,  Process  and  Effects  of  Draining  Lands,  &c.  By 

H.  F.  French, . 1  50 

FRISI.  Rivers  and  Torrents,  and  a  Treatise  on  Navigable  Canals,  and  Rivers 

that  carry  Sand  and  Mud.  By  P.  Frisi  (Weale’s  series,)  .  .  .  1  00 

GLYNN.  Treatise  on  the  Power  of  Water  as  applied  to  drive  Flour  Mills, 
and  to  give  motion  to  Turbines  and  other  Hydrostatic  Engines.  By 
Joseph  Glynn,  F.R.S.,  Member  of  the  Institute  of  Civil  Engineers,  Lon¬ 
don,  &c.  3d  edition,  revised  and  enlarged,  with  numerous  illustrations. 

J  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  New -York,  1869, .  1  00 

HASKOLL.  Water-works,  Sewage  and  Irrigation.  By  W.  Davis  Haskoll. 

Being  vol.  2  of“  Engineering  Field  Work.”  London,  1871.  1vol.  8vo,  cloth,  10  50 

.HEWSON.  Principles  and  Practice  of  Embanking  Lands  from  River  Floods, 
as  applied  to  Levees  of  the  Mississippi.  By  Wm.  Hewson.  1  vol.  8vo, 
cloth,, . .  .  2  00 

HUGHES.  Water-works  for  Cities  and  Towns.  By  S.  Hughes.  (Weale’s 
series,')  New  Edition  preparing . . 

.HUMBER.  A  Comprehensive  Treatise  on  the  Water-Supply  of  Cities  and 
'Towns.  By  Wm.  Humber.  1  vol.  imperial  quarto.  Illustrated  with 
!  numerous  Plates  (in  press,) . . 

JACOB.  On  the  Designing  and  Constructing  of  Storage  Reservoirs.  By 
Arthur  Jacob.  8vo,  pamphlet.  London,  1867,  (out  of  print) 

KLIPPART.  The  Principles  and  Practice  of  Land  Drainage.  Illustrated 
with  nearly  100  engravings.  By  John  J.  Klippart.  Second  edition.  1  vol. 

12mo,  cloth.  Cincinnati,  1868, .  1  75 

KREPP.  The  Sewage  Question,  being  a  General  Review  of  all  Systems'and 
Methods  hitherto  employed  in  various  countries  for  draining  cities  and 
utilizing  Sewage,  with  a  description  of  Liernur’s  System,  &c.  By  Fred. 

Chas.  Krepp.  London,  1867.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth, . 6  25 

MILLER.  The  Elements  of  Hydrostatics  and  Hydrodynamics.  By  W.  H. 

Miller,  M.A.  1  vol.  8vo,  boards.  Cambridge,  1831,  .  .  .  .  2  75 


.TAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  99 


MONCRIEFF.  Irrigation  in  Southern  Europe,  being  the  Report  of  a  Tour  of 
Inspection  of  the  Irrigation  Works  of  France,  Spain  and  Italy,  under¬ 
taken  in  1867-68  for  the  government  of  India.  By  Lt.  C.  C.  Scott  Mon- 
crieff,  C.E.  1  vol.  8vo.  London,  1868,  (scarce)  ..... 

NEVILLE.  Hydraulic  Tables,  Coefficients  and  Formulae,  for  finding  the  Dis¬ 
charges  of  Water  from  Orifices,  Notches,  Weirs,  Pipes  and  Rivers.  By 
J.  Neville.  2d  edition.  London,  1860-61.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  .  .  $8  00 


SCHRAMKE.  Description  of  the  New  York  Croton  Aqueduct,  in  English, 

German  and  French.  By  T.  Schramke.  With  20  plates.  1  vol.  4to,  boards,  5  00 

STEVENSON.  The  Design  and  Construction  of  Harbors.  By  Thomas  Ste¬ 
venson.  1  vol.  8vo,  ..........  5  25 

SWINDELL.  Rudimentary  Treatise  on  Well-Digging,  Boring  and  Pump 
Work.  By  J.  G.  Swindell.  4th  edition.  Revised  by  G.  R.  Burnell,  C.E. 

(Weale’s  series,) .  40 

WIGGINS.  Embanking  Lands  from  the  Sea.  By  J.  Wiggins.  (Weale’s 

series,) .  80 


MATHEMATICS. 

BARLOW.  Tables  of  Squares,  Cubes  and  Square  Roots,  Cube  Roots,  Recip¬ 
rocals  of  all  Integral  Numbers  up  to  10,000.  (out  of  print) 

BARTLETT.  Synthetical  Mechanics.  By  W.  H.  C.  Bartlett.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  3  75 

-  Analytical  Mechanics.  By  W.  H.  C.  Bartlett.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  .  5  00 

BOWDITCH.  Useful  Tables  from  Bowditch’s  Practical  Navigator.  A  new 
edition,  with  additional  Tables.  Bureau  of  Navigation,  Navy  Depart¬ 
ment.  Washington,  1868.  1  vol.  8vo,  half  morocco,  ..  .  .  .  1  25 

BRUHNS.  A  new  Manual  of  Logarithms,  seven  places  of  Decimals,  edited 

by  Dr.  Bruhns.  Stereotype  edition.  1  vol.  8vo,  paper.  Leipzig,  1870,  2  25 
DAVIES.  Mathematical  Dictionary.  By  Chas.  Davies.  12mo,  cloth,  .  6  00 
HANN.  Examples  of  Integral  Calculus.  By  J.  Hann.  (Weale’s  series,)  .  40 

HEATHER.  Descriptive  Geometry,  with  a  Theory  of  Shadows  and  Per¬ 
spective,  and  a  Description  of  the  Principles  and  Practice  of  Isometrical 
Projection.  By  J.  F.  Heather.  (Weale’s  series,)  .....  80 

HOUEL.  Tables  de  Logarithmes.  By  J.  Ilouel.  Paris,  1858,  .  .  .  1  00 

LAW.  Tables  of  Logarithms  ;  with  Tables  of  Natural  Sines,  Cosines  and 

Tangents.  By  H.  Law.  (Weale’s  series,) . 1  25 

SCHRON.  Seven-Figure  Logarithms  of  Numbers  from  1  to  108,000,  and  of 
Sines,  Co-Sines,  Tangents,  Co-Tangents,  to  every  10  Seconds  of  the 
Quadrant,  with  a  Table  of  Proportional  Parts.  By  Dr.  Ludwig  Schron. 

Fifth  edition,  with  a  Description  of  the  Tables,  added  by  Prof.  De  Mor¬ 
gan.  1  vol.  8vo,  half  morocco, . 4  00 

SNOWBALL.  Plain  and  Spherical  Trigonometry.  With  the  Construction 

and  Use  of  Tables  of  Logarithms.  By  J.  C.  Snowball.  8vo,  cloth.  London,  2  00 

VEGA.  Logarithmic  Tables.  By  Baron  Von  Vega.  Translated  from  the 
Fortieth  or  Bromikers ;  thoroughly  revised  and  enlarged  edition.  By  W. 

L.  F.  Fischer.  1  vol.  8vo,  .  . . .  .  2  50 

WARREN.  Descriptive  Geometry.  By  E.  S.  Warren.  8vo,  .  .  .  4  00 

SHIP-BUILDING. 

BARRY.  Dockyard  Economy  and  Naval  Power.  By  P.  Barry.  1  vol.  8vo, 

illustrated  with  photographs, . 10  50 

_  The  Dockyards,  Shipyards  and  Marine  of  France.  By  P.  Barry.  Lon¬ 
don,  1869.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  .  . 5  25 


100  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


BLAND.  Forms  of  Ships  and  Boats.  By  W.  Bland.  (Weale’3  series,)  .  $0  60 

BRETT.  Notes  on  Yachts.  (First  Series.)  By  Edward  Brett.  1  vol.  12mo, 

cloth,  illustrated.  London,  1869, . .  3  00 

CHARNOCK.  A  History  of  Marine  Architecture.  By  John  Charnock.  3  vols. 

4to.  London,  1800,  ..........  30  00 

COTSELL.  Ships’ Anchors  for  all  Services.  By  G.  Cotsell.  (Weale’s  series,)  60 

GRIFFITHS.  The  Ship-Builders’  Manual.  By  John  W.  Griffiths.  (Scarce.) 

2  vols.  4to, . 12  00 

-  A  Treatise  on  Marine  and  Naval  Architecture ;  or,  Theory  and  Prac¬ 
tice  blended  in  Ship-Building.  By  J.  W.  Griffiths.  4to,  illustrated,  .  15  15 

FAIRBAIRN.  Treatise  on  Iron  Ship-Building,  its  History  and  Progress.  By 

Wm.  Fairbairn.  8vo,  cloth,  .........  9  00 

FINCHAM.  An  Outline  of  Ship-Building.  In  Four  Parts.  Part  1. — Method 
of  Constructing  the  Body,  and  Instructions  for  making  Calculations ; 


with  Examples.  Part  II. — On  the  Actual  Building  of  Ships.  Part  III. — 

On  the  Principal  Materials  used  in  Ship-Building.  Part  IV. — A  Vocabu¬ 
lary  of  Terms.  By  J.  Fincham.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  .  .  .  .  15  75 

-  A  Treatise  on  Masting  Ships  and  Mast-Making;  explaining  their 

Principles  and  Practical  Operation.  By  J.  Fincham.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  12  50 

-  Directions  for  Laying  Off  Ships  on  the  Mould  Loft  Floor.  By  J. 

Fincham.  3d  edition.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth, . 12  50 

GRANTHAM.  Iron  Ship-Building.  By  J.  Grantham.  1  vol.  and  atlas  of 

24  plates.  5th  edition.  London,  1868.  (Weale’s  series,)  .  .  21  00 

KIPPING.  Rudimentary  Treatise  on  Masting,  Mast-Making  and  Rigging  of 
Ships ;  also  Tables  of  Spars,  Rigging,  Blocks,  Chain,  Wire  and  Hemp 
Ropes,  &c.  12mo.  By  R.  Kipping.  (Weale’s  series,)  ....  60 

-  Elementary  Treatise  on  Sails  and  Sail-Making,  with  Draughting  and 

the  Centre  of  Effort  of  the  Sails  ;  also  Weights  and  Sizes  of  Ropes,  Mast¬ 
ing,  Rigging  and  Sails  of  Steam  Vessels,  &c.  By  R.  Kipping.  12mo. 

(Weale’s  series,) .  I  00 

MEADE.  A  Treatise  on  Naval  Architecture  and  Ship-Building,  or  an  Ex¬ 
position  of  the  Elementary  Principles  involved  in  the  Science  and  Prac¬ 
tice  of  Naval  Construction.  Compiled  from  various  standard  authorities. 

By  Com.  Richard  W.  Meade,  U.S.N.  1  large  8vo,  vol.,  with  Plates. 
Philadelphia,  1869,  ...........  10  00 

MURRAY.  Ship-Building  in  Iron  and  Wood,  by  Andrew  Murray,  and 

Steamships  by  R.  Murray.  1  vol.  4to,  cloth,  .  .  .  .  .  .  7  00 

NYSTROM.  On  Technological  Education  and  Ship-Building,  for  Marine 


Engineers.  By  N.  W.  Nystrom.  12mo,  .......  2  50 

-  A  Treatise  on  Parabolical  Construction  of  Ships,  and  other  Marine 

Engineering  Subjects.  By  N.  W.  Nystrom.  8vo,  .  .  .  .  .  1  25 

PEAKE.  Naval  Architecture.  By  J.  Peake.  (Weale’s  series,)  .  .  .  1  20 

POOK.  Method  of  Comparing  the  Lines  and  Draughting  Vessels  Propelled 
by  Sail  or  Steam  ;  including  a  Chapter  on  Laying  Off  on  the  Mould-Loft 
Floor.  By  Samuel  M.  Pook,  Naval  Constructor.  1  vol.  8vo,  with 
illustrations,  ............  5  00 

REED.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  Ship-Building  in  Iron  and  Steel.  By  E.  J. 

Reed,  C.B.  1  vol.  8vo,  with  5  plates  and  250  wood-cuts,  .  .  15  00 

- Our  Iron-Clad  Ships ;  their  Qualities,  Performances  and  Cost.  With 

Chapters  on  Turret  Ships,  Iron-Clad  Rams,  &c.  By  E.  J.  Reed,  C.  B. 

1  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  Illustrated.  London,  1869,  ...  6  00 

SMITH.  The  Hand-Book  of  Iron  Ship-Building.  By  Thomas  Smith,  M.J.N.A. 

1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  London,  1869,  . .  3  00 

SOMMERFELDT.  Elementary  and  Practical  Principles  of  the  Construction 
of  Ships  for  Ocean  and  River  Service.  By  H.  A.  Sommerfeldt.  1  vol. 

12mo,  and  Atlas.  (Weale’s  series,) . 3  40 


101 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 

YOUNG.  A  Nautical  Dictionary,  defining  the  Technical  Language  relative 
to  the  Building  and  Equipment  of  Sailing  Vessels  and  Steamers.  By 
A.  Young.  2d  edition,  illustrated.  1  vol.  8vo,  cloth,  .... 


WOEKS  OF  EEFEEENCE. 

DODD.  Dictionary  of  Manufactures,  Mining,  Machinery,  and  the  Industrial 
Arts.  By  George  Dodd.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth.  New  York,  1869,  . 

FAIRIIOLT.  A  Dictionary  of  Terms  in  Art.  Edited  and  Illustrated  by  F. 
W.  Fairholt,  F.S. A.  With  500  engravings  on  wood.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth. 
London,  187f>, . 

SPON’S  Dictionary  of  Civil,  Mechanical,  Military,  and  Naval  Engineering. 
With  technical  terms  in  French,  German,  Italian,  and  Spanish.  Edited 
by  Oliver  Byrne.  Royal  8vo,  cloth.  Illustrated.  Vols.  I.  to  V.  ready. 

Per  vol.,  . 

Vol,  I.  24  parts  in  half  calf, . 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

ANDREWS.  Rudimentary  Treatise  on  Agricultural  Engineering.  By  G.  H. 
Andrews,  C.E.  (Weale’s  series.)  Illustrated,  ..... 

BEATON.  Quantities  and  Measurements.  How  to  Calculate  and  Take 
Them.  By  Alfred  C.  Beaton.  1  vol.  12mo.  (Weale’s  series,) 

COFFIN.  Winds  of  the  Northern  Hemisphere.  By  James  A.  Coffin,  A.  M. 
Quarto.  Washington,  1852,  ........ 

FERGUSON.  Lectures  on  Select  Subjects  in  Mechanics,  Pneumatics,  Hy¬ 
drostatics,  and  Optics,  with  the  Use  of  the  Globes.  The  Art  of  Dialing. 
By  James  Ferguson,  F.R.S.  1  vol.  4to,  with  numerous  plates.  London, 
1744, .  ... 

HOARE.  The  Slide  Rule,  and  How  to  Use  It;  containing  full,  easy,  and 
simple  instructions  to  perform  all  business  calculations  with  unexampled 
rapidity  and  accuracy.  By  Charles  Hoare,  C.E.  With  a  slide  rule  in 
tuck  of  cover.  London,  1868.  (Weale’s  series.)  Flex,  cloth,  16mo,  . 

JACKSON.  A  Manual  of  Etherization,  containing  Directions  for  the  Em¬ 
ployment  of  Ether,  Chloroform,  and  other  Anaesthetic  Agents,  by  Inha¬ 
lation,  in  Surgical  Operations.  By  C.  T.  Jackson.  1  vol.  12mo,  cloth, 

MOORE.  The  Inventor’s  Guide — Patent  Office  and  Patent  Laws;  or,  A  Guide 
to  Inventors,  and  a  Book  of  Reference  for  Judges,  Lawyers,  Magistrates, 
and  Others.  By  J.  G.  Moore.  12mo,  cloth,  ...... 

QUEEN.  Hand-Book  of  the  Mercurial,  Aneroid,  and  Metallic  Barometers; 
with  Observations  upon  the  Dew  Point  Hygrometer.  By  James  W. 
Queen.  40  pages.  Paper,  ......... 

ROHER.  Practical  Calculator:  A  pocket  manual  of  plain  rules  and  calcu¬ 
lations  for  business  operations.  By  M.  M.  Roher.  1  vol.  16mo,  tucks, 


$9  00 

2  00 

2  50 

5  00 
10  00 

1  20 
50 
2  50 

5  00 

1  50 

75 

1  26 

35 
1  26 


CHAPTER  XV. 


THE  USE  OF  MATHEMATICAL  INSTRUMENTS. 


hi  the  foregoing  Catalogue  we  have  divided  the  sets  of  Drawing  Instruments  into 
three  classes,  viz.  :  Brass,  Fine  German  Silver,  and  Extra  Fine  Swiss.  The  brass  in¬ 
struments  are  intended  for  schools ;  the  fine  German  silver  and  the  extra  fine  Swiss 
instruments  for  the  practical  draughtsman. 

Without  the  aid  of  some  drawing  instrument,  a  student  cannot  obtain  a  thorough 
knowledge  of  Geometry,  Trigonometry  or  Surveying;  but,  a3  very  few  who  go  over 
these  branches  in  youth  ever  make  any  practical  use  of  them  in  after  life,  it  is  not  neces¬ 
sary  that  the  drawing  instruments,  which  are  furnished  to  schools,  should  be  any  finer  in 
finish  and  quality  than  is  sufficient  fora  clear  demonstration  of  the  problems.  The  sets 
of  brass  drawing  instruments  are  equal  to  all  the  wants  of  a  young  student. 

But  to  the  practical  draughtsman,  his  drawing  in-truments  are  next  to  his  head  and 
his  hands,  and  they  must  be  of  the  best  material,  well  ami  accurately  finished.  He  uses 
them  every  day,  and  all  day,  and  if  they  are  not  perfectly  correct,  the  loss  and  delay 
occasioned  by  them,  in  one  instance,  will  be  much  greater  than  the  cost  of  a  good  set 
of  instruments,  which  can  be  u-ed  his  lifetime. 

The  fine  German  silver  drawing  instruments  meet  the  wants  of  the  practical  man. 

The  extra  fine  Swiss  drawing  instruments  are  more  nicely  finished  than  the  fine  Ger¬ 
man  silver;  the  metal  of  which  they  are  made  resembles  more  closely  pure  silver ;  they 
are  more  substantial  in  their  construction,  and  consequently  more  durable.  As  a  gene¬ 
ral  rule,  draughtsmen  give  the  preference  to  the  extra  fine  Swiss  drawing  instruments. 

The  fewest  drawing  instruments  a  mechanical  or  architectural  draughtsman  can  pos¬ 
sibly  perform  his  work  with  are  the  following,  viz. : — 

A  pair  of  Plain  Dividers,  5  or  6  inches  long,  as  No.  66. 

A  pair  of  Dividers,  5  or  6  inches  long,  with  changeable  points,  as  No.  73. 

A  pair  of  Small  Spacing  Dividers,  as  No.  78. 

A  Spring  Bow  Pen,  as  No.  81. 

A  Spring  Bow  Pencil,  as  No.  86. 

A  Drawing  Pen,  as  No.  87. 

A  Drafting  Scale. 

A  T  Square. 

A  Triangle. 

A  Drawing  Board. 

An  Irregular  Curve. 

Half  dozen  Fastening  Tacks. 

An  engineer  or  surveyor  can  perform  his  work  with  fewer  drawing  instruments.  The 
following  list  will  suffice: — 

A  pair  of  Plain  Dividers,  5  or  6  inches  long,  as  No.  66. 

A  pair  of  Dividers.  5  or  6  inches  long,  with  changeable  points,  as  No.  73. 

A  Drawing  Pen,  and  a  Drafting  Scale. 

Tt  must  be  borne  in  mind,  that  the  above  are  lists  of  instruments  which  are  absolutely 
necessary  for  the  architect  and  the  engineer  to  have,  and  without  which  he  cannot  follow 
his  profession;  but  there  are  many  other  instruments  mentioned  in  the  Catalogue  which 
can  be  added,  and  by  their  aid  the  work  can  be  much  simplified,  and  more  speedily 
accomplished. 

Having  made  these  general  remarks  we  will  now  proceed  to  describe  each  of  the 
drawing  instruments — their  use,  and  how  to  use  them. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  tc  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  103 


THE  PLAIN  DIVIDERS. 


to 


This  instrument  consists  of  two  legs,  the  upper  half  of  which  are  made  of  brass 
or  German  silver,  and  the  lower  half,  or  points,  of  tempered  steel.  In  the  fine 
instruments,  the  joints  about  vvhieh  the  legs  move  should  be  framed  of  the  two 
different  metals — German  silver  and  steel  ;  by  this  arrangement  the  wear  is  much 
diminished,  and  greater  uniformity  and  smoothness  of  motion  is  obtained.  If  this 
uniformity  and  smoothness  be  wanting,  it  is  extremely  difficult  to  set  the  legs 
quickly  apart,  at  a  desired  distance;  for  being  opened  and  closed  by  the  fingers  of 
one  hand,  if  the  joint  is  not  good  they  will  move  by  fits  and  starts,  and  either  go 
beyond  or  stop  short  of  the  point;  but  when  they  move  evenly  the  pressure  can 
be  so  applied  as  to  open  the  legs  at  once  to  the  exact  distance,  and  the  joint  must 
be  sufficiently  tight  to  hold  them  in  this  position,  and  not  permit  them  to  deviate 
from  it,  in  consequence  of  a  small  amount  of  pressure  which  is  inseperablc  from 
their  use.  The  joints  of  the  dividers  are  tightened  or  loosened  by  inserting  the 
two  steel  points  of  the  key,  into  the  two  small  holes  on  one  side  of  the  head  of 
the  dividers,  and  turning  from  one  to  tighten  it,  and  in  the  opposite  direction 
loosen  it. 

THE  HAIR-SPRING  DIVIDERS. 

When  greater  accuracy  in  setting  the  legs  apart  is  required,  than  can  be  obtained 
by  the  joint  alone,  a  draughtsman  uses  the  Hair-spring  Dividers.  The 
peculiarity  of  these  dividers  is,  that  the  upper  part  of  one.  of  the  steel 
points  is  formed  into  a  bent  spring,  which  being  fastened  into  the 
German  silver  portion  of  the  leg,  near  the  joint  of  the  dividers,  is 
made  to  fit  into  a  groove,  cut  the  whole  length  of  the  German  silver 
part  of  the  leg,  into  which  groove  this  spring  can  be  drawn,  or  let 
slip  out,  by  turning  the  screw  on  the  middle  of  that  side  of  the  dividers. 

No.  69  represents  the  Hair-spring  Dividers  when  shut  up;  No.  69a 
represents  the  same  dividers  with  the  spring  let  a  little  out  of  the 
groove,  by  loosening  the  screw. 

To  take  a  distance  with  the  Hair-spring  Dividers  they  must  be 
opened  as  nearly  as  possible  to  the  required  distance;  set  the  leg 
without  spring  on  the  point  from  which  the  distance  is  to  be  taken, 
and  make  the  point  of  the  other  leg  coincide  accurately  with  the  end 
of  the  required  distance,  by  loosening  or  tightening  the  screw  on 
the  side  of  the  spring  leg. 

THE  STEEL  SPRING  SPACING  DIVIDERS. 

In  mechanical  and  architectural  drawings,  it  frequently  occurs  that  a  large  number 
of  very  small  equal  distances  are  to  be  set  off,  not  only  at  one  time,  but  repeat¬ 
edly,  upon  the  same  drawing;  for  this  purpose  the  ordinary  dividers  are  too 
large  and  inconvenient  to  handle  rapidly,  and  having  nothing  but  the  joint  to 
hold  them  in  their  position,  are  liable  to  get  their  extension  altered.  For  such 
work  there  is  used  a  pair  of  very  delicate  dividers,  made  altogether  of  steel, 
the  two  legs  of  which  are  united  at  the  top  by  an  arched  spring,  and  drawn 
together  or  opened  by  the  screw  in  the  middle.  On  the  top  of  the  arched 
spring  an  ivory  or  German  silver  handle  is  attached,  by  which  the  instrument 
can  be  quickly  turned  over  and  over,  when  used  in  spacing  off  a  number  of 
equal  distances.  The  size  of  the  spacing  dividers  mostly  used  are  three 
inches  long,  with  the  legs  delicately  rounded  from  the  regulating  screw  to 
the  points.  The  advantages  gained  by  these  spacing  dividers  are,  greater 
nicety  and  accuracy  of  adjustment,  and  no  liability  of  accidental  change  when 
once  adjusted. 


DIVIDERS  WITH  CHANGEABLE  POINTS. 

If  an  arc  or  circle  is  to  be  described  faintly,  merely  as  a  guide  for  the  termination  of 
other  lines,  the  steel  points  are  generally  sufficient  for  the  purpose  ;  but  when  arcs  and 
circles  are  to  be  drawn  permanently,  and  to  show  clearly,  one  point  of  the  dividers  must 
carry  either  a  lead  pencil  or  ink.  To  accomplish  this  the  steel  parts  of  the  legs  of  the 
dividers  are  made  so  that  they  can  be  taken  out  and  replaced  by  pieces,  either  for  pencil 
or  ink  ;  the  small  screws  in  the  middle  of  the  legs  retain  the  points  firmly  in  their  places 
The  cut  152  illustrates  a  set  with  a  pen-point,  a,  a  pencil-point,  b,  a  dotting-point,  c,  a 
needle-point,  d,  and  a  lengthening-bar,  e. 


104  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


off  when  the 
rusting. 
d  e 


pen- 


0 

0 1 

1 

1 

1 

i 

i  V 

Tbe  pen-point,  a,  consists  of  two  steel  blades,  so  bent  that  when  the  points  nearly 
touch  each  other  there  is  space  above  for  holding  ink  ;  the  two  blades  arc  drawn  together 
or  put  apart  by  a  regulating  screw  in  the  middle.  One  of  ihe  si  eel  blades  works  upon 
a  joint  at  its  upper  end,  so  that  the  ink  can  be  thoroughly  cleaned 
point  is  to  be  put  away,  and  thereby  preventing  its  being  injured  by 

To  use  the  pen-point,  after  securing  it  tightly  in  the  proper 
side  of  the  dividers,  the  ink  is  put  in  between  the  blades  by  a 
common  writing  pen,  which  should  be  drawn  down  and  out 
between  the  points,  then  the  points  of  the  blades  are  brought 
to  the  proper  distance  apart  for  making  the  line — the  closer  the 
points  are  together  the  finer  the  line;  the  point  of  the  pen 
must  always  be  as  near  at  right  angles  to  the  paper  as  possible  ; 
a  joint  is  made  in  the  German  silver  part  of  the  point,  to  re¬ 
gulate  the  proper  inclination 

The  pencil-point,  b,  is  made  of  German  silver,  the  lower  part 
of  which  is  formed  into  a  tube;  a  lead-pencil  is  placed  in 
this  tube,  and  held  tightly  by  the  clamp-screw  on  the  side. 

The  dotting- point,  c,  is  exactly  like  the  pen-point,  with  the 
addition  of  a  small  toothed  wheel,  which  revolves  between 
the  points  of  the  blades,  each  tooth  leaving  a  dot  wherever 
it  touches  the  paper;  and  thus,  instead  of  a  continuous  ink 
line,  a  line  of  dots  is  made  ;  such  lines  are  meant  to  illustrate 
the  course  of  an  imaginary  line  or  arc. 

The  needle-point,  d ,  is  made  similar  to  the  pencil-point;  the  tube  on  the  lower  end  is 
only  large  enough  to  take  a  fine  needle,  which  is  held  securely  in  its  place  by  the  thumb 
screw  on  the  side.  The  needle-point  is  put  in  place  of  one  of  the  steel  legs  of  the  di¬ 
viders,  when  a  number  of  arcs  are  to  be  made  from  the  same  centre;  it  does  not  deface 
the  drawing  by  large  holes,  as  the  ordinary  steel  points  would.  The  pen,  pencil,  dotting 
and  needle-points  are  all  made  with  a  joint  near  their  upper  end,  in  order  to  bring  the 
points  at  right  angles  with  the  paper. 

The  lengthening-bar,  e,  is  made  wholly  of  German  silver,  one  end  of  which  fits  in  place 
of  one  of  the  steel  legs  of  the  dividers,  and  the  other  end  has  a  socket  and  binding- 
screw,  for  receiving  and  holding  the  pen,  pencil,  or  dotting-point.  It  is  used  when 
larger  circles  or  arcs  are  to  be  drawn  than  can  be  made  by  simply  extending  the  legs  of 
the  dividers.  The  side  of  the  dividers  into  which  the  needle-point  fits,  also  the  steel 
point,  and  the  needle-point,  are  marked  on  the  inside  with  small  dots,  to  indicate  where 
these  points  are  to  be  put,  when  used;  those  points  which  are  not  marked  thus,  are  to 
be  used  on  the  other  side  of  the  dividers. 

In  a  large  drawing  there  is  always  a  great  amount  of  finer 
detail,  which  can  be  executed  with  more  accuracy  and  ease  by 
a  set  of  small  instruments.  The  cut,  No  72,  illustrates  a  set 
one-half  the  size  of  No  73,  but  constructed  and  used  in  the 
same  manner.  It  is  not  provided  with  the  dotting-pen  and 
lengihening-bar.  Above  the  joints  of  the  dividers  a  handle 
is  attached,  by  which  it  can  be  held  and  used  with  more  facility 
than  by  taking. them  by  the  joints,  as  is  done  with  the  large  set. 

No  158  represents  a  set  of  instruments  similar  to  No.  72, 
but  has  a  spring  over  the  joints,  and  a  regulating  screw  in  the 
middie  of  the  legs,  by  which  the  points  can  be  opened  or  drawn 
together  with  great  nicety  and  exactness.  The  handle  is  of 
ivory  and  much  longer  than  that  of  No.  72.  With  No.  158 
there  are  two  pen-points  ;  when  they  are  both  substituted  in 
place  of  the  steel  points,  an  instrument  for  drawing  parallel  lines  is  obtained  ; 
or,  in  other  words,  a  railroad  drawing-pen,  the  use  of  which  see  cut  No.  92, 
page  10. 

POCKET  DIVIDERS. 

It  is  oftentimes  found  convenient  by  the  engineer  and  surveyor  to  have  a  pair  of  di- 
,  _ _  _ _ _ _ ,,-■  viders  for  use  in  the  field,  which  can  be  carried  with 


safety  in  the  pocket ;  these  are  called  pocket  dividers  ; 
the  simplest  form  is  a  pair  of  ordinary  plain  dividers, 
5  or  6  inches  long,  having  a  German  silver  sheath,  with  a  blunt  point,  which  screws  over 
the  steel  points.  No.  74  represents  this  form. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YOItK.  105 


Another  form 
and  pencil,  and 


of  the  pocket  dividers  is  so  constructed  as  to  include  points  for  pet 
yet,  all  contained  in  a  very  small  compass.  No.  79  represents  this 
form.  The  legs  of  these  dividers  are  jointed  together  same  as 
the  ordinary  plain  dividers,  but  each  of  them  is  agam  jou.tsd 
about  the  middle,  so  that  the  etuis  can  be  folded  in  towards  the 
upper  joint;  a  deep  slot  is  made  in  each  leg;  from  their  ends, 
anti  running  almost  up  to  the  middle  joints  in  these  slots,  the 
steel  points  are  neatly  adjusted  on  pivots;  the  opposite  end  of 
one  steel  point  is  finished  into  a  drawing-pen,  anti  the  opposite 
end  of  the  other  into  a  tube  for  holding  the  lead-pencil ;  thus, 
when  the  steel  points  are  revolved,  either  a  pencil  or  pen-point 
is  presented.  When  not  in  use,  the  legs  are  folded  in  at  the 
middle  joint;  the  inner  sides  of  the  legs  of  the  dividers  are  filed 
out  to  receive  the  points,  so  that  when  they  are  not  in  use  every 
delicate  part  is  protected  from  injur}'.  It  will  be  readily  seen, 
that  with  the  legs  of  the  dividers  lully  extended,  and  both  of 
the  sharp  steel  points  presented  to  the  paper,  that  we  have  an 
ordinary  pair  of  dividers;  by  revolving  the  point  which  has  the 
drawing-pen  on  the  opposite  end  we  will  then  have  a  pair  of  dividers  with  pen-point  for 
describing  ink  circles;  but  if  we  should  revolve  the  othef  steel  point,  we  should  then 
have  a  pair  of  dividers  with  pencil-point  for  describing  arcs  and  circles  with  the  lead 
pencil.  Fig.  a  represents  No-  79  drawn  on  a  larger  scale,  and  folded  for  the  pocket 
Another  form  of  pocket  dividers  is  represented  by  No  179.  The  legs  aie  jointed  to¬ 
gether  the  same  as  an  ordinary  pair  of  dividers,  but  instead  of  being  solid  tbey  are 
drilled  out  from  the  end  almost  up  to  the  joint.  The  steel  points,  instead  of  having  the 
pen  and  pencil-points  at  their  opposite  ends,  as  in  No.  79,  are  jointed  in  the  middle. 

When  not  in  use  the  pen  and  pencil  points  are  slipped  into  the  holes  in  the 
legs  of  the  dividers,  and  he  steel  point  bent  up  against  the  inside,  as  repre¬ 
sented  in  the  cut.  WTiien  a  pair  of  plain  dividers  is  wanted,  the  steel  points 
are  turned  out  straight  with  the  legs  of  the  dividers.  When  a  pair  of 
dividers  with  pen-point  is  wanted,  the  pen  is  withdrawn  from  the  dividers 
and  the  steel  point  slipped  into  the  hole  in  the  leg  ;  and  in  the  same  way  the 
pencil-point  takes  the  place  of  us  steel  point,  when  a  lead-pencil  circle  is  to 
be  drawn.  For  making  very  small  circles,  either  of  ink  or  lead-pencil, 
the  points  can  be  withdrawn  from  the  legs  of  the  dividers,  and  used  inde¬ 
pendent.  of  ihcin.  as  the  steel  point,  with  pen-point,  of  itself  is  a  bow  pen, 
and  the  steel  point,  with  lead- pencil  holder,  is  a  bow  pencil. 


THREE-LEGGED  DIVIDERS. 

Or,  Triangular  Compasses,  are  used  for  transferring  triangular  areas  from  one 

drawing  to  another  It  is  an  ordinary  pair  of  plain 
dividers,  with  a  third  leg  attached  by  a  universal 
joint  to  the  face  of  their  joint,  so  that  whatever  may 
happen  to  be  the  form  of  the  triangle  the  legs  can  be 
turned  to  bring  each  of  the  points  upon  one  of  the 
angles. 

To  use  the  triangular  dividers,  open  the  main  legs  to 
take  m  the  base  then  open  and  turn  the  third  leg  and 
bring  it  upon  the  angle  above  the  base;  the  legs  of  the 
dividers  are  now  set  to  the  form  of  the  triangle,  which  can  be  transferred  correctly  to 
any  other  drawing. 

BISECTING  DIVIDERS. 

Or,  Wholes  and  Halves,  is  a  pair  of  ordinary  dividers,  with  the  legs  continued  beyond 
the  joint;  the  legs,  above  the  joint,  being  made  exactly  one-half  the  length  of  those 

below,  therefore,  when  the  longer  legs 
are  extended  to  any  two  points,  the  dis¬ 
tance  between  the  points  of  the  shorter 
legs  will  be  one-half  of  that  between 
the  longer  points.  This  instrument  is  very  useful  when  a  drawing  13  to  be  reduced  one- 


106 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


PROPORTIONAL  DIVIDERS. 

silver  or  brai  wiethe?  °f  ?***  ?1ViderS  &re  made  of  a  flat  Piece  of  German 
length  TTh  r,ectanSular  opemng  cut  in  each,  nearly  the  whole 

„.fh  ’  th®  ends  of  tbe  leSs  are  armed  with  steel  points  :  the  lono-est  two 
are  four  or  five  times  the  length  of  the  shortest  ones.  The  le<rS  are  put  together 
with  the  rectangular  openings  exactly  opposite  each  other,  andTtained  in 
eir  place  by  clamp  plates  and  a  thumb- screw,  which  can  be  moved  up  and 
down  the  opening,  and  made  tight  at  any  desired  point:  these  clamp  plates 
and  thumb-screw  constitute  the  joint  of  the  dividers,  u’pon  which  The  JeS 
are  opened,  and  it  is  easy  to  perceive  that  if  this  joint  is  exactly  half  wav 

..IT1 1  ntVTT,0-' lh"  Pt13'  ‘he  tW0  »P»»  lo  S»  aa me  S 

will  k’  AT  th  J01nt  1S  moved  nearer  one  end,  the  opening  0f  the  points 
w^ll  bear  the  same  proportion  to  each  other  as  the  longer  does  to  the  shorter 

graTuTi^TbVwMc0/ rheSe  di,VidGrS  P°*  23’  pat?e  4>)  have  but  one  set  of 
graduations,  by  which  lines  only  can  be  subdivided  the  proportions  are 

f  ’  1’K’  5’  6 >  i,  y,  i,  T(f;  that  is,  if  the  line  across  one  of  the  clamp  plates 
is  made  to  come  opposite  either  of  the  divisions  on  the  leg  the  two  ends  of 
the  dividers  will  open  in  that  proportion.  g’  3  °f 

of  one  oftheP legfgTduat edfordVi ding  hies  into  j  >  ‘  AT  Tf  T/T 

the  polygons  is  to  have  sides,  then  open  the  dividers  and  i 

steel  points  take  in  the  radius  of  the  circle  then  the  distance  h 

will  be  the  length  of  one  side  of  the  required  polygon.  As  very  felTTorTT/TvT3 
are  made  with  the  graduations  for  enhmnno-  thp  nrpQ  /  7  •  ProPortl°nal  dividers 
the  cube  and  squafe  root  of  numbSn  of  ;admWin^  and  thos«f^  taking 

limited  and  quite  complicated,  concTudei to oil  thele  dif- bei"? 

**  ”  °f  *  H&XS 

injby  irLIdT  Cut  iM  r, r  6U,fr  r- 

as  a  little  too  much  pressure  will  move  the  line  a  littlp  too°f  ,  -f  0  ^ le  n£bt  place, 
may  put  it  too  far  in  the  original  dTection  Tai„  For  °PP°site  pressure 

the  required  point,  some  proportional  dividers  are  fluid  wi  hTbar  andTiT  t  J°int  t0 
by  which  the  joint  can  be  drawn  exactly  to  the  required  dTsion  Ts-TTcT  ^ 
Another  plan  is  to  have  a  rack  fitted  on  the  inside  o/ the  recL aif  -62’  P'  230 

pinion  attached  to  the  sliding  joint  fitting  into  it-  hv  t  e  rectangular  opening,  and  a 

of  the  pinion  the  joint  is  moved  up  and  doT  in’thf  TTg  T  milled  thumb^rew 
regularity  and  exactness.  Great  care  must  be  taken  that' Tf 4r  0Pemng,  with  great 
portional  dividers  get  broken,  for  if  onTs  broken  all  four  mn  6  P°lnt?  of  the  P«>- 
graduations  shall  still  represent  the  right  proportions.  ^  altered’  so  that  the 

BEAM  COMPASSES. 

arelnsufficient)  "‘h  *****  •» 

there  are  two  forms.  No  80  represents  one  foT  Tt ho,  I  Z  Z™  comPass-  of  'vhich 
wood.  The  main  pans  conSTI,?.” ‘  ^  rde  ^ 

brass,  to  the  under  side  of  which  the  points  are  attache?  ’  n  S1.'er  or 

made  so  that  it  can  be  detached,  and  in  it?  place  a  point  either  f0™  T  Pa°mt3  k 
subsaumd.  To  use  this  form'  of  beam  F& 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  107 


o 


o 


edge  of  a  wooden  ruler,  at  the  distance  apart  of  the  radius 
of”the  circle  to  be  described;  with  one  point  upon  the 
required  centre,  the  other  point  is  swung  around,  and 
the  arc  or  circle  completed.  Under  the  whole  length 
of  one  of  the  clamps  a  screw  with  fine  thread  and  milled 
head  is  attached;  upon  this  screw  the  point  is  adjusted; 
by  turning  the  milled  head,  the  point  can  be  made  to 
traverse  from  one  side  of  the  clamp  to  the  other.  The 
object  of  thi3  screw  is,  after  having  adjusted  the  clamp 
on  the  ruler  as  near  as  possible,  to  enable  the  draughts¬ 
man  to  bring  the  points  very  accurately  to  the  required  distance  apart  by  turning  it 


one  way  or  the  other. 


No.  T70  represents  the  other  form  of  the  beam  compass,  in 
which  Ihe  bar  or  rod  is  of  German  silver,  about  one-fourth  of 
an  inch  in  diameter,  and  divided  into  two  or  more  sections, 
with  screw  joints,  for  the  purpose  of  convenience  in  packing 
away  when  not  in  use.  The  points  are  attached  to  German 
silver  tubes,  which  slide  along  the  rod.  One  of  the  tubes 
can  be  adjusted  to  any  position  on  the  rod;  but  the  other  is 
fixed  at  one  end,  and  can  only  be  moved  by  the  adjusting 
screw  to  regulate  small  distances.  To  prevent  the  tubes 
carrying  the  points  from  turning  on  the  bar,  a  groove  is  cut 
the  whole  length  of  the  bar,  in  which  run  steel  guides  pro¬ 
jecting  from  the  inside  of  the  tube.  When  the  bars  are 
screwed  together,  care  must  be  taken  to  have  the  groove  in 
each  section  brought  to  its  right  position  to  make  the  cut 
With  these  beam  compasses  there  are  two 
points,  a  needle,  pen  and  pencil  points ;  the 
fits  in  place  of  the  round  steel  point,  which  is 
the  stationary  tube,  and  the  pen  and  pencil 
place  of  the  steel  point  attached  to  the  mova- 


continuous. 
round  steel 
needle  point 
attached  to 
points  fit 
ble  tube. 


in 


THE  BOW  PEN  AND  BOW  PENCIL. 

These  instruments  are  indispensable  to  an  architectural  or  mechanical  draughtsman, 
for  describing  small  circles  from  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch  to  two  inches  in  diameter, 
*  such  as  the  heads  of  screws,  the  hubs  and  tires  of  wheels, 

There  are  two  kinds  of  bow  pens  and  bow  pencils.  Those 
represented  by  Nos.  84  and  85  arc  about  three  inches  long,  and 
the  leo-s  are  extended  and  closed  by  the  pressure  of  the  fingers; 
the  joint  upon  which  the  legs  move  is  the  same  as  in  the  ordinary 
plain  dividers;  one  of  the  legs  is  made  with  a  permanent  needle 
point  the  other  leg  is  a  pen  or  pencil  point;  both  legs  are  jointed 
in  the  middle,  so  that  the  points  can  always  be  set  at  right  angles 

to  the  paper.  .  t. 

The  other  and  best  form  of  bow  pen  and  bow  pencil  is  that 
with  spring  and  adjusting  screw.  Of  these  there  are  two  kinds. 
Those  represented  at  Nos.  81  and  86  are  made  wholly  of  steel, 
except  the  handle,  which  is  either  of  Ivory  or  German  silver. 
The  legs  are  made  of  one  straight  piece  ot  steel,  which  is  bent 
in  the  middle  until  the  two  points  come  within  one  inch  of  each 
other,  and  then  highly  tempered.  A  steel  wire,  three-fourths  of 
an  inch  long,  having  a  fine  thread  cut  on  it,  is  fastened^  to  the 
middle  of  one  leg,  and  passes  through  the  other  ;  a  small  German 
silver  nut  is  screwed  on  the  end  ot  this  wire,  and  pressing 
against  the  leg,  forces  the  points  closer  together;  the  parts  of 
the  legs  above  the  screw  being  of  tempered  steel,  when  the  nut 
is  loosened,  the  points  will  move  back  with  it. 

The  other  form  of  the  spring  bow  pen  and  bow  pencil  is  repre¬ 
sented  by  Nos.  82  and  83.  The  leg,  body  and  handle  are  made 
of  one  piece  of  German  silver  or  brass,  three  inches  long;  the 


108 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


f-r  receiving  Ld  Xfai^fn* ^oiT 

afperedsfVrp^t;b?:^deTs^,ptttTSet;: 

the  upper  end  of  the  cut  in  the  body;  a  steel  wire  half  »„  I  t? 

Ions,  with  a  tine  thread  cut  on  it,  is  fastened  tatTute  bodv 

kts  »  ped"  " 

b£?  r  Xs  «*  -Y« --'is  c^t^rbX"^^ 

puts^them  fifrtL^apwt!  No.^i  re?1116  *1™*  t0^ether>  or 

in  the  same  manner,  but  has  a  ooint'foMend  G  ""■?'■  Pen  ’  lhe  b(,w  pencil  is  constructed 
pen  point  and  a  peicifpoint  and  by  staTle  of  .tak-  *>  83  h»  both  I 

used  as  a  bow  pea  or  bow  pencil.  ^  L  S  g  one  point  for  the  other,  can  be 

.  drawing  pens. 

made'atld  1^^?^,?^*™****  «d  should  be  wel, 

ivory  handle,  and  so  bent  tharwhen  the  point!  , „  ,  S'ee‘  blnd“.  att“ched  '»  *■> 

there  is  space  between  the  bl.d«  tor  MdKk  0«T.h1"hCfr 

x°sbe  r°d  r““ 

long  from  the  point  of  the  pen  to  end*  of' handle*  “ tS  Method  ""'i163 
pen,  put  the  ink  between  the  blades  with  a  common  °  lh,J  dr”'«"S 
mg  it  down  and  out  between  the  points  of  the  hi  iHpo  ln®  P?D’  draw~ 

.0  the  proper  distance  apart  for  mrt£g  It.  “  '  „Zd  !r  £“ ^ 

Xh^rSi^d  s&ta?  b°  hr  ATO  rx; 

both  blades  must  touch  the  paper.  The'hand'lra^f  rn'o^t’d"1'  P<"“‘S  °f 
are  made  to  unscrew  and  a  neerllo  ;  a  -l?8  0t  st  drawiag  pens 

bWhednfir  Pri1iQg/rawings  from  'one  papeVtoYnXer6^’  WhiCh  ^ 

drawing  pen  having  the  bKef  m^ewSi?  of  Germ  ^  * 

actd  m,,he  ink  does  not  act  upon 

railroad  drawing  pen. 

represent  canfls^and  raHroad^T double Cha“1Cal  ^  architectural  drawings,  or  to 
drawing  pen  is  used.  It  consists  of  two 
drawing  pens  attached  parallel  to  each 
other  on  one  handle;  the  distance  of  the 
two  pens  apart  is  regulated  by  the  adjust¬ 
ing  screw  between  the  end  of  the  handle  and  the  top  of  the  pens. 

.  DOTTING  PEN. 

I  he  dotting  pen  is  made  like  the  drawing  nen  hut  .  ,  . 

revolves  between  the  points,  and  instep  Tcon  h“  *  ^  t0°thed  wheel>  *^h 
tinuous  ink  line,  it  makes  a  dot  for  each  tooth,  and 
consequently,  a  hue  of  dots,  when  drawn  between 
two  points.  It  IS  used  when  imr>o-Ino»*,r  i:« — _ _ 


+t_^  .  ti  •  *vucu  ura,wn  oetween  v  - - - - 

two  perns.  It  is  used  when  imaginary  lines  are  to  be  shown  on  the  drawing. 

map  perambulator. 

The  map  perambulator  is  used  for  measuring  th*  i„„  * 

courses  of  rivers  and  roads,  &c.,  &c.  It  consisfs  of  q  c.ur^ed  ,Iines>  such  as  the 

fourths  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  working  back  and  forward  toothed  wheel>  about  three- 
screw  is  supported  in  a  neat  German  sifver  frame  to  Jhll  UP°n  a  fi?e  Steel  SCTew>  ,he 
To  us.  the  instrument,  screw  the  wheefagakist'  the'^side'oMh^Gerrnan*  silver lframe! 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  4  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  109 


from  which  a  point  projects  almost  to  the  lower  edge  of  the  wheel,  then  roll  the  wheel 
along  the  crooked  line  until  it  reaches  the  end;  then  go  to  the  scale  on  the  edge  of  the 
map  or  drawing,  and  roll  the  wheel  back  to  the  side  of  the  frame  from  which  it  was 
started,  and  the  length  of  the  crooked  line  will  be  ascertained. 

Every  draughtsman  should  provide  himself  with  a  fine  oil  stone  for  dressing  the 
points  of  his  dividers  and  pens,  so  as  to  keep  them  always  in  perfect  working  order; 
lie  should  also  have  a  fine  piece  of  buckskin,  for  wiping  the  instruments  off  before  re¬ 
turning  them  to  the  case.  In  handling  and  using  the  instruments,  the  steel  parts 
should  come  in  contact  with  the  fingers  as  little  as  possible,  as  the  perspiration  rusts 
the  steel,  but  does  not  materially  injure  the  brass  or  German  silver. 

THE  PROTRACTOR 

Is  used  for  plotting  surveys  and  laying  off  angles  in  general.  Nos.  301  and  306  re¬ 
present  semicircular  pieces  of  horn,  brass  or  german  silver,  on  the  middle  of  the 

diameter  of  which  a  dot  or 
small  cut  is  made,  indicating 
the  centre;  the  edges  are 
divided  into  180  parts  or 
degrees,  or  300  parts  or  half 
degrees;  the  best  protractors 
are  always  divided  in  half 
degrees.  The  horn  protrac¬ 
tors  are  made  of  a  solid  piece 
of  horn,  rolled  as  thin  as 
writing  paper;  they  are  transparent,  and  the  lines  for  each  ten  degrees  are  drawn 
almost  from  the  centre  to  the  edge  (see  No.  301).  To  reduce  the  weight  of  metal  pro¬ 
tractors,  and  render  them  more  convenient  to  use,  a  semicircular  piece  is  cut  out,  leaving 
all  round  an  edge  one-half  to  three-quarters  of  an  inch  across;  the  circular  edge  is 
then  divided  in  degrees  or  half  degrees  (see  No.  306). 

To  protract  a  survey,  draw  a  north  and  south  line,  and  take  a  point  about  the  middle: 
bring  the  centre  of  the  protractor  over  this  point,  and  make  the  straight  edge  come  even 
with  the  line;  now  set  off  the  bearings  on  one  side  of  the  line  for  eastings,  and  on  the 
other  for  westings;  then  remove  the  protractor,  and  draw  faint  lines  from  the  centre  to 
the  points  marked  off,  and  with  the  parallel  ruler,  dividers  and  scale,  bring  the  lines  to 
connect,  and  form  a  figure  of  the  survey.  To  set  off  an  angle  from  a  given  point  on  a 
given  line,  bring  the  centre  of  the  protractor  to  the  point,  and  make  the  edge  come  on 
the  line;  then  with  the  point  of  the  dividers  mark  on  the  paper  where  the  required 
degree  comes,  and  draw  a  line  from  the  given  point  to  that  point,  and  the  angle  made 
by  the  two  lines  will  contain  the  required  number  of  degrees. 

There  is  always  more  or  less  difficulty  in  marking  off  the  degrees  from  the  protractor, 
with  the  point  of  the  dividers,  to  do  it  accurately  and  distinctly,  so  that  when  the  pro¬ 
tractor  is  removed,  the  direction  of  the  required  line  can  be  readily  seen.  To  obviate 

this  difficulty,  the  protractor  with  arm  is  made;  the 
arm  is  simply  a  ruler  of  the  same  material  as  the 
protractor,  jointed  to  the  centre,  so  that  it  can  be 
revolved  from  one  side  to  the  other;  it  projects  about 
three  inches  beyond  the  edge  of  the  protractor. 
After  sitting  the  protractor  on  the  line  with  its  centre 
over  the  point  from  which  the  line  is  to  start,  bring 
the  beveled  edge  of  the  arm  to  the  required  degree, 
and  with  the  point  of  the  pencil  resting  against 
that  edge,  draw  a  straight  line;  now,  when  the 
protractor  is  removed,  there  is  no  doubt  about 
the  position  and  direction  of  the  line. 

The  protractor  with  arm  is  divided  in  half  degrees,  and  with  it  angles  can  be  laid  off 
correctly  to  fifteen  minutes,  but  when  great  accuracy  is  to  be  observed,  and  the  angles 
are  required  to  be  laid  off  to  the  very  minute,  a  vernier  must  be  attached  to  the  arm. 
It  is  made  by  widening  the  arm,  and  cutting  a  square  opening  in  it  at  the  part  where  it 
crosses  the  edge  of  the  protractor;  the  edge  of  the  opening  which  meets  the  graduated 
edge  of  the  protractor,  is  divided  in  such  a  manner  as  to  enable  the  parts  of  a  degree 
less  than  thirty  minutes  to  be  accounted  for  correctly,  when  laying  off  the  angle.  For 
a  general  description  of  verniers,  see  Gillespie’s  Land  Survey,  Chapter  II.,  page  228. 


110  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 

A  whole  circle  protractor  is  made  and  used  the  same  as  the  half  circle  ;  it  is,  in  reality 
two  half  circle  protractors,  having  the  same  diameter. 

The  bevel  protractor  is  made  of  steel ;  it  is  half  circle  and  with  arm  ;  its  straight  edge 
projects  beyond  the  arc  both  ways.  The  arm, 
instead  of  being  fastened  permanently  at  the 
centre,  as  is  the  case  in  other  protractors  with 
arms,  has  a  narrow  opening  cut  in  it,  almost 
from  one  end  to  the  other;  the  arrangements 
which  hold  the  arm  to  the  protractor  fit  in  this 
cut,  and  a  clamp  nut  retains  it  in  its  place 
by  loosening  the  clamp  nut  the  arm  can  be 
slipped  so  as  to  project  above  the  arc,  or  be¬ 
low  the  siraigbt  edge,  as  may  be  wanted. 

This  protractor  is  intended  for  the  use  of 
machinists,  in  obtaining  or  laying  off  bevels  upon  a  niece  of  machinery. 

RECTANGULAR  PROTRACTOR. 

This  form  of  protractor  is  generally  made  of  ivory,  and  six  inches  long,  by  one  and 
three-quarters  to  two  and  a  half  inches  wide;  three  edges  of  one  side  are  divided  in 
parts  corresponding  to  the  degrees  and  half  degrees  of 
the  semi-circular  protractor,  the  other  edge  has  a  divi¬ 
sion  half  way  between  the  ends  which  represents  the 
centre  of  the  circle  and  the  point  in  which  the  lines 
around  the  three  edges  would  all  meet,  if  continued. 

To  understand  the  graduations  around  the  edges,  take 
a  half  circle  protractor  and  bring  its  centre  to  the  mark 
on  the  side  not  graduated,  and  make  its  straight  edge  correspond  with  that  side  ;  now, 
it  will  be  found  that  where  the  graduations  on  the  edges  of  the  two  protractors  come  in 
contact  they  represent  exactly  the  same  number  of  degrees  ;  and  if  the  other  lines  on 
the  rectangular  protractor  were  continued  they  would  meet  the  corresponding  ones  on 
the  semi-circular  protractor.  This  protractor  is  used  for  the  same  purposes  and  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  semi-circular  protractor. 

Besides  the  protracting  scale  around  the  edges,  one  side  of  the  rectangular  protractor 
has  on  it  a  diagonal  scale  of  equal  parts,  and  scales  of  20,  25,  30,  35,  40,  45,  50  and  60 
equal  parts  to  the  inch  ;  also,  a  scale  of  chords  for  arcs  of  a  circle  four  inches  diameter  • 
on  the  other  side  are  scales  of  |  in.,  £,  f,  £,  f,  £,  f,  1,  l£,  l£  in.,  each  subdivided  into 
twelve  parts ;  also,  a  scale  of  chords  for  arcs  of  a  circle  six  inches  diameter ;  the  edge 
which  has  the  centre  mark  on  it  is  divided  into  forty  parts  to  the  inch. 

The  diagonal  scale  consists  of  a  series  of  eleven  parallel  and  equi-uistant  straight  lines  ; 
across  these,  and  at  right  angles  to  them,  another  series  of  lines  are  drawn,  having  the 
spaces  between  every  two  lines  to  measure  exactly  one- quarter  of  an  Inch.  The  top  and 
bottom  line  of  the  eleven  parallel  lines  have  the  first  quarter  of  an  inch  divided  into  ten 
equal  parts,  also,  the  last  half  of  an  inch.  A  line  is  drawn  from  the  first  of  these  small 
sub-divisions  of  the  first  parallel  line  diagonally  across  the  other  nine  lines,  to  the  be¬ 
ginning  of  the  sub-divided  part  of  the  lower  line ;  and  from  each  of  the  other  sub¬ 
divisions  of  the  upper  line,  lines  are  drawn  parallel  to  the  first  diagonal  line.  It  is 
readily  seen,  that  at  the  point  Where  one  of  these  diagonal  lines  crosses  each  one  of  the 
nine  parallel  lines,  it  increases  its  distance  from  the  perpendicular  line  by  one-tenth  of 
one  of  the  small  sub-divisions  for  every  parallel  line. 

To  take  off  distances  of  two  figures,  say  46, — chains,  feet  or  miles, — place  one  point 
of  the  dividers  at  the  fourth  perpendicular  line  on  the  top  parallel  line,  and  open  the 
dividers  to  the  sixth  sub-division  at  the  beginning  of  the  line.  If  we  have  three  places 
of  figures  to  take  off,  say  467, — chains,  feet  or  miles, — open  the  dividers  as  before,  along 
the  top  line,  from  the  fourth  perpendicular  line  to  the  sixth  sub-division  ;  now  bring  the 
point  of  the  dividers  down  the  fourth  perpendicular  line  to  the  seventh  parallel  line,  the 
other  point  of  the  dividers  then  will  not  be  on  the  intersection  of  the  sixth  diagonal  line 
and  the  seventh  parallel  line ;  but  when  it  is  opened  to  that  point  the  dividers  will  take 
in  the  required  distance,  viz.,  467 

General  Rule. — To  take  off  any  number  to  three  places  of  figures  from  a  diagonal 
scale  :  on  the  parellel  line,  indicated  by  the  third  figure,  measure  from  the  diagonal  line, 
indicated  by  the  second  figure,  to  the  perpendicular  line,  indicated  by  the  first  figure. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  4  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  Ill 


ENGINEER’S  CHAIN  SCALES,  OF  EQUAL  PARTS, 

Are  those  which  have  one  inch,  or  a  portion  of  an  inch,  divided  into  a  number  of  equal 
parts;  they  are  marked  20,  25,  30,  35.  4 ),  &c.,  &c. ;  and  it  is  to  be  understood  that  each 
one  of  the  fine  divisions  at  the  beginning  of  the  lines  is  that  part  of  an  inch  represented 
by  the  figures  before  the  line  ;  that  is,  if  20,  each  one  is  the  of  an  inch,  and  if  40, 
each  division  is  the  ^ s  of  an  inch.  There  are  but  ten  of  the  finer  divisions  marked  off 
at  the  beginning  of  each  line,  after  that,  each  graduation  represents  ten  of  the  very 
6mall  ones.  On  the  ivory  protractors,  and  the  scales  usually  with  sets  of  instruments, 
it  will  be  found  that  there  is  another  set  of  divisions  over  the  fine  ones,  on  each  line; 
these  divide  the  first  large  space  into  twelve  equal  parts. 

The  measuring  chains  used  by  engineers  are  fifty  or  one  hundred  feet  long,  and  each 
link  one  foot  long;  therefore,  if  each  one  of  the  largo  divisions  on  the  scales  is  called  a 
chain,  the  fine  divisions  will  each  represent  ten  links,  if  the  chain  used  be  one  hundred 
feet  long,  and  five  links,  if  a  fifty  foot  chain  is  used.  The  size  of  the  drawing  is  there¬ 
fore  regulated  by  the  selection  of  one  of  these  scales  to  lay  off  the  length  of  the  lines 
by.  If  the  measures  are  in  feet  and  tenths  of  a  foot,  each  of  the  large  divisions  can 
be  called  one  foot,  and  each  of  the  fine  divisions  will  be  one-tenth  of  a  foot.  If  the 
measure  is  in  feet  and  inches,  each  one  of  the  large  divisions  can  be  called  one  foot,  and 
each  one  of  the  twelve  fine  divisions  above  the  other  fine  divisions,  will  be  one  inch. 

ARCHITECT’S  SCALES,  OF  EQUAL  PARTS. 

In  making  a  plan  of  a  building  or  a  drawing  of  a  piece  of  machinery,  it  is  necessary 
to  make  a  small  fraction  of  a  foot  represent  a  line,  which,  in  reality,  measures  a  whole 
foot ;  the  scales  mostly  used  for  this  purpose  are  T'6  of  an  inch,  532,  £,  J,  f,  £,  f,  f,  1,  1 J, 
and  3  inches  to  the  foot;  that  is,  every  lGth  of  an  inch  is  laid  off  the  whole  length  of 
the  scale,  to  represent  feet,  and  the  first  16ih  is  divided  into  twelve  equal  parts,  to  repre¬ 
sent  the  inches;  and  the  same  with  the  332,  and  all  the  other  divisions  to  3  inches  to 
the  foot. 

SCALE  OF  CHORUS. 

The  chord  of  an  arc  is  a  straight  line  joining  the  two  extremities  of  the  arc.  The 
graduations  on  the  scale  of  chords  represents  the  length  of  the  chords  of  all  arcs,  from 
one  degree  to  ninety  degrees.  The  chord  of  an  arc  of  sixty  degrees  is  always  equal  to 
the  radius  or  half  the  diameter  of  the  circle.  The  chord  of  sixty  is  always  used  for 
describing  arcs  for  laying  off  angles,  or  measuring  angles  already  laid  off. 

On  some  of  the  ivory  scales  there  are  found  a  number  of  other  graduations,  marked 
Rhu.,  Lon.,  Sin.,  Tan.,  S.  T.,  Lat.  These  initials  stand  for  Rhumbs,  Longitudes,  Sines, 
Tangents,  Semi-Tangents,  and  Latitudes.  As  these  are  only  used  in  the  study  and  appli¬ 
cation  of  navigation  we  will  omit  describing  them  here,  and  refer  those  who  wish  to 
know  their  application  to  Heather’s  Treatise  on  Mathematical  Instruments,  page  16. 

The  scales  described  in  the  preceding  pages  are  those  usually  found  on  the  six  inch 
ivory  protractors,  and  six  inch  ivory  scales.  As  a  general  rule,  draughtsmen  would 
prefer  scales  of  greater  length  than  six  inches,  and  with  only  a  certain  class  of  divisions 
on  them.  The  Ivory  Chain  Scale  is  twelve  inches  long,  and  has  two  edges  bevelled, 
and  graduated  either  to  10  and  10  part3  to  the  inch,  or  10  and  20,  and  so  on  up  to  100 
parts  to  the  inch  ;  the  fine  graduations  being  continued  the  whole  length  of  scale. 

The  Triangular  Chain  Scale  is  made  of  well-seasoned  boxwood;  the  six  edges  are 

graduated  each  with  a  single  scale,  viz  : 
one  edge  has  10  parts  to  the  inch,  one 
20  parts,  one  30*parts,  one  40  parts,  one 
50  parts,  and  one  60  parts. 

The  Triangular  Scale  for  architects 
has  five  edges,  graduated  with  two 
scales  on  each  edge,  as  follows :  one 
edge  has  each  of  an  inch,  and  each  of  an  inch  marked  off ;  the  are  numbered 
from  one  end  aud  the  fa  from  the  other.  One  edge  has  each  £  of  an  inch,  and  each 
}  of  an  inch  ;  one  edge  has  each  $  of  an  inch,  and  each  £  of  an  inch  ;  one  edge  has  each 
$  of  an  inch,  and  each  an  inch  ;  one  edge  has  every  1.}  inches,  and  every  3  inches;  and 
one  edge  is  divided  into  inches  and  16ths  of  an  inch.  The  first  division  of  the 
scale  is  divided  into  four  equal  parts ;  consequently,  if  the  represent  one  foot,  each 
of  the  sub-divisions  will  represent  3  inches.  The  -fs,  J,  J,  and  §,  have  the  first  division 


112  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


(hrVlrd  into  twelve  equal  parts;  therefore,  if  the  primary  division  represent  one  foot, 
ewh  of  the  sub-divisions  will  represent  one  inch.  The  }  and  f  of  an  inch  have  the  first 
division  divided  into  twenty-four  equal  parts;  therefore,  if  the  primary  divisions  repre¬ 
sent  one  foot,  each  of  the  sub-divisions  will  represent  the  half  of  an  inch.  The  1  inch 
and  1£  inches  have  the  first  division  divided  into  forty-eight  eqml  parts;  and  if  the 
primal y  division  represent  one  foot,  each  of  the  sub-divisions  will  stand  for  one-quarter 
of  an  inch,  llie  3  inches  has  the  first  division  divided  into  ninety  six  equal  parts;  and 
if  the  primary  division  represent  one  foot,  each  of  the  sub-divisious  will  represent  the 
one-eighth  of  an  inch. 

Tlie  Ivory  and  Boxwood  Flat  Architect’s  Scales,  Nos.  406  and  454,  are  12  inches  long 
by  1 1  inches  wide,  and  have  the  following  divisions  o‘<  them,  viz. :  4  J»,  1  s  i  s  3 
■g,  1,  1 2,  1J  3,  2|-,  2J,  2f,  and  3  inches  to  the  foot;  the  and  1  inch  divisions 

are  graduated  on  the  two  edges  of  one  side;  all  the  other  divisions  are  laid  off  on  the 
body  of  the  scale.  The  primary  division  of  each  scale  is  divided  into  twelve  equal 
parts,  to  represent  inches;  and  in  the  f,  f,  f,  |,  1},  lj,  if,  2,  2$,  2’-,  2},  and  3  inch 
scales,  the  primary  divisions  of  each  is  also  divided  into  ten  equal  parts,  by  faint  dots 
over  the  twelve  parts ;  each  one  of  these  represent  the  one-teutb  of  a  foot,  when  the 
primary  division  is  taken  for  one  foot. 

The  Ivory  and  Boxwood  Architect's  Scales,  with  16  different  graduations,  all  brought 
to  the  edge.  Nos.  410  and  458  have  the  same  graduations  on  them  as  Nos.  406  and  454- 
but  have  them  arranged  in  such  a  manner  that  the  divisions  of  each  graduation  come 
out  to  one  or  the  other  of  the  four  edges.  The  advantage  of  having  the  graduations  on 
scales  come  out  to  the  edges  is,  that  the  edge  of  the  scale  can  be  brought  to  the  line, 
and  the  required  distance  marked  off  without  taking  it  with  the  dividers,  thereby  in¬ 
suring  greater  accuracy  and  less  trouble. 


PAPER  SCALES. 

A  very  convenient  though  not  very  lasting  scales  ;  are  printed  from  copper-plates  on 
strips  of  card-board  ;  they  are  nineteen  inches  long  by  one  and  a  half  inches  wide  •  each 
strip  has  but  one  scale  on  it,  and  that  on  one  edge.  They  are  usually  put  up  in  sets  of 

six,  thus:  J-,  i,  f,  1,  1J,  and  3  inches  to  the  foot,  for  series  A;  and  A,  ^  TK  J.  |  and  1 

of  an  inch  to  the  foot,  for  series  B;  and  10,  20,  30,  40,  50.  and  60  parts  to  the  inch,  for 
senes  C.  These  scales  being  made  of  the  same  material  as  the  paper  upon  which  the 
drawing  is  made,  the  expansion  and  contraction,  from  moisture  and  heat,  are  equal  upon 
both ;  another  advantage  is,  they  are  not  as  liable  to  soil  the  paper  as  scales  made  of 
other  material. 


STEEL  RULES,  OR  SCALES. 

These  scales  are  intended  for  the  use  of  machinists,  in  making  nice  measurements  on 
delicate  work.  They  are  made  of  steel,  and  divided  into  inches  on  all  four  of  the  ed°-es  • 
the  hist  inch  on  one  edge  is  divided  into  1 6  equal  parts,  the  next  inch  into  32  equal  parts’, 
and  the  next  into  64  equal  parts.  Another  edge  has  the  first  inch  divided  into  20  equal 
parts,  the  next  inch  into  50  equal  parts,  and  the  next  inch  into  100  equal  parts.  Another 
edge  has  the  first  inch  divided  into  12  equal  parts,  the  next  inch  into  24  equal  parts,  and 
the  next  inch  into  48  equal  parts;  and  the  fourth  edge  has  the  first  inch  divided  into  8 
equal  parts,  the  next  inch  into  14  equal  parts,  and  the  next  inch  into  28  equal  parts. 

THE  SECTOR. 

.  These  are  usually  made  of  two  pieces  of  ivory,  each  six  inches  long,  and  jointed  together 
like  the  carpenter’s  rule ;  it  is  aD  instrument  but  little  used  at  the  present  time,  and 
therefore  we  will  not  attempt  to  enter  into  a  description  of  it  here,  but  refer  for  complete 
information  about  its  construction  and  use,  to  Heather’s  Treatise  on  Mathematical  instru¬ 
ments,  page  34. 

STRAIGHT  EDGES, 

Are  rulers,  the  edges  of  which  are  very  carefully  finished,  to  enable  the  draughtsman  to 
draw  a  perfectly  straight  line.  They  are  made  of  some  kind  of  hard  wood”  or  metal. 
The  metal  ones  can  be  made  more  accurately  than  the  wooden  ones,  because  their  edges 
can  be  ground  on  iron  plates,  with  emory,  and  finally  finished  by  grinding  the  edges  of 
two  rules  together,  also  with  emory. 

In  order  to  ascertain  whether  a  straight  edge  is  perfectly  true,  take  two  of  them  and 
place  Que  edge  of  one  against  an  edge  of  the  other,  and  hold  them  up  between  the  eye 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHTU ADELPHT A  AND  NEW  YORK.  113 

and  the  light,  and  observe  if  any  light  can  be  seen  between  the  edges ;  all  the  ^-tgcs 
should  be  tried  in  the  same  manner. 


TRIANGLES 

Are  used  for  laying  off  angles,  and  with  a  straight  edge  for  drawing  parallel  lines.  They 
are  made  of  hard  wood  or  metal,  and  are  either  solid  or  with  open  centre ;  the  angles 
are  usually  30,  60,  and  90  degrees,  or  45,  4  5,  and  90  degrees  ;  the  length  of  the  sides 
vary  from  5  to  12  inches.  The  wooden  triangles  are  lighter,  less  expensive,  and  less 
liable  to  soil  the  paper  than  the  metal,  but  cannot  be  made  so  accurately;  the  wood 
triangles  are  also  apt  to  warp  and  become  incorrect  by  wear  in  using.  The  advantage 
of  the  open  over  the  solid  triangles  is,  when  of  wood  that  they  are  less  liable  to  warp 
and  if  of  metal  they  are  lighter;  besides  these  reasons,  they  do  not  conceal  so  much  of 
the  drawing,  and  in  using  them  the  draughtsman  can  see  better  how  to  draw  his  lines. 
To  see  if  the  right  angle  of  a  triangle  is  correct,  draw  a  straight  line,  and  bring  the  edge 
of  one  of  the  sides  exactly  on  it.  having  the  right  angle  about  the  middle  of  it  ,  then 
draw  a  line  along  the  other  side,  f.om  the  right  angle;  now,  it  is  to  be  supposed  there 
is  a  right  angle  on  each  side  of  the  last  line  drawn  :  to  prove  it,  take  up  the  triangle  and 
place  it  in  the  same  position  it  occupied  before,  but  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  last  line  , 
now  if  the  angle  of  the  triangle  is  not  90  degrees,  when  one  side  corresponds  with  its 
line  the  other  will  not.  To  prove  the  angle  of  30,  see  if  it  is  one-third  of  ninety,  and 

the  angle  of  60  should  be  double  of  the  30  angle.  .  ,  .  t 

The  edges  of  the  triangle  can  be  tested  in  the  same  manner  as  the  edges  of  a  straight 
edge  The  simplest  way  to  test  the  right  angle  of  a  triangle,  is  by  the  right  angle  of  the 
T  square,  one  edge  of  the  triangle  being  held  against  theblade  and  the  two  right ^angles 
brought  together ;  the  other  side  of  the  triangle  should  fit  evenly  on  the  head  of  the  T 
square;  the  other  plan  is  the  most  correct,  as  there  may  be  an  error  in  the  am.de  of  the 
T* square.  The  triangle  is  one  of  the  most  useful  articles  in  a  draughtsman  s  set  of 

instruments.  , 

IRREGULAR  CURVES 

Are  made  of  wood  or  horn  ;  a  variety  of  curves  are  cut  upon  the  outer  edges,  and  pieces 
are  cut  from  the  body  in  such  a  manner  that  there  is  a  curve  for  every  side  of  the  open¬ 
ing  These  curves  are  much  used  in  design  drawing,  also  for  architectural  drawing, 
some  little  use  is  made  of  them  in  civil  engineering. 


T  SQUARES 

Are  usually  made  of  hard  wood,  and  are  of  three  different  kinds.  The  first  kind  has 
the  cross-tdece  or  head  fastened  permanently  and  securely  at  right  angles  to  the  straight 
edge  or  blade.  The  second  kind  has  the  head  attached  to  the  blade  by  a  clamp-screw, 
wlfich  allows  the  head  to  be  fixed  at  any  angle  to  the  blade,  and  firmly  clamped  where 
fixed  The  third  kind  has  the  head  permanently  and  securely  fastened  at  right  angles 
to  the  blade,  and  a  secondary  head  of  the  same  size  attached  to  it  with  a  clamp-screw, 
and  thus  when  other  angles  than  right  angles  are  to  be  made,  the  movable  head  can 
be  fixed  at  the  proper  inclination  to  the  blade,  while  a  right  angle  is  still  maintained  by 
the  fixed  head.  ?  InP  the  first  two  kinds  the  blade  is  fixed  to  one  of  the  flat  sides  of  the 
head  and  when  used,  the  edge  of  the  head  comes  against  the  side  of  the  drawing  board, 
while  the  blade  lays  Evenly  on  it;  in  the  third  kind  the  blade  is  attached  between  the 
tWo  parts  of  the  head,  so  ‘that  in  using  either  the  fixed  or  movable  side  there  is  an  edge 
to  come  against  the  drawing  board,  while  the  blade  rests  on  the  boai  • 

The  T  square  is  always  used  in  connection  with  a  drawing  board  and  with  and  a 
triangle  aU  the  straight  and  parallel  lines  of  a  drawing  are  very  ea  ily  added;  the  head 
of  the  T  square  being  held  against  the  edge  of  the  board,  and  the  triangle  resting  against 
the  ed<re  of  the  blade,  along  which  it  un  be  slid  for  making  parallel  lines,  bj  sliding 
the  head  alon<r  the  edge  of  the  drawing  board  other  parallel  lines  can  be  drawn.  The 
ed-es  of  the  blade  oMhe  T  square  are  apt  to  get  rough  from  constant  use;  to  prevent 
lift,  and  also  to  make  the  blade  suffer  and  less  liable  to  warp,  a  thin  strip  of  brass  is 

t  into  the  edges,  and  finished  off  smooth  and  true.  ,  , 

The  angles  of  the  T  square  should  be  tested  in  the  same  manner  as  the  angles  of  r 

triangle,  ana  the  edges  of  the  blade  as  the  edges  of  a  straight  edge. 

8 


114  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


PARALLEL  RULERS 

Are  of  two  kinds ;  the  first  and  most  common  consists  of  two  straight  edges,  of  ebony 
or  metal,  from  six  to  twenty-four  inches  long,  by  three-t^iarters  of  an  inch  to  one  and 
a  half  inches  wide,  joined  together  by  two  parallel  strips  of  brass,  which  move  upon 
pivots  at  the  points  where  they  are  attached  to  the  rulers;  thus,  when  the  bars  are  put 
apart  they  are  always  held  parallel  to  each  other  by  the  brass  strips,  consequently,  if  the 
edge  of  one  of  the  bars  is  brought  to  a  line,  and  firmly  held  there,  and  the  other  bar 
pushed  away  from.it,  a  line  or  lines  drawn  by  the  second  bar  will  be  parallel  to  the 
original  line. 

ROLLING  PARALLEL  RULERS. 

The  other  form  is  a  solid  straight  edge,  from  nine  to  eighteen  inches  long,  by  two  inches 
wide,  made  of  a  thick  piece  of  ebony  wood,  or  metal ;  this  is  mounted  upon  two  small 
rollers,  of  equal  diameters,  one  near  each  end,  and  both  revolving  upon  one  axis.  If 
one  edge  is  brought  to  a  line,  and  the  ruler  is  pushed  from  it,  the  two  rollers  being  of 
equal  size,  and  on  the  same  axis,  will  move  both  ends  along  the  paper  with  equal 
rapidity  ;  and  any  lines  drawn  in  the  new  position  will  be  parallel  with  the  first  line. 

Some  of  this  form  of  parallel  rulers  have  the  edges  graduated,  which  is  very  con¬ 
venient  in  many  kinds  of  drawings  ;  the  circumference  of  the  wheels  are  often  graduated 
for  the  purpose  of  drawing  a  number  of  parallel  lines  at  the  same  distance  apart. 

FASTENING  TACKS 

Are  small  nails  used  for  fastening  the  paper  to  the  drawing  board ;  they  have  large  flat 
heads  and  very  small  sharp  points;  the  heads  are  round,  and  made  of  brass,  German 
silver,  or  steel,  and  the  points  of  the  best  tempered  steel,  carefully  sharpened.  In  put¬ 
ting  them  into  the  drawing  board,  the  point  should  be  well  started  with  the  fingers,  and 
the  pin  pushed  home  with  a  small  bottle  cork.  If  the  thumb  is  used  for  pressing  them 
in  there  is  danger  of  the  upper  part  of  the  pin  coming  through  the  head,  and  injuring 
the  thumb. 

A  new  form  of  fastening  tack  has  just  been  introduced;  it  is  a  right  angled  piece  of 
metal,  each  side  of  which  is  one-half  an  inch  long,  with  three  points ;  it  is  intended  for 
fastening  the  paper  at  the  corners. 

HORN  CENTRES 

Are  circular  pieces  of  very  thin  semi-transparent  horn,  about  one-half  an  inch  in  diam¬ 
eter,  with  very  short  and  delicate  steel  points  projecting  from  one  side.  They  are  used 
•to  put  over  the  point  which  is  to  be  the  centre  of  several  circles  or  arcs  ;  the  centre 
point  can  be  seen  through  the  horn,  and  the  point  of  the  dividers  can  be  put  directly 
on  the  centre  point ;  but  the  paper  is  shielded  from  being  punctured  and  disfigured  by 
frequent  use  of  the  same  hole  as  a  centre. 

THE  DRAWING  BOARD 

Is  a  rectangular  frame  of  walnut,  with  an  open  centre,  into  which  a  soft  pine  board, 
carefully  planed  and  perfectly  smooth,  is  fitted,  and  fastened  in  with  buttons.  The 
frame  is  made  of  hard  wood,  so  as  not  to  wear  easily  and  become  incorrect,  and 
the  centre  of  soft  wood,  so  that  the  fastening  pins  can  be  easily  putin.  The  angles  and 
edges  of  the  frame  should  be  as  correct  a3  possible;  though  a  little  inaccuracy  in  these 
.respects  is  not  very  important,  as  only  one  side  is  used  for  resting  the  head  of  the  T 
.  square  against,  and  the  lines  which  would  require  another  side  to  be  used  are  added 
with  the  triangles  and  the  dividers. 

AMSLER’S  POLAR  PLANIMETER. 

By  means  of  Amsler’s  Polar  Planimeter  a  person  entirely  ignorant  of  Geometry,  may 
ascertain  the  area  of  any  planiraetric.il  figure,  no  matter  how  irregular  its  outlines  may 
be,  more  correctly  and  in  much  shorter  time  than  the  most  experienced  Mathematician 
could  calculate  it. 

The  management  of  the  Instrument  can  be  easily  learned  in  half  an  hour,  and  in  size 
it  is  no  larger  than  a  two  feet  folding  rule. 

The  Planimeter  indicates  square  ieet  or  square  inches,  and  acres  for  surveying, 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  115 


Directions. — Preparatory  to  the  use  of  the  Instrument,  ascertain  its  state  : — The  Index 
roller  D  must  play  easily  without  coming  in  contact  with  the  nonius,  (or  vernier.)  The 
screw  centres  on  which  its  axis  revolves  must  be  adjusted,  so  as  to  allow  perfect  freedom 
of  rotation  ;  the  same  is  to  be  observed  for  the  centre  pin  C. 

The  needle  point  E  ought  to  project  but  very  little  from  its  socket.  Great  care  must 
be  taken  not  to  bend  any  part  of  the  instrument. 

To  ascertain  the  area  of  a  figure  in  square  inches,  slide  the  square  rod  A  into  the  tube 
H,  so  that  the  line  marked  10  sq.  in.  (10  square  inches,)  stands  fair  with  the  bevelled 
part  of  the  tube  J.  Then  set  the  instrument  on  the  paper,  so  that  the  index  roller  D,  the 
tracing  point  F,  and  the  needle  point  E  rest  on  the  paper;  press  the  latter  point  a  little 
on  the  paper,  not  enough  to  pierce  it  through.  This  point  is  to  remain  stationary  during 
the  whole  operation.  Set  the  tracing  point  F  on  any  point  P  of  the  outline,  and  mark 
that  point,  and  read  off"  the  state  of  the  counting  wheel  G,  and  the  index  roller  D.  Sup¬ 
pose  the  counting  wheel  indicates  3  (as  in  cut,)  the  index  roller  9U5  (90  degrees  to  be 
read  on  the  index  roller,  and  5-10  on  the  nonius)  so  that  the  0  of  the  nonius  stands  on 
90  5-1000  of  the  circumference  of  the  index  roller.  Write  down  the  number  just  read 
off  thus,  3,905. 

Now  follow  with  the  tracing  point  F,  the  outline  of  the  figure,  or  part  of  the  figure,  to 
be  measured,  with  great  exactness,  in  the  same  direction  as  the  hands  of  a  watch  would 
move,  until  you  arrive  at  the  starting  point. 

Strait  lines  may  be  followed  along  a  rule;  then  read  off  again  the  state  of  the  indica¬ 
tors.  Suppose  you  find  now  5,763,  i.e.  the  counting  wheel  indicating  5,  and  the  index 
roller  and  nonius  76  3-10  degrees.  From  these  two  readings  the  area  found  is  to  be  ob¬ 
tained,  and  here  two  points  are  to  be  considered. 

A.  If  the  needle  point  E  is  outside  of  the  figure  just  traced  round,  the  first  number 
(3,905)  is  to  be  decucted  from  the  second  number  (5,763.) 

5,763 

*  3,905  and  the  remainder  (1,858)  is  to 

be  multiplied  by  ten  equal 

18,58: - 

which  is  the  area  desired,  1,858 

B.  If  the  needle  point  E  is  inside  of  the  outlines  of  the  figure,  add  to  the  number  last 
read  off  (5,763)  the  number  marked  on  the  side  of  the  square  rod  next  to  where  10  sq. 
m.  is  marked  on  the  upper  side. 

In  this  case  it  is  20,240,  the  last  number  5,763  read  off 
The  number  on  side  20,240 

26,003  Deduct  from  this 
amount  the  number  first  read  off  3,905 


22,098 

Multiply  this  remainder  by  ten,  equal  220,98,  and  this  is  the  amount  of  square  inches, 
or  area  of  the  measured  figure. 

It  is  of  no  consequence  whether  the  roller  moves  inside  or  outside  of  the  outlines  of 
the  figure,  provided  it  moves  on  a  smooth  surface  even  with  the  figure. 

To  obtain  the  area  in  sauare  feet,  slide  the  square  rod  into  the  tube  up  to  the  line 
marked  0,1  sq.  ft.  or  0,5  sq?ft.  In  this  case  the  difference  between  the  first  and  second 
readings  of  the  indicators  is  to  be  multiplied  by  0,1  or  0,05.  If  the  difference,  for  in¬ 
stance  is  4,653,  the  rod  being  up  to  the  line  marked  0,  1  sq.  ft.,  then  is  4,653X0,  1= 
0,4653  equal  to  the  area  in  decimal  fractions  of  a  square  foot. 

If  the  needle  point  is  within  the  outlines  of  the  figures  as  described  in  B,  proceed  the 
same  way  as  at  B,  but  multiply  by  0,1  or  0,05. 

If  the  figure  to  be  measured  is  at  a  reduced  scale,  the  result  has  to  be  multiplied  by 
thfc  square  of  the  proportion  of  the  reduction.  If  the  proportion  of  the  figure  to  the  full 
size  is  as  l  :  10,  the  result  is  to  be  multiplied  by  102=100— for  instance:  the  result  of 
the  first  example  is  1,858,  which  multiplied  by  100,  ( 1,858X  100)=1858  sq.  inches,  would 
be  the  amount  of  the  area. 

If  the  amount  of  acres  is  to  be  ascertained,  the  proportion  of  the  reduction  being 
1 :  1000,  slide  the  square  rod  up  to  the  line  marked  2  ac.  I  :  1000,  or  1  ac.,  and  operate 
as  indicated  above;  the  result  is  to  be  multiplied  by  1  or  2  instead  of  10  or  5.  If  the  rod 
is  set  up  to  the  line  marked  l  ac.,  no  multiplication  i3  necessary. 

Should  the  plan  of  the  piece  of  land  be  drawu  on  a  smaller  scale  than  1-1000,  for  ex- 


116  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 

ample  l-5000th,  then  multiply  the  result  with  the  square  of  the  proportion  of  th« 
reduction  to  the  scale  of  1-1000.  Thus  for  the  scale  of  1-5000  the  result  would  have 
to  be  multiplied  by  5X5—25  (1-5000  being  to  l-1000th  as  5-1.)  If  the  scale  is  l-500th 
multiply  the  result  by  that  is  to  say,  divide  the  result  by  4. 

Remark. — If  on  reading  off  the  horizontal  or  counting  wheel  G,  the  indicator  points 
near  the  middle  line  between  two  figures,  say  between  3  or  4,  then  see  how  the  index 
roller  stands  to  the  nonius.  If  the  0,  on  the  nonius  is  on  the  lower  side  of  the  0  of  the 
roller,  therefore  near  100,  then  read  3,  but  if  the  0  on  the  nonius  is  on  the  upper  side, 
therefore  near  0  on  the  roller,  then  read  4  for  unity. 

If  the  horizontal  wheel  turns  on  its  axis  during  the  tracing  operation,  so  that  it  goes 
beyond  0  (in  fact  10),  and  even  marks  several  revolutions  and  then  stops  at  any  num¬ 
ber,  for  instance  7,  you  read  17  or  27,  &c.,  adding  as  many  times  ten  as  the  wheel  has 
made  full  revolutions. 

It  is  easy  to  notice  the  number  of  revolutions.  If  the  wheel  G  marks  6,  and  the 
roller  D  is  for  instance  on  0  degrees,  7-10  degrees,  or  on  4  degrees,  7-10  degrees,  then 
the  reading  is  of  course  6,007,  or  6,047.  The  number  read  off  the  nonius  always  taking 
the  third  place  after  the  units. 

The  cut  shows  the  Instrument  two-thirds  the  natural  size. 

Draftsmen,  Engineers,  Surveyors,  Ship  Builders,  Architects,  Machinists,  will  please 
devote  a  few  moments  only  to  the  examination  of  this  instrument,  and  they  will  at  once 
be  convinced  of  its  great  importance  and  value. 

CROSS  SECTION  TRIANGLES  AND  BATTER  ANGLES, 

Are  a  series  of  angles  constantly  recurring  in  railroad  engineering.  The  Cross 
Section  Triangle  has  its  base  and  perpendicular  proportional  to  each  other  and  are 
used  for  drawing  cross  sections  of  cuttings  and  embankments. 

Batter  Angles  are  used  for  drawing  the  batter  or  slope  in  rock,  cuttings,  walls,  and 
piers. 

RAILROAD  CURVES, 

Are  thin  pieces  of  wood  or  card-board  cut  into  arcs  of  circles  of  radii  from  2  to  250 
inches,  they  are  generally  made  from  3  to  18  inches  long  by  2  inches  wide,  the  length 
increasing  with  the  radius. 

For  description  of  the  different  kinds  of  Drawing  Paper,  Colors,  Brushes,  Pencils, 
&c.,  their  use  and  how  to  use  them,  we  would  refer  to  Warren’s  Manual  of  Drafting 
Instruments  and  Materials,  on  page  88  of  this  Catalogue. 

POCKET  COMPASSES, 

Are  small  compasses,  of  sizes  not  too  large  to  be  carried  with  convenience  in  the 
pocket,  and  are  very  useful  in  traveling,  in  order  that  the  relative  positions  of  places 
may  be  known  at  all  times.  They  are  made  of  a  great  variety  of  plans  and  forms  ;  as 
without  stop  and  with  stop  to  needle;  with  covers  to  face  and  without;  with  agate 
centres  to  needle  and  without,  and  with  graduated  dials  and  without.  The  stop  to 
the  needle  is  an  arrangement  by  which  the  needle  can  be  lifted  off  the  centre  pin  and 
held  tightly  against  the  glass  face,  when  the  compass  is  not  in  use,  and  thereby  pre¬ 
vent  the  rapid  dulling  of  the  point  and  wearing  of  the  centre,  which  takes  place  when 
the  needle  is  constantly  in  motion.  The  object  of  the  cover  is  to  prevent  the  glass 
which  covers  the  face  from  getting  broken,  and  the  compass  injured  in  other  ways. 
The  agate  centre  is  a  watch  jewel,  fixed  in  the  centre  of  the  needle,  where  it  sets  on 
the  centre  pin ;  the  jewel  being  very  smooth  and  hard  causes  the  needle  to  vibrate  and 
settle  more  correctly,  and  does  not  become  worn  by  the  point,  though  in  constant  use. 
The  object  of  the  graduated  dial  is  to  give  the  exact  bearing  of  a  place  from  a  giv&n 
point. 

THE  UNIVERSAL  SUN-DIAL, 

Is  a  pocket  compass,  over  the  face  of  which  a  metal  rim  is  hinged,  having  its  upper 
surface  divided  into  the  proper  divisions  to  represent  hours  and  minutes ;  a  straight 
pin  G  fixed  in  the  centre  of  the  rim  or  dial,  upon  a  bar,  the  ends  of  which  revolve  in 
the  edge  of  the  rim ;  when  in  use  the  pin  is  upright,  and  when  not  in  use  is  turned 
down  level  with  the  rim.  A  graduated  arc  of  90  degrees  is  attached  to  the  compass 
face,  and  passes  through  the  outside  edge  of  the  dial  rim ;  this  arc  is  jointed  at  its 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  117 


base,  so  that  it  can  be  laid  flat  when  the  instrument  is  not  in  use.  To  use  this  form 
of  sun-dial,  place  it  in  the  sun,  as  nearly  level  as  possible  ;  raise  the  graduated  arc, 
then  raise  the  dial  rim,  and  bring  the  arrow  on  its  outer  edge  to  the  degree  on  the  arc 
which  represents  the  latitude  of  the  place ;  now  lift  the  pin  perpendicular  to  the  plane 
of  the  dial  rim,  and  turn  the  compass  box  around  until  the  blued  end  of  the  needle  is 
directly  over  the  North  line  ;  the  shadow  of  the  upright  pin  will  then  be  thrown 
across  the  dial  rim,  and  the  graduation  which  it  falls  upon  will  be  the  time  of  day. 

PRISMATIC  AZIMUTH  COMPASS. 

With  this  instrument  horizontal  angles  can  be  observed  with  great  rapidity,  and 
with  considerable  degree  of  accuracy.  It  is,  consequently,  a  very  valuable  instrument 
to  the  military  engineer,  who  can  make  his  observations  with  it  while  holding  it  in  his 
hand,  with  all  the  accuracy  necessary  for  a  military  sketch.  It  is  also  a  useful  in¬ 
strument  for  filling  in  the  detail  of  an  extensive  survey;  after  the  principal  points 
have  been  laid  down  by  means  of  observations  made  with  the  transit  instruments,  and 
for  any  purpose,  in  short,  in  which  the  portability  of  the  instrument  and  rapidity  of 
execution  are  of  more  importance  than  extreme  accuracy. 

For  a  complete  description  of  the  instrument,  and  how  to  use  it,  see  page  115 
Heather’s  Treatise  on  Mathematical  Instruments. 

GEOLOGICAL  COMPASS. 

This  is  an  ordinary  pocket  compass,  to  which  is  added  attachments  for  taking  angles 
of  inclination  in  the  strata  of  rocks.  It  is  from  two  to  two  and  a  half  inches  in  dia¬ 
meter,  and  has  a  ring  like  a  watch  ;  the  dial  is  a  metal  rim,  raised  about  one-eighth  of 
an  inch  from  the  bottom  of  the  compass,  and  divided  into  360  equal  parts  or  degrees ; 
the  needle  has  an  agate  centre  and  stop  attachment.  The  bottom,  or  rather  the  face 
of  the  compass,  is  divided  into  90  equal  parts  or  degrees,  from  the  North  line  to  the 
West  line,  and  also  into  the  same  number  from  the  West  to  the  South  line, — the  0 
point  being  at  the  West  line.  A  delicate  pendulum,  with  pointer,  swings  upon  the 
centre  pin  and  traverses  the  arcs  on  the  face.  Through  the  ring  of  the  compass  box 
a  metal  slide  is  fixed,  which  pushes  in  under  the  bottom  plate  of  the  face.  When  the 
instrument  is  to  be  used  for  taking  inclinations,  pull  out  the  metal  slide  and  place  the 
compass  box  upright,  and  resting  it  on  its  edge  and  the  slide;  if  the  surface  on  which 
the  box  is  placed  is  perfectly  level,  the  pendulum  on  the  face  will  hang  directly  over 
the-  0  point,  but  if  the  strata  dips  North  or  South,  the  index  on  the  pendulum  will 
point  at  the  graduation  which  indicates  the  angle  of  inclination. 

THE  MINERS’  COMPASS. 

Consists  essentially  of  a  dipping  needle,  about  2£  inches  long,  which  inclines 
towards  any  mass  of  iron  and  thus  discovers  its  position. 

When  used  for  tracing  ore,  the  observer  should  hold  the  ring  in  his  hand,  and  keep 
the  needle  north  and  south,  standing  with  his  face  to  the  west. 

If  held  horizontal,  it  serves,  of  course,  as  a  Pocket  Compass,  having  also  a  brass 
cover  not  shown  in  the  cut. 

THE  POCKET  COMPASS  WITH  SIGHTS. 

This  little  instrument,  shown  with  jacob-staff  socket  in  fig.  962,  though  not  used 
in  extensive  surveys  like  the  larger  compasses  we  have  described,  is  found  very  con¬ 
venient  in  making  explorations,  or  in  retracing  the  lines  of  government  surveys,  as  in 
locating  land  warrants,  &c. 

The  sights  are  made  with  a  slote  and  a  hair,  on  opposite  sides ;  they  also  have 
joints  near  the  base,  so  as  to  fold  over  each  other  above  the  glass,  when  the  compass 
is  packed  in  its  case. 

The  circle  is  graduated  to  degrees,  and  figured  from  0  to  90  each  way,  as  in  the 
larger  instruments. 

The  needle  is  suspended  upon  a  jeweled  centre,  and  is  raised  by  the  lifter  shown  in 
the  cut. 

The  jacob-staff  socket  is  often  used  with  the  compass,  being  screwed  to  the  under 
side,  and  detached  at  pleasure. 

The  mountings  are  all  that  are  furnished,  the  staff  itself  being  easily  made  out  of 
a  common  walking  stick. 


118  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK 

We  make  two  sizes  of  the  pocket  compass,  differing  mainly  in  the  needle,  which  in 
one  is  two  and  a  half,  in  the  other  three  and  a  half  inches  long. 

As  a  reading  Vernier  Pocket  Compass  with  sights,  this  instrument  has  also  a  three 
and  a  half  inch  needle,  and  is  furnished  with  a  vernier  outside,  reading  to  five  minutes, 
by  which  the  sights  can  be  placed  at  any  desired  angle  with  the  line  of  zeros,  so  as  to 
set  off  the  variation  of  the  needle,  as  with  the  Vernier  Compass. 

The  compass  is  furnished  with  jacob-staff  mountings  ;  sometimes,  if  desired,  with 
a  very  light  tripod ;  has  two  levels,  and  is  neatly  packed  in  a  mahogany  case. 

It  makes  a  most  excellent  and  portable  little  instrument  in  locations,  and  is  espe¬ 
cially  useful  for  the  surveyor  of  government  lands. 


(The  greater  portion  of  the  following  pages  we  have  been  kindly  permitted  to  copy  from  Messrs.  W.  &  L. 
E.  Gurley's  very  excellent  book,  the  “American  Engineers’  and  Surveyors’  Manual.”) 

For  a  full  and  complete  description  of  the  Solar  Compass  ^nd  Engineers’  Transit,  alluded  to  in  the  text, 
Bee  the  Manual  as  above. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

SURVEYING  INSTRUMENTS. 

« 

The  various  instruments  used  in  Surveying  may  be  conveniently  arranged  into  two 
general  divisions. 

(1.)  Needle  instruments, — or  such  as  owe  their  accuracy  and  value  to  the  magnetic 
needle  only,  embracing  the  Plain  and  Vernier  Compasses,  and  the  Vernier  Transit. 

(2.)  Angular  instruments,  including  those  in  which  the  horizontal  angles  are 
measured  by  a  divided  circle  and  verniers,  as  well  as  by  the  needle  also;  as  the  Rail¬ 
road  Compass,  Surveyors’  and  Engineers’  Transits,  &c. 

In  the  present  work  we  shall  consider  first,  those  instruments  comprised  in  the  first 
division,  and,  as  in  these  the  accuracy  of  the  horizontal  angles  indicated,  depends  upon 
the  delicacy  of  the  needle,  and  the' constancy  with  which  it  assumes  a  certain  direc¬ 
tion,  termed  the  “  magnetic  meridian,”  we  shall  here  remark  briefly  upon  the  form , 
the  length ,  and  the  movement  of 

The  Magnetic  Needle. — The  forms  of  the  needle  are  almost  infinitely  varied,  ac¬ 
cording  to  the  taste  or  fancy  of  the  maker  or  surveyor,  but  ma)r  be  resolved  into  two 
general  classes,  one  having  the  greatest  breadth  in  a  horizontal,  the  other  in  a  vertical 
direction. 

We  have  usually  made  our  needles  about  one-twentieth  of  an  inch  broad  and  one- 
third  as  thick,  parallel  from  end  to  end,  the  north  and  south  poles  being  distinguished 
from  each  other  by  a  small  scollop  on  the  north  end. 

Of  course  the  form  of  the  needle  is  always  varied  according  to  the  choice  of 
our  customers,  and  without  additional  charge. 

The  length  of  the  needle  varies  in  different  instruments,  from  four  to  six  or  even  seven 
inches,  those  of  five  and  a  half,  or  six  inches  long,  being  generally  preferred  by  sur¬ 
veyors. 

The  movement  of  the  needle  with  the  least  possible  friction,  is  secured  by  suspending 
it  by  a  steel  or  jewel  centre  upon  a  hardened  steel  pivot,  the  point  of  which  is  made 
perfectly  sharp  and  smooth. 

The  test  of  the  delicacy  of  a  magnetic  needle  is  the  number  of  horizontol  vibrations 
which  it  will  make  in  a  certain  arc  before  coming  to  rest — besides  this  most  surveyors 
prefer  also  to  see  a  sort  of  quivering  motion  in  a  vertical  direction. 

This  quality,  which  is  manifested  more  in  a  horizontal,  than  in  a  vertical  needle, 
and  depends  upon  the  near  coincidence  of  the  point  of  suspension  with  the  centre  of 
gravity  of  the  needle,  serves  to  show  merely  that  the  cap  below  is  unobstructed. 

Having  now  considered  the  different  qualities  of  a  good  needle,  we  shall  proceed  to 
speak  of  those  instruments  of  which  it  makes  so  important  a  part.  Of  these,  the  most 
simple  is  that  termed  the 


.TAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  119 


PLAIN  COMPASS. 

The  Plain  Compass  has  a  needle  six  inches  long,  a  graduated  circle,  main  plate, 
levels  and  sights,  and  is  placed  upon  the  brass  head  of  the  “  Jacob-Staff.” 

The  Compass  Circle  in  this,  as  in  all  our  instruments,  is  divided  to  half  degrees 
on  its  upper  surface,  the  whole  degree  marks  being  also  cut  down  on  the  inside  cir¬ 
cumference,  and  is  figured  from  0  to  90,  on  each  side  of  the  centre  or  “line  of  zeros.” 

The  circle  and  face  of  the  compass  are  silvered. 

The  Spirit  Levels  are  placed  at  right  angles  to  each  other  so  as  to  level  the  plate 
in  all  directions,  and  are  balanced  upon  a  pivot  underneath  the  middle  of  the  tube, 
so  as  to  be  adjustable  by  a  common  screw-driver. 

The  Sights,  or  standards,  have  fine  slits  cut  through  nearly  their  whole  length, 
terminated  at  intervals  by  large  circular  apertures,  through  which  the  object  sighted 
upon  is  more  readily  found.  Sometimes  a  fine  horse-hair  or  wire  is  substituted  for 
one  half  the  slit,  and  placed  alternately  with  it  on  opposite  sights. 

Tangent  Scale. — The  right  and  left  hand  edges  of  the  sights  of  our  compasses, 
have  respectively  an  eye-piece,  and  a  series  of  divisions,  by  which  angles  of  elevation 
and  depression,  for  a  range  of  about  twenty  degrees  each  way,  can  be  taken  with  con¬ 
siderable  accuracy. 

Such  an  arrangement  is  very  properly  termed  a  “  tangent  scale,”  the  divided  edges 
of  the  north  sight,  being  tangents  to  segments  of  circles  having  their  centres  at  the 
eye-pieces,  and  their  points  of  contact  with  the  tangent  lines  at  the  zero  divisions  of 
the  scale. 

The  Jacob-Staff  mountings  which  are  furnished  with  all  our  compasses,  and 
packed  in  the  same  case,  consist  of  the  brass  head  already  mentioned,  and  an  iron 
ferule  or  shoe,  pointed  with  steel,  so  as  to  be  set  firmly  in  the  ground. 

The  staff,  to  which  the  mountings  should  be  securely  fastened,  is  procured  from  any 
wheelwright,  or  selected  by  the  surveyor  himself  from  a  sapling  of  the  forest. 


TO  ADJUST  THE  COMPASS. 

The  Levels. — First  bring  the  bubbles  into  the  centre  by  the  pressure  of  the  hand 
on  different  parts  of  the  plate,  and  then  turn  the  compass  half  way  around ;  should 
the  bubhles  run  to  the  end  of  the  tubes,  it  would  indicate  that  those  ends  were  the 
highest;  lower  them  by  tightening  the  screws  immediately  under,  and  loosening  those 
under  the  lowest  ends  until,  by  estimation,  the  error  is  half  removed ;  level  the  plate 
again,  and  repeat  the  first  operation  until  the  bubbles  will  remain  in  the  centre, 
during  an  entire  revolution  of  the  compass. 

The  Sights  may  next  be  tested  by  observing  through  the  slits  a  fine  hair  or  thread, 
made  exactly  vertical  by  a  plumb.  Should  the  hair  appear  on  one  side  of  the  slit,  the 
sight  must  be  adjusted  by  filing  off  its  under  surface  on  that  side  which  seems  the 
highest. 

The  Needle  is  adjusted  in  the  following  manner :  Having  the  eye  nearly  in  the  same 
plane  with  the  graduated  rim  of  the  compass  circle,  with  a  small  splinter  of  wood  or 
a  slender  iron  wire,  bring  one  end  of  the  needle  in  line  with  any  prominent  division 
of  the  circle,  as  the  zero  or  90  degree  mark,  and  notice  if  the  other  end  corresponds 
with  the  degree  on  the  opposite  side;  if  it  does  the  needle  is  said  to  “cut”  opposite 
degrees  ;  if  not,  bend  the  centre-pin  by  applying  a  small  brass  wrench,  furnished  with 
our  compasses,  about  one-eighth  of  an  inch  below  the  point  of  the  pin,  until  the  ends 
of  the  needle  are  brought  into  line  writh  the  opposite  degrees. 

Then  holding  the  needle  in  the  same  position,  turn  the  compass  half  way  around, 
and  note  whether  it  now  cuts  opposite  degrees  ;  if  not,  correct  half  the  error  by 
bending  the  needle,  and  the  remainder  by  bending  the  centre-pin. 

The  operation  should  be  repeated  until  perfect  reversion  is  secured  in  the  first 
position 

This  being  obtained,  it  may  be  tried  on  another  quarter  of  the  circle ;  if  any  error 
is  there  manifested,  the  correction  must  be  made  in  the  centre-pin  only,  the  needle 
being  already  straightened  by  the  previous  operation. 

When  again  made  to  cut,  it  should  be  tried  on  the  other  quarters  of  the  circle,  and 
corrections  made  in  the  same  manner  until  tha  error  is  entirely  removed,  and  the 
needle  will  reverse  in  every  point  of  the  divided  surface. 


120  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


TO  USE  THE  COMPASS. 

In  using  the  compass  the  surveyor  should  keep  the  south  end  towards  his  person, 
and  read  the  b'earings  from  the  north  end  of  the  needle.  He  will  observe  that  the  E 
and  W  letters  on  (he  face  of  the  compass  are  reversed  from  their  natural  position,  in 
order  that  the  direction  of  the  line  of  sight  may  be  correctly  read. 

The  compass  circle  being  graduated  to  half  degrees,  a  little  practice  will  enable  the 
surveyor  to  read  the  bearings  to  quarters,  or  even  finer — estimating  with  his  eye  the 
space  bisected  by  the  point  of  the  needle,  and  as  this  is  as  low  as  the  traverse  table 
is  usually  calculated,  it  is  the  general  practice. 

Sometimes,  however,  a  small  vernier  is  placed  upon  the  south  end  of  the  needle,  and 
reads  the  circle  to  five  minutes  of  a  degree — the  circle  being  in  that  case  graduated 
to  whole  degrees. 

This  contrivance,  however,  is  quite  objectionable  on  account  of  the  additional 
weight  imposed  on  the  centre  pin,  and  the  difficulty  of  reading  a  vernier  which  is  in 
constant  vibration,  and  is  therefore  but  little  used. 

To  take  Angles  of  Elevation. — Having  first  leveled  the  compass,  bring  the  south 
end  towards  you,  and  place  the  eye  at  the  little  button,  or  eye  piece,  on  the  right  side 
of  the  south  sight,  and  with  the  hand  fix  a  card  on  the  front  surface  of  the  north 
sight,  so  that  its  top  edge  will  be  at  right  angles  to  the  divided  edge,  and  coincide 
with  the  zero  mark;  then  sighting  over  the  top  of  the  card,  note  upon  a  flagstaff  the 
height  cut  by  the  line  of  sight;  then  move  the  staff  up  the  elevation,  and  carry  the 
card  along  the  sight  until  the  line  of  sight  again  cuts  the  same  height  on  the  staff, 
read  off  the  degrees  and  half  degrees  passed  over  by  the  card,  and  we  shall  have  the 
angle  required. 

For  Angles  of  Depression. — Proceed  in  the  same  manner,  using  the  eye-piece  and 
divisions  on  the  opposite  sides  of  the  sights,  and  reading  from  the  top  of  the  standards. 

Jacob-Staff  Socket. — The  compass  is  furnished  with  a  ball  spindle,  or  socket, 
upon  which  it  turns,  and  by  which  it  is  leveled.  The  ball  may  be  placed  in  a  single 
or  “jacob-staff”  socket,  as  represented  in  the  figure,  or  in  a  compass  tripod,  such  as 
is  shown  in  the  cut  of  the  Vernier  Transit  beyond. 

Clamp  Screw.— In  the  side  of  the  hollow  cylinder,  or  socket  of  the  compass,  which 
fits  to  the  ball  spindle,  is  a  screw  by  which  the  instrument  may  be  clamped  to  the 
spindle  in  any  position. 

Spring  Catch. — Besides  the  clamp  screw,  we  have  recently  fitted  to  the  sockets  of 
our  compasses  a  little  spring  catch,  which,  as  soon  as  the  instrument  is  set  upon  the 
spindle,  slips  into  a  groove,  and  thus  removes  all  danger  of  falling  when  the  instru¬ 
ment  is  carried. 

Needle  Lifter. — There  is  also  underneath  the  main  plate,  a  needle  lifting  screw, 
which,  by  moving  a  concealed  spring,  raises  the  needle  from  the  pivot,  and  thus  pre¬ 
vents  the  blunting  of  the  point  in  transportation. 

When  the  compass  is  not  in  use  it  is  the  practice  of  many  surveyors  to  let  down  the 
needle  upon  the  point  of  the  centre-pin,  and  let  it  assume  its  position  in  the  magnetic 
meridian,  so  as  to  retain  or  even  increase  its  polarity. 

We  would  advise  in  addition,  that  after  the  needle  has  settled  it  should  be  raised 
against  the  glass,  in  order  not  to  dull  the  point  of  suspension. 

Outkeeper. — A  small  dial  plate,  having  an  index  turned  by  a  milled  head  under¬ 
neath,  is  often  used  with  this  and  the  other  compasses  to  keep  tally  in  chaining. 

The  dial  is  figured  from  0  to  16,  the  index  being  moved  one  notch  for  every  chain  run. 

Electricity. — A  little  caution  is  necessary  in  handling  the  compass,  that  the  glass 
covering  be  not  excited  by  the  friction  of  cloth,  silk,  or  the  hand,  so  as  to  attract  the 
needle  to  its  under  surface. 

A  brass  cover  is  sometimes  fitted  over  the  glass  of  the  compass,  and  serves  to  pro¬ 
tect  it  from  accident,  as  well  as  to  prevent  electric  disturbance. 

When,  however,  the  glass  becomes  electric,  the  fluid  may  be  removed  by  breathing 
upon  it,  or  touching  different  parts  of  its  surface  with  the  moistened  finger. 

An  ignorance  of  this  apparently  trifling  matter  has  caused  many  errors  and  per¬ 
plexities  in  the  practice  of  the  inexperienced  surveyor. 

REPAIRS  OF  THE  COMPASS. 

To  enable  the  surveyor  to  make  such  repairs  as  are  possible  without  having  recourse 
to  an  instrument  maker,  we  here  add  a  few  simple  directions. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  121 


1.  The  Needle. — It  may  sometimes  happen  that  the  needle  has  lost  its  polarity, 
and  needs  to  be  re-magnetized ;  this  is  effected  in  the  following  manner : 

The  operator  being  provided  with  an  ordinary  permanent  magnet.*  and  holding  it 
before  him,  should  pass  with  a  gentle  pressure  each  end  of  the  needle  from  centre  to 
extremity  over  the  magnetic  pole,  describing  before  each  pass  a  circle  of  about  six 
inches  radius,  to  which  the  surface  of  the  pole  is  tangent,  drawing  the  needle  towards 
him,  and  taking  care  that  the  north  and  the  south  ends  are  applied  to  the  opposite 
poles  of  the  magnet. 

Should  the  needle  be  returned  in  a  path  near  the  magnetic  pole,  the  current  induced 
by  the  contact  of  the  needle  and  magnet  in  the  pass  just  described,  would  be  reversed, 
and  thus  the  magnetic  virtue  almost  entirely  neutralized  at  each  operation. 

When  the  needle  has  been  passed  about  twenty-five  times  in  succession,  in  the 
manner  just  described,  it  may  be  considered  as  fully  charged. 

A  fine  brass  wire  is  wound  in  two  or  three  coils  on  the  south  end  of  the  needle,  and 
may  be  moved  back  or  forth  in  order  to  counterpoise  the  varying  weight  of  the  north 
end. 

2.  The  Centre  Pin. — This  should  occasionally  be  examined,  and  if  much  dulled, 
taken  out  with  the  brass  wrench  already  spoken  of,  or  with  a  pair  of  plyers,  and 
sharpened  on  a  hard  oil  stone — the  operator  placing  it  in  the  end  of  a  small  stem  of 
wood,  or  a  pin  vice,  and  delicately  twirling  it  with  the  fingers  as  he  moves  it  back  and 
forth  at  an  angle  of  about  30  deg.  to  the  surface  of  the  stone. 

When  the  point  is  thus  made  so  fine  and  sharp  as  to  be  invisible  to  the  eye,  it 
should  be  smoothed  by  rubbing  it  on  the  surface  of  a  soft  and  clean  piece  of  leather. 

3.  To  put  in  a  New  Glass. — Unscrew  the  “  bezzle  ring”  which  holds  it,  and  with 
the  point  of  a  knife  blade  spring  out  the  little  brass  ring  above  the  glass,  remove  the 
old  glass  and  scrape  out  the  putty ;  then  if  the  new  glass  does  not  fit,  smooth  off  its 
edges  by  holding  it  obliquely  on  the  surface  of  a  grind  stone  until  it  will  enter  the 
ring  easily  ;  then  put  in  new  putty,  spring  in  the  brass  ring,  and  the  operation  will 
be  complete. 

4.  To  replace  a  Spirit  Level. — Take  out  the  screws  which  hold  it  on  the  plate, 
pull  off  the  brass  ends  of  the  tube,  and  with  a  knife  blade  scrape  out  the  plaster  from 
the  tube ;  then  with  a  stick  made  a  little  smaller  than  the  diameter  of  the  tube,  and 
with  its  end  hollowed  out,  so  that  it  will  bear  only  on  the  broad  surface  of  the  level 
vial,  push  out  the  old  vial  and  replace  it  with  a  new  one,  taking  care  that  the  crown¬ 
ing  side,  which  is  usually  marked  with  a  file  on  the  end  of  the  vial,  is  placed  on  the 
upper  side. 

When  the  vial  does  not  fit  the  tube  it  must  be  wedged  up  by  putting  under  little 
slips  of  paper  until  it  moves  in  snugly. 

After  the  vial  is  in  its  place,  put  around  its  ends  a  little  boiled  plaster,  mixed  with 
water  to  the  consistency  of  putty,  taking  care  not  to  allow  any  to  cover  the  little  tip 
of  the  glass,  then  slip  in  the  brass  ends  and  the  operation  will  be  completed. 

A  little  beeswax,  melted  and  dropped  upon  the  ends  of  the  vial,  is  equally  as  good 
as  the  boiled  plaster,  and  often  more  easily  obtained. 

We  would  here  remark  that  an  extra  glass  and  level  vials  are  always  furnished, 
free  of  charge,  with  our  instruments,  whenever  desired  by  the  purchaser. 

SIZES  OF  THE  PLAIN  COMPASS. 

Three  different  sizes  of  this  instrument  are  in  common  use,  having  respectively 
four,  five  and  six-inch  needles,  and  differing  also  in  the  length  of  the  main  plate, 
winch  in  the  four  inch  compass  is  twelve  and  a  half  inches  long,  and  in  the  larger 
sizes,  fifteen  and  a  half  inches. 

The  six-inch  needle  compass  is  generally  preferred. 

WEIGHT  OF  THE  PLAIN  COMPASSES. 

The  average  weights  of  the  different  sizes,  with  the  brass  mountings  of  the  jacob- 
staff,  are  • 

For  the  4-inch  needle,  6  lbs. 

For  the  5-inch  needle,  1 J  lbs. 

For  the  6-inch  needle,  lbs. 


*A  magnet  suitable  for  this  purpose  costs  from  25  to  50  cents. 


122  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


The  plain  compass,  which  was  the  only  one  in  use  in  this  country  previous  to  the 
time  of  David  Rittenhouse,  has  gradually  given  way  to  the  superior  advantages  of 
the  Vernier  or  Rittenhouse  compass,  which  we  shall  now  proceed  to  describe. 

THE  VERNIER  COMPASS. 

The  Vernier  Compass,  represented  in  No.  969,  differs  from  the  instrument  just  de¬ 
scribed,  in  having  its  compass  circle,  with  a  vernier  attached,  movable  about  a 
common  centre  by  turning  the  “tangent  screw,”  seen  at  the  south  end  of  the  plate. 

Sometimes  a  rack  and  pinion  movement  is  substituted  for  the  tangent  screw,  and 
is  desirable  where  frequent  changes  of  the  vernier  are  required.  It  makes  no  differ¬ 
ence  in  the  price  of  the  compass. 

The  superiority  of  the  vernier  over  the  plain  compass  consists  in  its  adaptation  to 
the  retracing  the  lines  of  an  old  survey,  and  to  the  surveys  of  the  U.  S.  public  lands, 
where  the  lines  are  based  on  a  true  meridian. 

VARIATION  OF  THE  NEEDLE. 

It  is  well  known  that  the  magnetic  needle,  in  almost  all  parts  of  the  United  States, 
points  more  or  less  to  the  east  or  west  of  a  true  meridian,  or  north  and  south  line. 

This  deviation,  which  is  called  the  variation  or  declination  of  the  needle,  is  not 
constant,  but  increases  or  decreases  to  a  very  sensible  amount  in  a  series  of  years. 

Thus  at  Troy,  N.  Y.,  a  line  bearing  in  1830,  N.  31°  E.,  would  now,  1862,  with  the 
same  needle,  have  a  bearing  of  about  N.  32°  E.,  the  needle  having  thus  in  that  inter¬ 
val  travelled  a  full  degree  to  the  west. 

For  this  reason,  therefore,  in  running  over  the  lines  of  a  farm  from  field  notes  of 
some  years  standing,  the  surveyor  would  be  obliged  to  make  an  allowance,  both  per¬ 
plexing  and  uncertain,  in  the  bearing  of  every  line. 

To  avoid  this  difficulty  the  vernier  was  devised,  the  arrangement  of  which  we  shall 
now  describe. 

The  Vernier  is  divided  on  its  edge  to  thirty  equal  parts,  and  figured  in  two  series 
on  each  side  of  the  centre  line. 

In  the  same  plane  with  the  vernier  is  an  arc  or  limb,  fixed  to  the  main  plate  of  the 
compass,  and  graduated  to  half  degrees. 

.  The  surfaces  of  both  vernier  and  limb  are  silvered. 

On  the  vernier  are  thirty  equal  divisions,  which  exactly  correspond  in  length  with 
thirty-one  of  the  half  degrees  of  the  limb. 

Each  division  of  the  vernier  is,  therefore,  one-thirtieth  or  in  other  words,  one 
minute  longer  than  a  single  division  of  the  limb. 

To  Read  the  Vernier. — In  “reading”  the  vernier,  if  it  is  moved  to  the  right, 
count  the  minutes  from  its  zero  point  to  the  left,  and  vice  versa.  Proceed  thus  until 
a  division  on  the  vernier  is  found  exactly  in  line  with  another  on  the  limb,  and  the 
lower  row  of  figures  on  the  vernier  will  give  the  number  of  minutes  passed  over. 
When  the  vernier  is  moved  more  than  fifteen  minutes  to  either  side  the  number  of  the 
additional  minutes  up  to  thirty  or  one- half  degree  of  the  limb  is  given  by  the  upper 
row  of  figures  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  vernier. 

To  read  beyond  thirty,  add  the  minutes  given  by  the  vernier  to  that  number,  and 
the  sum  will  be  the  correct  reading. 

In  all  cases  when  the  zero  point  of  the  vernier  passes  a  whole  degree  of  a  limb, 
this  must  be  added  to  the  minutes,  in  order  to  define  the  distance  over  which  the 
vernier  has  been  moved. 

To  Turn  Off  the  Variation. — It  will  now  be  seen  that  the  surveyor  having  the 
vernier  compass,  can  by  moving  the  vernier  to  either  side,  and  with  it  of  course  the 
compass  circle  attached,  set  the  compass  to  any  variation. 

He  therefore  places  his  instrument  on  some  well  defined  line  of  the  old  survey,  and 
turns  the  tangent  screw  until  the  needle  of  his  compass  indicates  the  same  bearing  as 
that  given  in  the  old  field  notes  of  the  original  survey. 

Then  screwing  up  the  clamping  nut  underneath  the  vernier,  he  can  run  all  the  other 
lines  from  the  old  field  notes  without  further  alteration. 

The  reading  of  the  vernier  on  the  limb  in  such  a  case  would  give  the  change  of 
variation  at  the  two  different  periods. 

The  variation  of  the  needle  at  any  place  being  known,  a  true  meridian,  or  north 
and  south  line,  may  be  run  by  moving  the  vernier  to  either  side,  as  the  variation  is 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  123 


east  or  west,  until  the  arc  passed  over  on  the  limb  is  equal  to  the  angle  of  variation  ; 
and  then  turning  the  compass  until  the  needle  is  made  to  cut  the  zeros  on  the  divided 
circle,  when  the  line  of  the  sights  would  give  the  direction  of  the  true  meridian  of 
the  place. 

Such  a  change  in  the  position  of  the  vernier  is  necessary  in  surveying  the  U.  S 
public  lands,  which  are  always  run  from  the  true  meridian. 

“The  line  of  no  variation,”  as  it  is  called,  or  that  upon  which  the  needle  will 
indicate  a  true  north  and  south  direction,  is  situated  in  the  United  States,  nearly  in 
an  imaginary  line  drawn  from  the  middle  of  Lake  Erie  to  Cape  Hatteras,  on  the  coast 
of  North  Carolina. 

A  compass  needle,  therefore,  placed  east  of  this  line  would  have  a  variation  to  the 
west,  and  when  placed  west  of  the  line,  the  variation  would  be  to  the  east,  and  in 
both  cases  the  variation  would  increase  as  the  needle  was  carried  farther  from  the 
line  of  no  variation. 

Thus  in  Minnesota  the  variation  is  from  15°  to  16°  to  the  east,  while  in  Maine  it  is 
from  17°  to  18°  to  the  west. 

At  Troy,  in  the  present  year,  1862,  the  variation  is  about  8°  to  the  west,  and  is  in¬ 
creasing  in  the  same  direction  from  two  to  three  minutes  annually. 

To  Read  to  Minutes. — A  less  important  use  of  the  vernier  is  to  give  a  reading  of 
the  needle  to  single  minutes,  which  is  obtained  as  follows : 

First  be  sure,  as  in  all  observations,  that  the  zero  of  the  vernier  exactly  corresponds 
with  that  of  the  limb  ;  then  noting  the  number  of  whole  degrees  given  by  the  needle, 
move  back  the  compass  circle  with  the  tangent  screw  until  the  nearest  whole  degree 
mark  is  made  to  coincide  with  the  point  of  the  needle,  read  the  vernier  as  before  de¬ 
scribed,  and  this  reading  added  to  the  whole  degrees  will  give  the  bearing  to  min¬ 
utes.* 


TO  USE  THE  VERNIER  COMPASS. 

Proceed  in  the  same  manner  as  directed  in  regard  to  the  Plain  Compass,  when 
making  new  surveys,  always  taking  care  that  the  vernier  is  set  at  zero  and  securely 
clamped  by  screwing  up  the  nut  beneath  the  plate. 

In  surveying  old  farms,  allowance  and  correction  must  be  made  for  the  variation, 
as  just  described. 


WEIGHT  OF  THE  VERNIER  COMPASS. 

The  average  weight  of  this  instrument,  with  the  jacob-staff  mountings,  is  about 
9J  pounds. 

The  adjustments  of  the  Vernier  Compass  are  mainly  those  of  the  instrument  first 
described,  and  need  not  here  be  repeated. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

SURVEYING  INSTRUMENTS. 

THE  VERNIER  TRANSIT. 


The  Vernier  Transit,  or  Transit  Compass,  has  the  same  general  qualities  as  the 
Vernier  Compass,  but  is  furnished  with  a  telescope  in  place  of  the  ordinary  sight3. 

The  telescope  is  from  ten  to  twelve  inches  long,  and  sufficiently  powerful  to  see 
and  set  a  flag  at  a  distance  of  two  miles  in  a  clear  day. 

The  cross-bar  in  which  it  is  fixed,  turns  readily  in  the  standards,  so  that  the 


124  JAMES  AV.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK 


telescope  can  be  turned  in  either  direction,  and  back  and  fore  sights  be  taken  without 
removing  the  instrument. 

Like  all  telescopes  used  by  us  in  our  instruments,  it  shows 
objects  in  an  erect  position. 

The  Telescope. — The  interior  construction  of  the  telescope  of 
the  Vernier  Transit,  which  is  very  similar  to  those  of  the  other 
instruments  we  shall  describe,  is  well  shown  in  the  longitudinal 
section  represented  in  lig.  A. 

As  here  seen,  the  telescope  consists  essentially  of  an  object- 
glass,  an  eye-piece  tube,  and  a  cross-wire  ring  or  diaphragm. 

The  object-glass  is  composed  of  two  lenses,  one  of  flint,  the 
other  of  crown  glass,  which  are  so  made  and  disposed  as  to 
show  the  object  seen  through  it  without  color  or  distortion. 

The  object-glass  and  the  whole  telescope  is  therefore  said  to 
be  “  achromatic.” 

The  eye-piece  is  made  up  of  four  plano-convex  lenses,  which, 
beginning  at  the  eye  end,  and  proceeding  on,  are  called  respec¬ 
tively,  the  eye,  the  field,  the  amplifying,  and  the  object  lenses. 

Together,  they  form  a  compound  microscope,  magnifying  the 
minute  image  of  any  object  formed  at  the  cross-wires  by  the  in¬ 
terposition  of  the  object-glass. 

The  Cross  Wires. — The  cross-wire  diaphragm,  two  views  of 
which  are  here  exhibited,  is  a  small  ring  of  brass,  suspended  in 
the  tube  of  the  telescope  by  four  capstan  head  screws,  which 
press  upon  the  washers  shown  on  the  outside  of  the  tube. 

The  ring  can  thus  be  moved  in  either  direction  by  working 
the  screws  with  an  ordinary  adjusting  pin. 

Across  the  flat  surface  of  the  ring  two  fine  fibres  of  spider’s 
web  are  extended  at  right  angles  to  each  other,  their  ends  being 
cemented  with  beeswax  or  varnish,  into  fine  lines  cut  in  the  metal 
of  the  ring. 

The  intersection  of  the  wires  forms  a  very  minute  point,  which, 
when  they  are  adjusted,  determines  the  optical  axis  of  the  tele¬ 
scope,  and  enables  the  surveyor  to  fix  it  upon  an  object  with  the 
greatest  precision. 

The  imaginary  line  passing  through  the  optical  axis  of  the 
telescope,  is  termed  the  “  the  line  of  collimation,”  and  the  ope¬ 
ration  of  bringing  the  intersection  of  the  wires  into  the  optical 
axis,  is  called  the  “  adjustment  of  the  line  of  collimation.”  This 
will  be  hereafter  described. 

The  openings  in  the  telescope  tube  are  made  considerably  larger 
than  the  screws,  so  that  when  these  are  loosened,  the  whole  ring 
can  be  turned  around  for  a  short  distance  in  either  direction. 


Fig.  B. 


The  object  of  this  will  be  seen  more  plainly,  when  we  describe  the  means  by  which 
the  wire  is  made  truly  vertical. 

The  sectional  view  of  the  telescope  (fig.  A)  also  shows  two  movable  rings,  one 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  125 

placed  at  A  A,  the  other  at  C  C,  which  are  respectively  used,  to  effect  the  centering 
of  the  eye-piece  and  the  adjustment  of  the  object-glass  slide. 

The  centering  of  the  eye-tube  is  performed  after  the  wires  have  been  adjusted,  and 
is  effected  by  moving  the  ring,  by  means  of  the  screws,  shown  on  the  outside  of  the 
tube,  until  the  intersection  of  the  wires  is  brought  into  the  centre  of  the  field  of  view. 

The  adjustment  of  the  object  slide,  which  will  be  fully  described  in  our  account  of 
the  Leveling  Instrument,  secures  the  movement  of  the  object-glass  in  a  straight  line, 
and  thus  keeps  the  line  of  collimation  in  adjustment  through  the  whole  range  of  the 
slide,  preventing  at  the  same  time  what  is  termed  the  “  traveling”  of  the  wires. 

This  adjustment,  which  is  peculiar  to  our  telescopes,  is  always  made  in  the  process 
of  construction,  and  needing  no  further  attention  at  the  hands  of  the  engineer,  is  con¬ 
cealed  within  the  hollow  ball  of  the  telescope  axis. 


OPTICAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  TELESCOPE. 


In  order  that  the  advantages  gained  by  the  use  of  the  telescope  may  be  more  fully 
understood,  we  shall  here  venture  briefly  to  consider  the  optical  principles  involved 
in  its  construction. 

We  are  said  to  “see”  objects  because  the 
rays  of  light  which  proceed  from  all  their 
parts,  after  passing  through  the  pupil  of  the 
eye,  are  by  the  crystalline  lens  and  vitreous 
humor,  converged  to  a  focus  on  the  retina, 
where  they  form  a  very  minute  inverted 
image ;  an  impression  of  which  is  conveyed 
to  the  brain  by  the  optic  nerve. 

The  rays  proceeding  from  the  extremities 
of  an  object,  and  crossing  at  the  optic  centre 
of  the  eye,  form  the  “  visual  angle,”  or  that 
under  which  the  object  is  seen. 

The  apparent  magnitude  of  objects  depends  on  the  size  of  the  visual  angle  which 
they  subtend,  and  this  being  great  or  small,  as  the  object  is  near  or  distant — the 
objects  will  appear  large  or  small,  in  an  inverse  proportion  to  the  distances  which 
separate  them  from  the  observer. 

Thus,  (in  fig.  C,)  if  the  distance  0  A  is  one-half  of  0  B,  the  visual  angle,  subtended 
by  the  object  at  the  point  A,  and  therefore  the  apparent  magnitude  of  the  object,  will 
he  twice  that  observed  at  B.  If,  therefore,  the  visual  angle  subtended  by  any  object, 
can  be  made  by  any  means  twice  as  large,  the  same  effect  will  be  produced  as  if  the 
observer  were  moved  up  over  one-half  the  intervening  distance. 

Now  this  is  the  principal  advantage  gained  in  the  use  of  a  telescope. 

The  object-glass  receiving  the  rays  of  light  which  proceed  from  all  the  points  of  a 
Visible  object,  converges  them  to  a  focus  at  the  cross-wires,  and  there  forms  a  minute, 
inverted,  and  very  bright  image,  which  may  be  seen  by  placing  a  piece  of  ground 
glass  to  receive  it  at  that  point. 

The  eye-piece  acting  as  a  compound  microscope,  magnifies  this  image,  restores  it 
to  its  natural  position,  and  conveys  it  to  the  eye. 

The  visual  angle  which  the  image  there  subtends,  is  as  many  times  greater  than 
that  which  would  be  formed  without  the  use  of  the  telescope,  as  the  number  which 
expresses  its  magnifying  power. 

Thus,  a  telescope  which  magnifies  twenty  times,  increases  the  visual  angle  just  as 
much,  and  therefore  diminishes  the  apparent  distance  of  the  object  twenty  times — -or 
in  other  words,  it  will  show  an  object  two  hundred  feet  distant,  with  the  same  dis¬ 
tinctness  as  if  it  was  distant  only  ten  feet  from  the  naked  eye. 

The  accompanying  cut,  (fig.  D)  which  we  are  kindly  permitted  to  copy  from  an 
excellent  treatise  on  surveying,  by  Prof.  Gillespie  of  Union  College,  will  give  a  correct 
idea  of  the  manner  in  which  the  rays  of  light  coming  from  an  object  are  affected,  by 
passing  through  the  several  glasses  of  a  telescope. 

We  shall  only  consider  the  rays  which  proceed  from  the  extremities;  these,  after 
passing  through  the  object-glass,  here  shown  as  a  single  lens,  are  conveyed  to  the 
point  B,  the  centre  of  the  cross-wires  and  the  common  focus  of  the  object  and  eye¬ 
glasses.  At  this  place  the  rays  cross  each  other  and  the  image  is  inverted. 

The  rays  next  come  to  the  object  lens  C,  and  passing  through  it  are  refracted  so  as 
again  to  cross  each  other,  and  come  thus  to  the  amplifying  lens  D.  By  this  they  are 


126  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


again  refracted,  made  more  nearly  parallel,  and  thus  reach  the  large  field  lens  E. 
After  passing  through  this,  they  form  a  magnified  and  erect  image  in  the  focus  of  the 
eye  lens  G.  By  the  eye  lens  the  image  is  still  further  magnified,  and  at  last  enters 
the  eye  of  the  observer,  subtending  an  angle  as  much  greater  than  that  at 
the  point  0,  as  is  the  magnifying  power  of  the  telescope. 

In  place  of  the  eye-piece  of  four  lenses,  which  we  have  just  been  con¬ 
sidering,  and  which  is  exclusively  used  in  all  American  instruments  made 
at  the  present  day ;  another,  which  has  but  three  lenses,  is  often  seen  in 
the  telescopes  of  imported  instruments. 

This  latter,  which  inverts  the  object,  though  saving  a  little  more  light 
than  the  former,  is  exceedingly  troublesome  to  the  inexperienced  observer, 
and  has  never  been  popular  in  American  engineering. 

TO  ASCERTAIN  THE  MAGNIFYING  POWER  OF  A  TELESCOPE. 


Set  up  the  instrument  about  twenty  or  thirty  feet  from  the  side  of  a 
white  wooden  house,  and  observe  through  the  telescope  the  space  covered 
by  one  of  the  boards  in  the  field  of  the  glass ;  then  still  keeping  that  eye 
on  the  telescope,  hold  open  the  other  with  the  finger,  if  necessary,  and 
look  wdth  it  at  the  same  object.  By  steady  and  careful  observation  there 
will  appear  on  the  surface  of  the  magnified  board,  a  number  of  smaller  ones 
seen  by  the  naked  eye.  count  these,  and  we  shall  obtain  the  magnifying 
power. 

If  the  limits  of  the  magnified  board,  as  seen  through  the  telescope,  can 
be  noted  so  as  to  be  remembered  after  the  eye  is  removed,  the  number  of 
boards  contained  in  this  space  may  then  be  easily  counted. 

The  side  of  an  unpainted  brick  wall,  or  any  other  surface  containing  a 
number  of  small,  well  marked  and  equal  objects,  may  be  observed,  in 
place  of  the  surface  we  have  described. 

The  operation  described  requires  great  care  and  close  observation,  but 
may  be  performed  with  facility  after  a  little  practice. 

We  have  spoke  of  the  effect  of  the  telescope  in  magnifying  objects,  but 
have  not  mentioned  what  is  termed  its  “  illuminating  power.” 

This  arises  from  the  great  diameter  or  aperture  of  the  object-glass  com¬ 
pared  with  that  of  the  pupil  of  the  eye,  which  enables  the  observer  to  in¬ 
tercept  many  more  rays  of  light,  and  bring  the  object  to  the  eye  highly 
illuminated. 

The  advantage  gained  in  this  increase  of  light,  depends,  as- is  evident, 
on  the  size  of  the  object-glass,  and  the  perfection  with  which  the  lenses 
transmit  the  light  without  absorbing  or  reflecting  it. 

The  superficial  magnifying  power  of  a  telescope,  is  found  by  squaring 
the  number  which  expresses  its  linear  magnifying  power;  thus  a  telescope 
which  magnifies  twenty  times,  increases  the  surface  of  an  object  four  hun¬ 
dred  times. 

Before  an  observation  is  made  with  the  telescope,  the  eye-piece  should- 
be  moved  in  or  out,  until  the  wires^  appear  distinct  to  the  eye  of  the  ope¬ 
rator;  the  object-glass  is  then  adjusted  by  turning  the  pinion  head  until 
the  object  is  seen  clear  and  well  defined,  and  the  wires  appear  as  if  fastened 
to  its  surface. 

The  intersection  of  the  wires,  being  the  means  by  which  the  optical 
axis  of  the  telescope  is  defined,  should  be  brought  precisely  upon  the 
centre  of  the  object  to  which  the  instrument  is  directed. 

Having  thus  briefly  considered  the  principles,  we  shall  now  proceed  to 
describe  the 

ATTACHMENTS  OF  THE  TELESCOPE. 


A  telescope  is  said  to  be  “  plain”  when  it  is  without  any  appendages  to 
Fig.  D.  its  tube  or  axis,  as  that  of  the  Engineer’s  Transit  shown  in  the  engraving, 
and  most  instruments  are  made  in  that  manner. 

Many  surveyors,  however,  prefer  to  add  these  conveniences,  and  we  shall  now  con¬ 
sider  them  in  detail. 

Clamp  and  Tangent. — This  consists  essentially  of  a  ring  encircling  the  axis  of  the 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  127 


telescope,  and  having  two  projecting  arms,  the  one  above  being  slit  through  the  mid¬ 
dle  and  holding  the  clamp  screw,  the  other  much  longer  and  below  is  connected  with 
the  tangent  screw. 

As  soon  as  the  clamp  screw  is  tightened,  the  ring  is  brought  firmly  around  the 
axis,  and  the  telescope  can  then  be  moved  up  or  down  by  turning  the  tangent  screw. 

The  clamp  and  tangent  ought  always  to  accompany  the  vertical  circle,  and  the 
level  on  the  telescope. 

Vertical  Circle. — A  divided  circle  as  seen  in  the  cut  of  the  Vernier  Transit,  is 
often  attached  to  the  axis  of  the  telescope,  giving,  with  a  vernier,  the  means  of 
measuring  vertical  angles  with  great  facility. 

We  make  two  sizes  of  these  circles,  one  of  about  3£  inches  diameter,  seen  with  this 
instrument,  the  other  an  inch  larger,  and  shown  in  the  cut  of  the  Surveyor’s  Transit. 
The  former  is  graduated  to  single  degrees,  and  reads  by  the  vernier,  to  five  minutes 
of  a  degree.  The  latter,  divided  to  half  degrees,  gives  a  reading,  with  the  vernier,  to 
single  minutes. 

The  vertical  circle  is  fitted  firmly  to  the  telescope  axis,  and  fastened  with  a  screw, 
so  that  it  remains  permanent. 

The  vernier,  however,  may  be  shifted  in  either  direction,  by  loosening  the  screws 
which  confine  it  to  the  standards. 

The  vernier  of  the  small  circle  is  divided  into  twelve  equal  parts,  which  correspond 
with  thirteen  degrees  on  the  circle. 

Each  division  of  the  vernier  is,  therefore,  one-twelfth  of  one  degree,  or  five  min¬ 
utes  longer  than  a  single  division  of  the  circle,  so  that  the  angles  are  read  to  five 
minutes  of  a  degree. 

The  vernier  is  double,  having  its  zero  point  in  the  middle,  and  the  reading  up  to 
thirty  minutes,  is  said  to  be  direct ;  that  is,  if  the  circle  is  moved  to  the  right,  the 
minutes  are  read  off  on  the  right  side  of  the  vernier,  and  vice  versa. 

The  minutes  beyond  thirty  are  obtained  on  the  opposite  side,  and  in  the  lower  row 
of  figures. 

By  following  these  directions,  and  noticing  the  first  divisions  on  the  circle  and 
vernier,  which  exactly  correspond,  the  surveyor  can  obtain  a  reading  to  five  minutes 
with  great  facility. 

Level  on  Telescope. — Besides  the  vertical  circle,  there  is  sometimes  a  small  level 
attached  to  the  telescope  of  this  and  other  instruments,  which  we  shall  hereafter  de¬ 
scribe. 

Such  an  attachment  is  shown  in  the  cut  of  the  Surveyor’s  Transit,  and  its  adjust¬ 
ment  and  advantages  will  be  explained  in  our  account  of  that  instrument. 

Sights  on  Telescope. — We  are  sometimes  desired  by  surveyors  to  place  a  pair  of 
short  sights  on  the  upper  side  of  the  telescope  tube. 

They  are  best  made  to  fold  close  to  the  tube  when  not  in  use,  like  those  of  the 
pocket  compass,  described  hereafter. 

These  sights  are  useful  in  taking  back  sights  without  turning  the  telescope,  and  in 
sighting  through  bushes  or  in  the  forest,  and  as  the  telescope  can  be  turned  up  or 
down,  answer  all  the  purposes  of  the  longer  sights  of  the  ordinary  compass. 

Sights  for  Right  Angles. — Besides  the  sights  just  mentioned,  we  have  often  at¬ 
tached  others  to  the  plate  of  the  instrument,  on  either  side  of  the  compass  circle  or 
on  the  standards. 

These  being  adjusted  to  the  telescope  give  a  very  ready  means  of  laying  off  right 
angles,  or  running  out  offsets,  without  changing  the  position  of  the  instrument. 

TO  ADJUST  THE  VERNIER  TRANSIT. 

The  Levels  of  this  instrument  have  a  capstan  head  screw  at  each  end,  and  are  ad¬ 
justed  with  a  steel  pin  in  the  same  manner  as  those  of  the  Plain  compass. 

The  Needle  is  also  adjusted  as  described  in  our  account  of  that  instrument. 

Line  of  Collimation. — To  make  this  adjustment,  which  is,  in  other  words,  to  bring 
the  intersection  of  the  wires  into  the  optical  axis  of  the  telescope,  so  that  the  instru¬ 
ment,  when  placed  in  the  middle  of  a  straight  line  will,  by  the  revolution  of  the  tele¬ 
scope,  cut  its  extremities — proceed  as  follows  : 

Set  the  instrument  firmly  on  the  ground  and  level  it  carefully ;  and  then  having 
brought  the  wires  into  the  focus  of  the  eye-piece,  adjust  the  object-glass  on  some  well 
defined  point,  as  the  edge  of  a  chimney  or  other  object,  at  a  distance  of  from  two  to 
five  hundred  feet ;  determine  if  the  vertical  wire  is  plumb,  by  clamping  the  instrument 


128  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK 


firmly  to  the  spindle  and  applying  the  wire  to  the  vertical  edge  of  a  building,  or  ob¬ 
serving  if  it  will  move  parallel  to  a  point  taken  a  little  to  one  side  ;  should  any  devi¬ 
ation  be  manifested,  loosen  the  cross-wire  screws,  and  by  the  pressure  of  the  hand 
on  the  head  outside  the  tube,  move  the  ring  around  until  the  error  is  corrected. 

The  wires  being  thus  made  respectively  horizontal  and  vertical,  fix  their  point  of 
intersection  on  the  object  selected;  clamp  the  instrument  to  the  spindle,  and  having 
revolved  the  telescope,  find  or  place  some  good  object  in  the  opposite  direction,  and 
at  about  the  same  distance  from  the  instrument  as  the  first  object  assumed. 

Great  care  should  always  be  taken  in  turning  the  telescope,  that  the  position  of  the 
instrument  upon  the  spindle  is  not  in  the  slightest  degree  disturbed. 

Now,  having  found  or  placed  an  object  which  the  vertical  wire  bisects,  unclamp  the 
instrument,  turn  it  half  way  around,  and  direct  the  telescope  to  the  first  object 
selected  ;  having  bisected  this  with  the  wires,  again  clamp  the  instrument,  revolve 
the  telescope,  and  note  if  the  vertical  wire  bisects  the  second  object  observed. 

Should  this  happen,  it  will  indicate  that  the  wires  are  in  adjustment,  and  the  points 
bisected  are  with  the  centre  of  the  instrument,  in  the  same  straight  line. 

If  not,  however,  the  space  which  separates  the  wires  from  the  second  point  observed, 
will  be  double  the  deviation  of  that  point  from  a  true  straight  line,  which  may  be 
conceived  as  drawn  through  the  first  point  and  the  centre  of  the  instrument,  since  the 
error  is  the  result  of  two  observations,  made  with  the  wires  when  they  are  out  of  the 
optical  axis  of  the  telescope. 


For  as  in  the  diagram,  let  A  represent  the  centre  of  the  instrument,  and  B  C  the 
imaginary  straight  line,  upon  the  extremities  of  which  the  line  of  collimation  is  to  be 
adjusted. 

B  represents  the  object  first  selected,  and  D  the  point  which  the  wire  bisected,  when 
the  telescope  was  made  to  revolve. 

When  the  instrument  is  turned  half  around,  and  the  telescope  again  directed  to  B, 
and  once  more  revolved,  the  wires  will  bisect  an  object,  E,  situated  as  far  to  one  side 
of  the  true  line  as  the  point  D  is  on  the  other  side. 

The  space,  D  E,  is  therefore  the  sum  of  two  deviations  of  the  wires  from  a  true 
straight  line,  and  the  error  is  made  very  apparent. 

In  order  to  correct  it,  use  the  two  capstan  head  screws  on  the  sides  of  the  telescope, 
these  being  the  ones  which  affect  the  position  of  the  vertical  wire. 

Remember  that  the  eye-piece  inverts  the  position  of  the  wires,  and  therefore  that 
in  loosening  one  of  the  screws  and  tightening  the  other  on  the  opposite  side,  the 
operator  must  proceed  as  if  to  increase  the  error  observed.  Having  in  this  manner 
moved  back  the  vertical  wire  until,  by  estimation,  one-quarter  of  the  space,  D  E,  has 
been  passed  over,  return  the  instrument  to  the  point  B,  revolve  the  telescope,  and  if 
the  correction  has  been  carefully  made,  the  wires  will  now  bisect  a  point,  C,  situated 
midway  between  D  and  E,  and  in  the  prolongation  of  the  imaginary  line,  passing 
through  the  point  B  and  the  centre  of  the  instrument. 

To  ascertain  if  such  is  the  case,  turn  the  instrument  half  around,  fix  the  telescope 
upon  B,  clamp  to  the  spindle,  and  again  revolve  the  telescope  towards  C.  If  the  wires 
again  bisect  it,  it  will  prove  that  they  are  in  adjustment,  and  that  the  points  B,  A,  C, 
all  lie  in  the  same  straight  line. 

Should  the  vertical  wire  strike  to  one  side  of  C,  the  error  must  be  corrected  pre¬ 
cisely  as  above  described,  until  it  is  entirely  removed. 

Another  method  of  adjusting  the  line  of  collimation  often  employed  in  situations 
where  no  good  points  in  opposite  directions  can  be  selected  upon  which  to  reverse 
the  wires  may  here  be  described. 

The  operator  sets  up  the  instrument  in  some  position  which  commands  a  long  sight 
in  the  same  direction,  and  having  leveled  his  instrument,  clamps  to  the  spindle,  and 
with  the  telescope  locates  three  points  which  we  will  term  A,  B  and  C,  which  are 
distant  from  the  instrument  about  one,  two  and  three  hundred  feet  respectively. 

These  points,  which  are  usually  determined  by  driving  a  nail  into  a  wooden  stake 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  129 


Bet  firmly  into  the  ground,  will  all  lie  in  the  same  straight  line,  however  much  the 
wires  are  out  of  adjustment,  since  the  position  of  the  instrument  remains  unchanged 
during  the  whole  operation. 

Having  fixed  these  points  he  now  moves  the  instrument  to  B,  and  sets  its  centre 
directly  over  the  nail  head,  by  letting  down  upon  it  the  point  of  a  plumb-bob  sus¬ 
pended  from  the  tripod. 

Then  having  leveled  the  instrument,  he  directs  the  wires  to  A,  clamps  to  the  spindle, 
and  revolves  the  telescope  towards  C.  Should  the  wires  strike  the  nail  at  that  point, 
it  would  show  that  they  were  in  adjustment. 

Should  any  deviation  be  observed,  the  operator  must  correct  it  by  moving  the 
wire  with  the  screws  until,  by  estimation,  half  the  error  is  removed. 

Then  bringing  the  telescope  again  upon  either  A  or  C,  and  revolving  it,  he  will 
find  that  the  wires  will  strike  the  point  in  the  opposite  direction  if  the  proper  correc¬ 
tion  has  been  applied. 

If  not,  repeat  the  operation  until  the  telescope  will  exactly  cut  the  two  opposite 
points,  when  the  intersection  of  the  wires  will  be  in  the  optical  axis,  and  the  line  of 
collimation  in  adjustment. 

In  our  description  of  the  previous  operation,  we  have  spoken  more  particulary  of 
the  vertical  wire,  because  in  a  revolving  telescope  this  occupies  the  most  important 
place,  the  horizontal  one  being  employed  mainly  to  define  the  centre  of  the  vertical 
wire,  so  that  it  may  be  moved  either  up  or  down  without  materially  disturbing  the 
line  of  collimation. 

The  wires  being  adjusted,  their  intersection  may  now  be  brought  into  the  centre  of 
the  field  of  view. 

The  Eye-piece  is  centred  by  moving  the  screws  A  A,  shown  in  the  sectional  view 
of  the  telescope,  Fig.  A,  which  are  slackened  and  tightened  in  pairs,  the  movement 
being  now  direct,  until  the  wires  are  seen  in  their  proper  position. 

It  is  here  proper  to  observe,  that  the  position  of  the  line  of  collimation  depends 
upon  that  of  the  object-glass,  solely,  so  that  the  eye-piece  may,  as  in  the  case  just 
described,  be  moved  in  any  direction,  or  even  entirely  removed  and  a  new  one  sub¬ 
stituted,  without  at  all  deranging  the  adjustment  of  the  wires. 

The  Standards. — In  order  that  the  wires  may  trace  a  vertical  line  as  the  telescope 
is  moved  up  or  down,  it  is  necessary  that  both  the  standards  of  the  telescope  should 
be  of  precisely  the  same  height. 

To  ascertain  this  and  make  the  correction  if  needed,  proceed  as  follows  : 

Having  the  line  of  collimation  previously  adjusted,  set  the  instrument  in  a  position 
where  points  of  observation,  such  as  the  point  and  base  of  a  lofty  spire,  can  be 
selected,  giving  a  long  range  in  a  vertical  direction. 

Level  the  instrument,  fix  the  wires  on  the  top  of  the  object  and  clamp  to  the  spindle, 
then  bring  the  telescope  down,  until  the  wires  bisect  some  good  point,  either  found 
or  marked  at  the  base;  turn  the  instrument  half  around,  fix  the  wires  on  the  lower 
point,  clamp  to  the  spindle,  and  raise  the  telescope  to  the  highest  object. 

If  the  wires  -bisect  it,  the  vertical  adjustment  is  effected  ;  if  they  are  thrown  to  either 
side  this  would  prove  that  the  standard  opposite  that  side  was  the  highest,  the  ap¬ 
parent  error  being  double  that  actually  due  to  this  cause. 

To  correct  it,  we  now  make  one  of  the  bearings  of  the  axis  movable,  so  that  by 
turning  a  screw  underneath  this  sliding  piece,  as  well  as  the  screws  which  hold  on 
the  cap  of  the  standard,  the  adjustment  is  made  with  the  utmost  precision. 

This  arrangement,  which  is  common  to  all  our  telescope  instruments,  is  very  sub¬ 
stantial  and  easily  managed. 

The  Vertical  Circle. — When  this  attachment  requires  adjustment,  proceed  by 
leveling  the  instrument  carefully,  and  having  brought  into  line  the  zeros  of  the  wheel 
and  vernier,  find  or  place  some  well  defined  point  or  line  which  is  cut  by  the  hori¬ 
zontal  wire. 

Turn  the  instrument  half  around,  revolve  the  telescope,  and  fixing  the  wire  upon 
the  same  point  as  before,  note  if  the  zeros  are  again  in  line. 

If  not,  loosen  the  screws  and  move  the  zero  of  the  vernier  over  half  the  error  ;  bring 
the  zeros  again  into  coincidence,  and  proceed  precisely  as  at  first  described  until  the 
error  is  entirely  corrected,  when  the  adjustment  will  be  completed. 

Should  it  be  desired,  at  any  time,  the  circle  can  be  removed  by  the  surveyor  and; 
replaced  at  pleasure. 

The  Level  on  Telescope. — The  adjustment  of  this  will  be  best  considered  when' 
we  come  to  speak  of  the  Surveyor’s  Transit. 

9 


130  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


Adjustments,  in  General. — We  ought  here  to  say  that  the  above  adjustments,  as 
well  as  all  the  others  which  we  have  previously  explained  or  may  hereafter  describe, 
are  always  made  by  us  in  person,  but  are  given  in  this  work  in  order  that  the  sur¬ 
veyor  and  engineer  may  fully  understand  their  instruments,  and  be  enabled  to  detect 
and  remedy  errors  and  accidents,  which  in  practice  will  often  occur. 

TO  USE  THE  VERNIER  TRANSIT. 

This  instrument  is  used  on  the  ordinary  ball  and  spindle,  placed  most  commonly 
in  the  compass  tripod,  as  shown  in  Fig.  979. 

Tripod  Head. — Sometimes  leveling  screws  with  the  parallel  plates,  and  which 
together  we  shall  designate  the  “  tripod  head,”  with  a  clamp  and  tangent  movement, 
are  used  with  this  instrument  as  well  as  with  the  Surveyors’  Transit. 

This  tripod  head  can  be  unscrewed  from  the  legs,  and  is  packed  in  the  instrument 
box ;  it  is  of  very  moderate  cost,  and  in  almost  every  situation  is  infinitely  superior 
to  a  ball  and  socket  support. 

Compound  Ball. — We  also  manufacture  what  may  be  termed  a  “  compound  ball 
spindle,”  which  has  a  tangent  movement,  and  gives  all  the  perfection  of  more  costly 
arrangements,  with  a  very  moderate  expense. 

As  represented  in  the  cut,  it  has  an  interior  spindle,  around  which  an  outside  hollow 
cylinder  is  moved  by  turning  the  double-headed  tangent  screw,  which  has  in  the 
middle  an  endless  screw,  working  into  teeth  cut  spirally  around  in  a  groove  of  the 
cylinder.  The  compass,  or  other  instrument,  revolves  on  the  outside  socket,  precisely 
as  if  placed  on  a  common  ball  spindle ;  but  when  a  slower  movement  is  required,  can 
be  made  fast  by  the  clamp  screw,  and  then  turned  gradually  around  the  interior 
spindle  by  the  tangent  screw,  until  the  slote  of  the  sight  or  the  intersection  of  the 
wires,  is  made  to  bisect  the  object  with  the  utmost  certainty. 

The  compound  ball  may  be  placed  either  in  a  jacob-staff  socket  or  compass 
tripod. 

Leveling  Socket. — A  very  beautiful  arrangement  for  use,  either  with  this  instru¬ 
ment  or  with  a  sight  compass,  is  shown  in  the  leveling  socket  described  in  our  account 
of  the  solar  compass  beyond. 

The  socket  may  be  used  either  with  the  ordinary  compass  ball  or  the  compound 
ball,  as  there  represented,  and  gives  a  very  rapid  and  accurate  means  of  leveling  the 
instrument. 

The  Spring  Catch,  described  in  our  account  of  the  Plain  Compass,  is  always  at¬ 
tached  to  the  socket  of  this  instrument,  whether  placed  upon  a  ball  or  tripod,  so  that 
it  cannot  slip  off  from  the  spindle  in  carrying. 

The  Clamp  Screw  in  the  side  of  the  socket  of  this  instrument,  is  shown  in  No. 
9.78,  and  by  pressing  a  brass  spring  in  the  interiQr  against  the  spindle,  serves  to  fix 
the  instrument  in  any  position. 

The  Vernier  is  moved  by  the  tangent  screw,  now  always  placed  above  the  plate, 
•precisely  as  described  in  our  account  of  the  Vernier  Compass,  and  is  read  to  minutes 
iin  the  same  manner. 

There  is  also  a  clamp  nut  underneath  the  vernier,  by  which  it  is  securely  fixed  in 
any  position,  which  must  be  loosened  whenever  the  vernier  is  moved  by  the  tangent 

screw. 

The  Needle  Lifting  Screw  is  the  same  as  those  of  the  compasses  previously 
described. 

In  .Surveying  with  this  instrument  the  operator  proceeds  precisely  as  with  the 
Vernier  Compass,  keeping  the  south  end  towards  his  person,  reading  the  bearings  of 
lines  from  the  north  end  of  the  needle,  and  using  the  telescope  in  place  of  sights,  re¬ 
volving  it  as  objects  are  selected  in  opposite  directions. 

Parallax. — Before  an  observation  is  made  with  the  telescope,  the  eye-piece  should 
be  moved  in  or  out  until  the  wires  appear  distinct  to  the  eye  of  the  operator,  the 
object-glass  may  then  be  placed  in  position  by  turning  the  pinion  head  on  the  top  of 
the  telescope,  until  the  object  is  seen  clear  and  well  defined,  and  the  wires  appear  as 
if  fastened  to  its  surface. 

When,  on  the  contrary,  the  wires  are  not  perfectly  distinct,  the  observer,  by  moving 
his  eye  to  either  side  of  the  small  aperture  of  the  eye  piece,  will  cause  the  wires  to 
“travel”  on  the  object,  and  thus  occasion  what  is  termed  the  “error  of  parallax.” 

The  intersection  of  the  wires  being  the  means  by  which  the  optical  axis  of  the 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  131 


telescope  is  defined,  should  be  brought  precisely  upon  the  centre  of  the  object  to 
which  the  instrument  is  directed. 

To  take  Angles  of  Elevation. — Level  the  instrument  carefully,  fix  the  zeros  of 
the  circle  and  vernier  in  line,  and  note  the  height  cut  upon  the  staff  or  other  object, 
by  the  horizontal  wire;  then  carry  the  staff  up  the  elevation,  fix  the  wire  again  upon 
the  same  point,  and  the  angle  of  elevation  will  be  read  off  by  the  vernier. 

By  careful  usage,  the  adjustments  of  the  Vernier  Transit  will  remain  as  permanent 
as  those  of  the  ordinary  compass,  the  only  one  liable  to  derangement  being  that  of 
the  line  of  collimation. 

This  should  be  examined  occasionally,  and  corrected  in  the  manner  previously 
described. 


REPAIRS  OF  THE  VERNIER  TRANSIT. 

These  being  in  great  part  already  spoken  of,  it  will  be  necessary  to  consider  only 
such  as  belong  to  the  telescope. 

To  Replace  the  Cross  Wires. — Take  out  the  eye-piece  tube,  together  with  the 
little  ring  by  which  it  is  centered,  and  having  removed  two  opposite  cross-wire  screws, 
with  the  others  turn  the  ring  until  one  of  the  screw  holes  is  brought  into  view  from 
the  open  end  of  the  telescope  tube,  in  this  thrust  a  stout  splinter  of  wood  or  a  small 
wire  so  as  to  hold  the  ring  when  the  remaining  screws  are  withdrawn ;  the  ring  is 
then  taken  out  and  is  ready  for  the  wires. 

For  these  the  web  of  the  spider  is  to  be  preferred  above  anything  else,  but  when 
this  is  not  obtainable,  a  fine  silk  fibre  may  be  substituted. 

We  usually  procure  our  webs  from  the  living  manufacturer  directly,  selecting  those 
of  a  yellowish-brown  color,  as  furnishing  the  most  perfect  product. 

The  spider  being  held  between  the  thumb  and  finger  of  an  assistant,  in  such  posi¬ 
tion  as  to  suffer  no  serious  injury,  and  at  the  same  time  be  unable  to  make  any  effec¬ 
tual  resistance  with  his  extremities,  the  little  fibre  may  be  drawn  out  at  pleasure,  and 
being  placed  in  the  fine  lines  cut  on  the  surface  of  the  diaphragm,  is  then  firmly  ce¬ 
mented  to  its  place  by  applying  softened  beeswax  with  the  point  of  a  knife  blade. 

In  case  the  spider  is  not  procurable,  a  fine  strand  of  a  web  which  is  free  from  dust, 
and  long  enough  to  serve  for  both  wires,  may  be  selected. 

In  such  times  as  the  spiders  remain  in  their  winter  quarters,  we  have  been  able  to 
procure  very  good  fibres  from  a  box  in  which  a  number  had  been  confined. 

When  the  wires  are  cemented,  the  ring  is  returned  to  its  position  in  the  tube,  and 
either  pair  of  screws  being  inserted,  the  splinter  or  wire  is  removed,  and  the  ring 
turned  until  the  other  screws  can  be  replaced. 

Care  must  also  be  taken  that  the  same  side  of  the  ring  is  turned  to  the  eye-piece 
as  before  it  was  removed. 

When  this  has  been  done,  the  eye-tube  is  inserted,  and  its  centering  ring  brought 
into  such  a  position  that  the  screws  in  it  can  be  replaced,  and  then  by  screwing  on  the 
end  of  the  telescope,  the  little  cover  into  which  the  eye-tube  is  fixed,  the  operation 
will  be  completed. 

To  Clean  the  Telescope. — The  only  glasses  that  will  ordinarily  require  cleaning, 
are  the  object-glass  on  its  outside  surface,  and  the  little  eye-lens,  which  is  exposed 
when  the  cap  of  the  eye-tube  is  removed. 

To  remove  the  dust  from  these  use  a  very  soft  and  clean  silk  or  cotton  cloth,  and 
be  careful  not  to  rub  the  same  part  of  the  cloth  a  second  time  on  the  surface  of  the 

glass. 

No  one  should  ever  be  allowed  to  touch  the  glasses  with  the  fingers  or  with  a  dusty 

cloth. 


EXCELLENCIES  OF  THE  VERNIER  TRANSIT. 

These  are  due  chiefly  to  the  telescope  and  its  attachments,  and  from  what  has 
already  been  said,  it  will  appear  are  such  as  to  render  this  instrument  greatly  superior 
to  one  provided  with  the  ordinary  sights. 

1.  The  magnifying  power  of  the  telescope  enables  the  surveyor  to  take  accurate 
observations  at  distances  entirely  beyond  the  reach  of  the  naked  eye. 

2.  The  fine  intersection  of  the  cross-wires  can  be  set  precisely  upon  the  centre  of 
the  object. 

3.  The  revolving  property  of  the  telescope  gives  the  means  of  running  long  lines  up 


132  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 

or  down  steep  ascents  or  descents  with  perfect  ease,  where,  with  the  short  sights  of 
the  ordinary  compass,  two  or  three  observations  would  have  to  be  taken. 

4.  The  use  of  a  telescope  entirely  avoids  the  incessant  trying  of  the  eyes  experienced 

in  surveys  with  the  ordinary  sights.  ■; 

5.  With  the  telescope,  lines  can  be  run  through  the  forest  or  brushwood,  and  the 
flagstaff  distinguished  with  much  greater  certainty  than  through  the  sights  of  a 
compass. 

This  statement  may  appear  very  unreasonable  to  those  not  familiar  with  the  instru¬ 
ment,  and  these,  in  fact,  raise  the  greatest  objection  to  a  telescope,  from  its  supposed 
unfitness  for  surveys  in  such  locations. 

They  have  only  to  use  it  a  few  times  in  this  kind  of  work,  in  connection  with  a 
flagstaff,  painted  white  or  covered  with  paper,  to  distinguish  it  from  the  surrounding 
objects,  to  be  convinced  of  its  great  superiority. 

In  the  Vernier  Transit,  as  furnished  by  us,  is  supplied,  as  we  believe,  to  the  sur¬ 
veyor,  the  most  perfect  of  all  needle  instruments,  and  this  at  a  cost  but  little  above 
that  charged  by  other  makers  for  a  sight  compass. 

The  advantages  of  the  telescope  and  its  attachments  are  so  great  that  a  surveyor, 
accustomed  to  them,  would  find  it  difficult  to  content  himself  with  the  ordinary  com¬ 
pass,  and  such  in  fact  is  the  universal  testimony  of  those  familiar  with  the  Vernier 
Transit. 

WEIGHT  OF  THE  VERNIER  TRANSIT. 

The  weight  of  this  instrument,  exclusive  of  the  tripod  legs,  and  with  a  plain  tele¬ 
scope,  is  about  ten  pounds. 


NEEDLE  INSTRUMENTS. 

We  have  now  described  the  instruments  included  under  the  division  termed  Needle 
Instruments,  in  the  beginning  of  this  work.  » 

As  there  stated,  the  Plain  and  Vernier  Compasses  and  the  Vernier  Transit  depend 
for  their  accuracy  and  value  mainly  upon  the  perfection  of  movement  of  the  magnetic 
needle. 

With  such  instruments  the  greater  part  of  the  surveying  in  our  country  has  been, 
and  will  for  a  long  time  in  the  future  continue  to  be  done. 

And  though  with  the  improvements  made  in  these  instruments,  a  good  surveyor 
may,  with  great  care  and  skill,  do  work  with  a  surprising  degree  of  accuracy  and 
perfection,  yet  all  needles  are  liable  to  many  irregularities. 

IMPERFECTIONS  OF  THE  NEEDLE. 

These  may  arise  either  from  the  loss  of  magnetic  virtue  in  the  poles,  the  blunting 
of  the  centre-pin,  or  the  attraction  exerted  upon  it  by  bodies  of  iron,  whose  presence 
may  be  entirely  unsuspected. 

The  two  first  of  these  errors  may  be  easily  remedied  in  the  manner  we  have 
described. 

Local  Attraction. — The  third  and  most  frequent  source  of  inaccuracy,  may  be 
detected  by  taking  back  sights,  as  well  as  fore  sights,  upon  every  line  run  with  the 
needle,  and  by  the  agreement  of  the  bearings,  determining  the  true  direction  of  the 
line. 

Sometimes  a  compass  may  have  little  particles  of  iron  concealed  within  the  surface 
of  the  metal  circle  or  plates. 

It  is  the  business  of  the  maker  to  examine  every  instrument,  in  search  of  this  defect, 
by  trying  the  reversion  of  the  needle  upon  all  points  of  the  divided  circle. 

If  the  needle  should  fail  to  reverse,  when  the  compass  is  turned  half  around,  and 
the  sights  directed  a  second  time  upon  any  object,  the  instrument  should  be  thrown 
aside  and  never  sold. 

Besides  the  difficulties  caused  by  the  above  imperfections,  the  variation  of  the  needle 
is  a  frequent  source  of  annoyance. 

What  is  termed  the  secular  variation,  we  have  already  mentioned  in  our  account 
of  the  Vernier  Compass,  we  will  now  speak  of  the 

Diurnal  Variation. — This  is  owing  to  the  influence  of  the  sun,  which,  in  summer, 
will  cause  the  needle  to  vary  from  ten  to  fifteen  minutes  in  a  few  hours,  when  exposed 
to  its  fullest  influence. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  00.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  133 


To  guard  against  these  causes  of  inaccuracy  in  the  use  of  needle  instruments,  the 
surveyor  will  need  the  greatest  care  and  attention ;  and  yet  with  all  the  precautions 
that  can  be  suggested,  the  difficulty  of  measuring  horizontal  angles  with  certainty, 
and  to  a  sufficient  degree  of  minuteness  by  the  needle  alone,  has  caused  a  demand 
■  to  be  felt  more  and  more  sensibly  in  all  parts  of  the  country  for  instruments,  in  the 
use  of  which  the  surveyor  may  proceed  with  assured  accuracy  and  precision. 

Indeed,  in  Canada,  so  great  is  the  distrust  of  needle  instruments,  that  the  Provincial 
Land  Surveyors  are  forbidden  to  use  an  instrument  in  their  land  surveys,  unless  it  is 
capable  of  taking  angles  independently  of  the  needle. 

To  supply  the  demand  thus  created  for  increased  perfection  in  the  implements  of 
the  surveyor,  we  manufacture  a  variety  of  instruments ;  three  of  which  we  shall  now 
describe  under  the  names  of  The  Railroad  Compass ,  The  Surveyor's  Transit ,  and  the 
Solar  Compass. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

THE  RAILKOAD  COMPASS. 

As  shown  in  number  973,  this  instrument  has  the  main  plate,  levels,  sights,  and 
needle  of  the  ordinary  instrument,  and  has  also  underneath  the  main  plate  a  divided 
circle  or  limb  bjr  which  horizontal  angles  to  single  minutes  can  be  taken  independ¬ 
ently  of  the  needle. 

The  verniers  are  attached  to  the  under  surface  of  the  main  plate,  the  openings 
through  which  they  are  seen  being  covered  with  slips  of  glass  to  protect  the  divisions 
from  dust  and  moisture ;  only  one  of  the  verniers  is  shown  in  the  cut. 

The  connection  between  the  two  plates  is  made  by  a  clamp  and  tangent  movement 
shown  at  e,  by  which  they  can  be  fastened  together  or  released  at  will,  or  moved  slowly 
around  each  other  as  may  be  desired  in  the  use  of  the  compass. 

The  needle  lifting  screw  is  shown  near  the  clamp  screw,  on  the  same  end  of  the 
plate. 

On  the  opposite  side  of  the  compass  circle  is  seen  the  head  a  of  a  pinion  working 
into  a  circular  rack  fixed  to  the  edge  of  the  compass  circle,  and  thus  enabling  the 
surveyor  to  move  the  compass  circle  about  its  centre  in  setting  off  the  variation  of 
the  needle,  precisely  as  in  the  case  of  the  vernier  compass. 

The  variation  is  read  to  single  minutes  by  a  vernier  and  divided  arc,  partially 
shown  near  the  letter  S  in  the  cut. 

Near  the  pinion  head  is  also  shown  a  clamp  screw,  by  which  the  circle  is  securely 
fixed  when  moved  to  the  proper  position. 

The  sockets  upon  which  the  plates  of  this  instrument  turn  are  long  and  well  fitted, 
and  the  movement  of  the  vernier  plate  around  the  limb  is  almost  perfectly  free  from 

friction.  . 

Thk  Graduated  Circle  or  limb  is  divided  to  half  degrees,  and  figured  in  two  rows, 
viz :  from  0°  to  90°,  and  from  0°  to  360° ;  sometimes  but  a  single  series  is  used,  and 
then  the  figures  run  from  0°  to  360°,  or  from  0°  to  180°  on  each  side. 

The  figuring,  which  is  the  same  upon  this  as  in  the  other  angular  instruments  we 
shall  hereafter  describe,  is  varied  when  desired  by  the  surveyor.  The  first  method  is 

our  usual  practice.  . 

The  Verniers  are  double,  having  on  each  side  of  the  zero  mark  thirty  equal  divi¬ 
sions  corresponding  precisely  with  twenty-nine  half,  degrees  of  the  limb  ,  they  thus 
read  to  single  minutes,  and  the  number  passed  over  is  counted  in  the  same  direction 

in  which  the  vernier  is  moved.  #  . 

The  use  of  two  opposite  verniers  in  this  and  othei  instruments  gives  the  means  ot 
“cross  questioning”  the  graduations,  the  perfection  with  which  they  are  centered  and 
the  dependence  which  can  be  placed  upon  the  accuracy  of  the  angles  indicate  . 

The  Needle  of  this  instrument  is  about  five  and  a  half  inches  long,  and  made  pre¬ 
cisely  like  those  previously  described. 

The  Adjustments  of  this  instrument,  with  which  the  surveyor  will  have  to  do,  have 
been  already  described. 


134  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


TO  USE  THE  RAILROAD  COMPASS. 

It  can  be  set  upon  the  common  compass  ball,  or  still  better,  the  tangent  ball  already 
described,  placed  either  in  a  jacob-staff  socket,  a  compass  tripod,  or  the  leveling 
socket  and  tripod  as  shown  with  the  solar  compass. 

We  have  also  adapted  to  many  of  these  instruments  the  leveling  tripod  head,  with 
clamp  and  tangent  movement,  and  this  is  preferable  to  any  other  support. 

To  take  Horizontal  Angles. — First  level  the  plate  and  set  the  limb  at  zero,  fix 
the  sights  upon  one  of  the  objects  selected,  and  clamping  the  whole  instrument  firmly 
to  the  spindle,  unclamp  the  vernier  plate  and  turn  it  with  the  hand,  until  the  sights 
are  brought  nearly  upon  the  second  object;  then  clamp  to  the  limb,  and  with  the 
tangent  screw  fix  them  precisely  upon  it. 

The  number  of  degrees  and  minutes  read  off  by  the  vernier,  will  give  the  angle 
between  the  two  objects,  taken  from  the  centre  of  the  instrument. 

It  will  be  understood  that  the  horizontal  angles  can  be  taken  in  any  position  of  the 
verniers,  with  reference  to  the  zero  point  of  the  limb ;  we  have  given  that  above  as 
being  the  usual  method  and  liable  to  the  fewest  errors. 

It  is  advisable,  where  great  accuracy  is  required,  in  this  and  other  instruments 
furnished  with  two  verniers,  to  obtain  the  readings  of  the  limb  from  both,  add  the  two 
together  and  halve  their  sum ;  the  result  will  be  the  mean  of  the  two  readings,  and 
the  true  angle  between  the  points  observed. 

Such  a  course  is  especially  necessary  when  the  readings  of  the  verniers  essentially  dis¬ 
agree,  as  may  sometimes  happen  when  the  instrument  has  been  injured  by  an  accident. 

Use  of  the  Needle. — In  taking  horizontal  angles  as  just  described,  the  magnetic 
bearings  of  the  two  objects  are  often  noted,  and  thus  two  separate  readings  of  the 
same  angle,  one  by  the  limb,  the  other  by  the  needle,  are  obtained,  to  be  used  as 
checks  upon  each  other  to  prevent  mistakes. 

To  Turn  off  the  Variation  of  the  Needle. — Having  leveled  the  instrument,  set 
the  limb  at  zero,  and  place  the  sights  upon  the  old  line,  note  the  reading  of  the  needle, 
and  make  it  agree  with  that  given  in  the  field  notes  of  the  former  survey,  by  turning 
the  compass  circle  about  its  centre  by  the  pinion  a. 

Now,  clamp  the  compass  circle  firmly  by  the  clamp  screw,  and  the  number  of 
degrees  or  minutes  passed  over  by  the  vernier  of  the  compass  circle  will  be  the  change 
of  variation  in  the  interval  between  the  two  surveys. 

To  Survey  with  this  instrument,  the  operator  should  turn  the  south  side  of  the  com¬ 
pass  face  towards  his  person,  and  having  brought  the  zeros  of  the  limb  and  vernier  plate 
in  contact,  clamp  them,  and  proceed  as  directed  in  our  account  of  the  Plain  Compass. 

Of  course  it  will  be  understood  that  lines  can  be  run  and  angles  measured  by  the 
divided  limb  and  verniers,  entirely  independent  of  the  needle,  which,  in  localities 
where  local  attraction  is  manifested,  is  very  serviceable. 

The  accuracy  and  minuteness  of  horizontal  angles  indicated  by  this  instrument, 
together  with  its  perfect  adaptation  to  all  the  purposes  to  which  the  Vernier  Compass 
can  be  applied,  have  brought  it  into  use  in  many  localities,  where  the  land  is  so 
valuable  as  to  require  more  careful  surveys  than  are  practicable  with  a  needle 
instrument. 

WEIGHT  OF  THE  RAILROAD  COMPASS 

The  average  weight  of  this  instrument,  including  the  brass  head  of  the  jacob-stafF, 
is  about  11£  lbs. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

THE  SURVEYOR’S  TRANSIT 

This  instrument  shown  in  the  engraving  on  page  69,  is  in  principle  very  similar  to 
the  instrument  just  described,  differing  from  it  mainly  in  the  substitution  of  the 
telescope  with  its  appendages,  for  the  ordinary  compass  sights. 

The  Telescope  is  of  somewhat  finer  quality  than  that  used  with  the  Vernier  Transit; 
as  here  shown,  it  is  furnished  with  a  small  level,  having  a  ground  bubble  tube  and  a 
scale,  and  also  a  vertical  circle  connected  with  its  axis. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  k  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK  135 


The  Standards  are  made  precisely  like  those  of  the  Vernier  Transit,  the  bearings 
of  the  axis  of  the  telescope  being  conical,  and  fitted  with  the  utmost  nicety ;  there  is 
also  in  one  of  them  the  movable  piece  for  the  adjustment  of  the  wires  to  the  tracing 
of  a  vertical  line. 

The  Spirit  Levels  are  placed  upon  the  upper  surface  of  the  vernier  plate,  one  being 
fixed  on  the  standard  so  as  not  to  obstruct  the  light  which  falls  on  the  vernier  opening 
beneath. 

Both  levels  are  adjustable  with  the  ordinary  steel  pin. 

The  Needle  is  like  that  of  the  previous  instrument,  but  is  only  five  inches  long. 

The  Vernier  Plate,  which  carries  the  verniers  and  telescopes,  is  made  to  move 
with  perfect  ease  and  stability  around  the  graduated  circle  or  limb,  and  horizontal 
angles  are  taken  to  single  minutes ;  the  variation  of  the  needle  is  also  set  off  by  the 
pinion  and  clamp  screw,  as  described  in  the  account  of  the  previous  instrument. 

The  Verniers,  as  in  all  our  angular  instruments,  are  double,  reading  either  way 
from  the  centre  mark,  and  to  single  minutes  of  a  degree. 

There  are  two  verniers  placed  on  opposite  sides  of  the  instrument  at  right  angles 
to  the  telescope ;  only  one  of  these  is  shown  in  the  cut. 

The  Divided  Circle,  or  limb,  is  graduated  to  half  degrees,  reads  to  minutes  by  the 
verniers,  and  is  figured  as  described  before. 

The  Clamp  and  Tangent  movement  of  the  vernier  plate  is  the  same  as  that  of  the 
Railroad  Compass ;  it  is  partly  shown  in  the  figure. 

The  Tripod  Head. — This  instrument,  as  shown  in  the  engraving,  is  generally  used 
on  a  leveling  tripod. 

The  Light  Leveling  Tripod,  used  with  the  Surveyor’s  Transit,  is  well  shown  in  the 
engraving.  As  there  seen,  there  are  nuts  screwed  in  to  the  upper  parallel  plate,  so 
as  to  give  a  long  bearing  for  the  four  leveling  screws. 

The  under  plate  supports  the  feet  of  the  screws,  and  has  beneath  a  cavity  or  bowl, 
in  which  moves  a  hemispherical  nut  screwed  to  the  spindle  of  the  tripod. 

This  nut  serves  both  to  connect  the  plates  together,  and  as  a  pivot  on  which  the 
upper  plate  is  turned  by  the  leveling  screws. 

The  under  parallel  plate  has  also  a  screw  on  the  under  side,  by  which  the  tripod 
head  may  be  disconnected  from  the  legs,  and  packed  in  the  box  with  the  instrument. 

The  leveling  screws  are  made  of  bell  metal,  have  a  large  double  milled  head,  and  a 
deep  screw  of  about  forty  threads  to  the  inch ;  their  ends  set  into  little  brass  cups,  so 
that  the  screws  are  worked  without  indenting  the  under  plate.  Sometimes  a  piece  of 
leather  is  put  in  place  of  the  cups. 

The  leveling  screws  are  entirely  covered  above  by  little  caps  which  screw  over  the 
upper  side  of  the  nut. 

When  the  screws  are  loosened,  the  upper  plate  can  be  shifted  around,  so  as  to  bring 
the  leveling  screws  in  any  position,  with  reference  to  the  plates  and  telescope  of  the 
instrument. 

The  clamp  and  tangent  screws  are  seen  on  the  upper  plate  of  the  tripod.  In  place 
of  the  single  tangent  screw,  we  have,  in  all  our  instruments,  substituted  the  double 
tangent  mevement,  as  shown  in  the  engraving. 

The  spindle  of  the  tripod  head  rises  ubove  the  upper  plate,  and  the  instrument  can 
be  removed  from  it,  by  pulling  out  a  little  pin  made  to  spring  into  a  groove,  and  thus 
keep  the  instrument  from  falling,  when  the  tripod  is  carried  upon  the  shoulder. 

In  the  lower  end  of  the  spindle  and  underneath  the  plates,  is  screwed  the  loop  for 
attaching  the  string  of  the  plum-bob. 

To  Level  the  Tripod,  the  engineer  takes  hold  of  the  opposite  screw  heads  with 
the  thumb  and  fore  finger  of  each  hand,  and  turning  both  thumbs  in  or  out,  as  may 
be  necessary,  raises  one  side  of  the  upper  parallel  plate  and  depresses  the  other,  until 
the  desired  correction  is  made. 

Shifting  the  Tripod  Head. — A  simple  arrangement  by  which  an  instrument  can 
be  easily  set  over  a  given  point,  is  made  by  extending  the  stem  of  the  tripod  head 
below,  through  a  large  circular  aperture  in  the  centre  of  the  plate  to  which  the  legs 
are  attached,  so  as  to  connect  by  the  hemispherical  nut  or  pivot  with  a  little  movable 
piece  bearing  m  the  under  surface  of  the  plate.  The  leveling  screws,  of  course,  rest 
directly  on  the  upper  surface  of  this  plate,  and  when  loosened,  can  be  shifted  nearly 
an  inch  from  side  to  side  in  any  direction ;  thus  allowing  the  point  of  the  plum-bob 
to  be  set  directly  over  a  given  point  on  the  ground. 

This  modification  requires  a  larger  tripod,  and  gives  the  surveyor  a  little  more 
trouble  when  the  tripod  head  is  detached  from  the  legs. 


136  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 

It  is  not  so  easily  adapted  to  the  Engineer’s  Transit  as  to  our  other  instrument* 
nor  can  so  much  movement  be  secured,  but  is  made  by  us  for  any  instrument  whenever 
desired  and  without  additional  charge. 

Adjusting  Socket. — A  beautiful  arrangement  for  occasional  use  in  place  of  the 
leveling  tripod,  in  cases  where  greater  lightness  and  rapidity  of  adjustment  are  desired, 
is  shown  in  the  adjusting  socket,  described  in  the  account  of  the  Solar  Compass. 

TO  ADJUST  THE  SURVEYOR’S  TRANSIT. 

The  Levels  are  adjusted  with  a  steel  pin  as  those  of  the  Vernier  Transit,  and  it 
need  only  be  added  here,  that  in  this  as  well  as  other  instruments  having  two  plates 
moving  upon  sockets  independent  of  each  other,  the  levels  when  adjusted  on  one  plate! 
should  still  keep  their  position  when  both  are  clamped  together  and  turned  upon  a 
common  socket. 

Otherwise,  however  accurately  the  telescope  might  trace  a  vertical  line,  when 
revolved  upon  the  socket  of  one  plate,  it  would  give  a  very  different  result  as  soon  as 
the  position  of  the  other  plate  was  changed. 

The  Needle  and  telescope  with  its  other  attachments  being  adjusted,  as  described 
in  our  account  of  the  Vernier  Transit,  we  shall  here  consider  only  that  of  the 

Level  on  Telescope. — For  the  adjustment  of  this  attachment  we  shall  give  two 
methods,  the  first  being  that  usually  practiced  by  us. 

1.  First  level  the  instrument  carefully,  and  with  the  clamp  and  tangent  movement 
to  the  axis,  make  the  telescope  horizontal  as  near  as  may  be  with  the  eye,  then  having 
the  line  of  collimation  previously  adjusted,  drive  a  stake  at  a  convenient  distance,  say 
from  one  to  three  hundred  feet,  and  note  the  height  cut  by  the  horizontal  wire,  upon 
a  staff  set  on  the  top  of  the  stake. 

Fix  another  stake  in  the  opposite  direction,  and  at  the  same  distance  from  the  in¬ 
strument,  and  without  disturbing  the  telescope,  turn  the  instrument  upon  its  spindle, 
set  the  staff  upon  the  stake,  and  drive  in  the  ground,  until  the  same  height  is  indi¬ 
cated  as  in  the  first  observation. 

The  top  of  the  two  stakes  will  then  be  in  the  same  horizontal  line,  however  much  the 
telescope  may  be  out  of  level. 

Now  remove  the  instrument  from  fifty  to  one  hundred  feet  to  one  side  of  either  of  the 
stakes,  and  in  line  with  both ;  again  level  the  instrument,  clamp  the  telescope  as 
nearly  horizontal  as  may  be,  and  note  the  heights  indicated  upon  the  staff  placed  first 
upon  the  nearest,  and  then  upon  the  most  distant  stake. 

If  both  agree,  the  telescope  is  level ;  if  not,  with  the  tangent  screw  move  the  wire 
over  nearly  the  whole  error,  as  shown  at  the  distant  stake,  and  repeat  the  observation 
as  just  described.  Proceed  thus  until  the  horizontal  wire  will  indicate  the  same 
height  at  both  stakes,  when  the  telescope  will  he  truly  horizontal. 

Taking  care  not  to  disturb  its  position,  bring  the  bubble  into  the  centre  by  the  little 
leveling  nuts  at  the  end  of  the  tube,  when  the  adjustment  will  be  completed. 

2.  Choose  a  piece  of  ground  nearly  level,  and  having  set  the  instrument  firmly',  level 
the  plates  carefully,  and  bring  the  bubble  of  the  telescope  into  the  centre  with  the 
tangent  screw.  Measure  in  any  direction  from  the  instrument  from  one  to  three 
hundred  feet,  and  drive  a  stake,  and  on  the  stake  set  a  staff,  and  note  the  height  cut 
by  the  horizontal  wire,  then  take  the  same  distance  from  the  instrument  in  an  oppo¬ 
site  direction,  and  drive  another  stake. 

On  that  stake  set  the  staff  and  note  the  height  cut  by  the  wire  when  the  telescope 
is  turned  in  that  direction. 

The  difference  of  the  two  observations  is  evidently  the  difference  of  level  of  the  two 
stakes. 

Set  the  instrument  over  the  lowest  stake,  or  that  upon  which  the  greatest  height 
was  indicated,  and  bring  the  levels  on  the  plates  and  telescope  into  adjustment  as  at 
first. 

Then  with  the  staff,  measure  the  perpendicular  distance  from  the  top  of  the  stake 
to  the  centre  of  one  of  the  horizontal  cross  wire  screw  heads ;  from  that  distance 
subtract  the  difference  of  level  between  the  two  stakes  and  mark  the  point  on  the  staff 
thus  found ;  place  the  staff  on  the  other  stake,  and  with  the  tangent  screw  bring  the 
horizontal  wire  to  the  mark  just  found,  and  the  line  will  be  level. 

The  telescope  now  being  level,  bring  the  bubble  of  the  level  into  the  centre,  by 
turning  the  little  nuts  at  the  end  of  the  tube,  and  noting  again  if  the  wires  cut  the 
point  on  the  staff ;  screw  up  the  nuts  firmly  and  the  adjustment  will  be  completed. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  137 


With  such  a  level  carefully  adjusted,  the  engineer,  by  taking  equal  fore  and  back 
sights,  can  run  horizontal  lines  with  great  rapidity,  and  a  good  degree  of  accuracy. 

TO  USE  THE  SURVEYOR’S  TRANSIT. 

In  surveying  with  this  instrument,  the  plates  must  be  set  so  that  the  zeros  of  the 
circle  and  the  verniers  correspond,  and  firmly  clamped  together,  the  eye  end  of  the 
telescope  being  placed  over  the  south  side  of  the  compass  circle,  in  the  position  shown 
in  the  engraving. 

The  surveyor  may  then  proceed  precisely  as  with  the  Plain  Compass. 

To  turn  off  Angles. — When  angles  are  to  be  measured  independently  of  the  needle, 
proceed  precisely  as  directed  in  the  description  of  the  Railroad  Compass. 

The  Variation  of  the  Needle  is  also  set  off  as  mentioned  in  our  account  of  that 
instrument. 

SIZES  OF  THE  SURVEYOR’S  TRANSIT. 

We  make  three  sizes  of  the  Surveyor’s  Transit,  viz : 

The  4-inch  needle,  with  divided  horizontal  limb  of  6  inches, 

The  5-inch  needle,  with  limb  of  6J  inches,  and 

The  5^-inch  needle,  with  limb  of  7  inches  diameter. 

They  are  all  used  with  the  light  adjusting  tripod  head  already  mentioned. 

STOLE  VERNIER  SURVEYOR’S  TRANSIT. 

We  have  just  introduced  a  modification  of  this  favorite  instrument,  by  which,  with 
a  lighter  socket  and  one  double  vernier  to  the  limb,  we  furnish  all  the  capabilities  of 
the  more  costly  instrument,  at  a  material  reduction  in  price. 

We  make  three  sizes  of  this  transit,  of  the  same  dimensions  as  those  having  two 
verniers  to  the  limb. 

The  Single  Vernier  Surveyor’s  Transit,  from  its  lightness,  excellence  and  cheapness, 
will  supply,  as  we  trust,  a  need  long  felt  by  engineers  and  surveyors,  in  furnishing  an 
instrument  suitable  for  accurate  work  at  a  very  reasonable  cost. 

The  average  weights  of  the  three  sizes,  exclusive  of  the  tripod  legs,  and  with  plain 
telescopes,  are  respectively  as  follows  : 


4- inch  needle . 12  lbs. 

5- inch  needle . 13  lbs. 

5j-inch  needle . 14  lbs. 


MERITS  OF  THE  SURVEYOR’S  TRANSIT. 

In  this  instrument,  as  just  described,  the  surveyor  will  recognize  advantages  not 
possessed  by  any  other  instrument  with  which  we  are  acquainted. 

Combining  the  capabilities  of  a  needle  instrument,  with  a  fine  telescope,  and  the 
accuracy  of  a  divided  limb  and  verniers,  and  having  also  the  means  for  turning  off 
the  variation  of  the  needle ;  it  is  for  a  mixed  practice  of  accurate  surveying  and  en¬ 
gineering,  such  indeed  as  is  required  by  most  city  engineers,  the  best  instrument  ever 
constructed. 


CHAPTER  XX. 

THE  SOLAR  COMPASS. 

This  Instrument,  so  ingeniously  contrived  for  readily  determining  a  true  meridian 
or  north  and  south  line,  was  invented  by  William  A.  Burt,  of  Michigan,  and  patented 

by  him  in  1836.  . 

It  has  since  come  into  general  use  in  the  surveys  of  U.  S.  public  lands,  the  principal 
lines  of  which  are  required  to  be  run  with  reference  to  the  true  meridian. 

The  invention  having  long  since  become  the  property  of  the  public,  we  have  given 
our  attention  to  the  manufacture  of  these  instruments,  and  are  now  prepared  to  furnish 
them,  with  important  improvements  of  our  own  devising,  at  greatly  reduced  prices. 


138  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


Our  improved  Solar  Compass,  one  form  of  which  is  shown  in  the  engraving,  has 
nearly  the  same  arrangement  of  plates,  with  divided  circles,  verniers,  and  sockets,  as 
the  Railroad  Compass. 


THE  SOLAR  APPARATUS. 

The  Solar  Apparatus  is  seen  in  the  place  of  the  needle,  and  in  fact  operates  as  its 
substitute  in  the  field. 

It  consists  mainly  of  three  arcs  of  circles,  by  which  can  be  set  off  the  latitude  of  a 
place,  the  declination  of  the  sun,  and  the  hour  of  the  day. 

These  arcs,  designated  in  the  cut  by  the  letters  a,  b,  and  c,  are  therefore  termed  the 
latitude,  the  declination,  and  the  hour  arcs  respectively. 

The  Latitude  Arc,  a,  has  its  centre  of  motion  in  two  pivots,  one  of  which  is  seen 
at  d,  the  other  is  concealed  in  the  cut. 

It  is  moved  either  up  or  down  within  a  hollow  arc,  seen  in  the  cut,  by  a  tangent 
screw  at  /,  and  is  securely  fastened  in  any  position  by  a  clamp  screw. 

The  Latitude  Arc  is  graduated  to  quarter  degrees,  and  reads  by  its  vernier,  e,  to 
single  minutes ;  it  has  a  range  of  about  thirty-five  degrees,  so  as  to  be  adjustable  to 
the  latitude  of  any  place  in  the  United  States. 

The  Declination  Arc,  b,  is  also  graduated  to  quarter  degrees,  and  has  a  range  of 
about  twenty-four  degrees. 

Its  vernier,  v,  reading  to  single  minutes,  is  fixed  to  a  movable  arm,  h,  having  its 
centre  of  motion  in  the  centre  of  the  declination  arc  at  g ;  the  arm  is  moved  over  the 
declination  arc,  and  its  vernier  set  to  any  reading  by  turning  the  head  of  the  tangent 
screw,  k.  It  is  also  securely  clamped  in  any  position  by  a  screw,  concealed  in  the 
engraving. 

Solar  Lenses  and  Lines. — At  each  end  of  the  arm,  h ,  is  a  rectangular  block  of  brass, 
in  which  is  set  a  small  convex  lens,  having  its  focus  on  the  surface  of  a  little  silver 
plate,  fastened  by  screws  to  the  inside  of  the  opposite  block. 

The  silver  plate,  with  its  peculiar  lines,  will  be  referred  to  more  particularly 
hereafter. 

Equatorial  Sights. — On  the  top  of  each  of  the  rectangular  blocks  is  seen  a  little 
sighting  piece,  termed  the  equatorial  sight,  fastened  to  the  block  by  a  small  milled 
head  screw,  so  as  to  be  detached  at  pleasure. 

They  are  used,  as  will  be  explained  hereafter,  in  adjusting  the  different  parts  of  the 
solar  apparatus. 

The  Hour  Arc,  c,  is  supported  by  the  two  pivots  of  the  latitude  arc,  already  spoken 
of,  and  is  also  connected  with  that  arc  by  a  curved  arm,  as  shown  in  the  figure. 

The  hour  arc  has  a  range  of  about  120°,  is  divided  to  half  degrees,  and  figured  in 
two  series;  designating  both  the  hours  and  the  degrees,  the  middle  division  being 
marked  12  and  90  on  either  side  of  the  graduated  lines. 

The  Polar  Axis. — Through  the  centre  of  the  hour  arc  passes  a  hollow  socket,  p, 
containing  the  spindle  of  the  declination  arc,  by  means  of  which  this  arc  can  be 
moved  from  side  to  side  over  the  surface  of  the  hour  arc,  or  turned  completely  round 
as  may  be  required. 

The  hour  arc  is  read  by  the  lower  edge  of  the  graduated  side  of  the  declination  arc. 

The  axis  of  the  declination  arc,  or  indeed  the  whole  socket,  p,  is  appropriately 
termed  the  polar  axis. 

The  Adjuster. — Besides  the  parts  shown  in  the  cut,  there  is  also  an  arm  used  in 
the  adjustment  of  the  instrument  as  described  hereafter,  but  laid  aside  in  the  box 
when  that  is  effected. 

The  parts  just  described  constitute  properly  the  solar  apparatus. 

Besides  these,  however,  are  seen  the  needle  box,  »,  with  its  arc  and  tangent  screw, 
t,  and  the  spirit  levels,  for  bringing  the  whole  instrument  to  a  horizontal  position. 

The  Needle  Box,  n,  has  an  arc  of  about  36°  in  extent,  divided  to  half  degrees,  and 
figured  from  the  centre  or  zero  mark  on  either  side. 

The  needle,  which  is  made  as  in  other  instruments,  except  that  the  arms  are  of  un¬ 
equal  lengths,  is  raised  or  lowered  by  a  lever  shown  in  the  cut. 

The  needle  box  is  attached  by  a  projecting  arm  to  a  tangent  screw,  t,  by  which  it  is 
moved  about  its  centre,  and  its  needle  set  to  any  variation. 

This  variation  is  also  read  off  by  the  vernier  on  the  end  of  the  projecting  arm, 
reading  to  single  minutes  a  graduated  arc,  attached  to  the  plate  of  the  compass. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  139 


The  Levels  seen  with  the  solar  apparatus,  have  ground  glass  vials,  and  are  adjust¬ 
able  at  their  ends  like  those  of  our  other  instruments. 

The  edge  of  the  circular  plate  on  which  the  solar  work  is  placed,  is  divided  and 
figured  at  intervals  of  ten  degrees,  and  numbered,  as  shown,  from  0  to  90  on  each  side 
of  the  line  of  sight. 

These  graduations  are  used  in  connection  with  a  little  brass  pin,  seen  in  the  centre 
of  the  plate,  to  obtain  approximate  bearings  of  lines,  which  are  not  important  enough 
to  require  a  close  observation. 

Lines  of  Refraction. — The  inside  faces  of  the  sights  are  also  graduated  and  figured, 
to  indicate  the  amount  of  refraction  to  be  allowed  when  the  sun  is  near  the  horizon. 
These  are  not  shown  in  the  cut. 

The  Horizontal  Limb  in  all  our  Solar  Compasses  is  divided  upon  silver,  and  reads 
by  two  opposite  verniers  to  single  minutes  of  a  degree,  the  number  of  minutes  being 
counted  off  in  the  same  direction  in  which  the  vernier  moves. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

THE  ENGINEER’S  TRANSIT. 

Having  now  described  the  various  instruments  employed  in  surveying,  we  shall 
consider  those  whose  use  belongs  more  especially  to  the  practice  of  the  civil  engineer, 
and  of  these  the  first  in  importance  is  that  termed  the  Engineer’s  Transit. 

The  Telescope  is  from  eleven  to  twelve  inches  long,  and  is  of  the  finest  quality. 

Like  those  of  our  other  instruments,  it  is  capable  of  reversion  always  at  the  eye  end, 
and  we  now  most  commonly  make  both  ends  to  reverse.  ' 

The  rack  and  pinion  movement  of  the  object-glass  is  usually  placed,  as  shown,  on 
the  side  of  the  telescope  tube,  though  sometimes  on  the  top,  as  the  engineer  may 
prefer. 

Pinion  to  the  Eye-Glass. — We  have  often  adapted  to  the  eye-piece  of  this  and  our 
other  Transits,  a  rack  and  pinion  movement  which  is  placed  on  the  side  of  the  tube, 
and  is  very  excellent  in  bringing  the  cross-wires  precisely  into  focus. 

The  Shade. — A  short  piece  of  thin  tube,  called  the  shade,  is  always  made  to  accom¬ 
pany  this  and  the  previous  instruments,  and  is  used  to  protect  the  object-glass  from 
the  glare  of  the  sun,  or  from  moisture ;  it  must  be  removed  whenever  the  telescope  is 
reversed,  unless  the  telescope  is  made  to  reverse  at  the  eye-end,  as  is  generally 
desired. 

The  interior  construction  of  the  telescope  is  similar  to  those  already  described. 

The  Standards  are  made  of  well  hammered  brass,  firm  and  strong. 

On  one  of  them  will  be  seen  the  little  movable  box  with  the  capstan  head  screw 
underneath,  by  which  the  cross-wires  are  adjusted  to  trace  a  vertical  line,  as  described 
on  page  127  in  our  account  of  the  Vernier  Transit. 

The  Limb  or  divided  circle  is  seven  inches  in  diameter,  graduated  to  half  degrees, 
and  read  by  two  opposite  verniers  to  single  minutes. 

The  Verniers  are  double,  reading  both  ways  from  the  centre,  and  are  placed  on 
the  sides  of  the  plate  at  right  angles  to  the  telescope. 

The  Needle  is  five  inches  long,  and  is  raised  by  a  milled  screw  head,  shown  in  the 
cut,  placed  above  the  plate. 

The  Clamp  and  Tangent  Screws  are  also  above,  so  as  to  be  very  accessible,  and 
out  of  the  reach  of  ordinary  accidents.  The  clamping  of  the  limb  is  effected  in  the 
interior,  the  aperture  being  covered  with  a  washer  to  exclude  the  dust  and  moisture. 

The  Levels,  a3  shown  in  the  cut,  are  above  ;  they  are  both  adjustable  with  the 
ordinary  steel  pin. 

The  glass  vials  used  in  the  levels  of  this  and  the  Surveyor’s  Transit,  are  ground  on 
their  upper  interior  surface,  so  that  the  bubble  moves  very  evenly  and  with  great 
sensitiveness. 

The  Tripod  Head  of  this  instrument  is  made  considerably  heavier  than  that  of  the 
Surveyor’s  Transit. 

The  upper  plate  is  about  five  inches  diameter,  made  thick  and  of  well  hammered 


I 


140  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


brass ;  into  this  are  screwed  the  long  nuts  or  sockets  for  the  leveling  screws,  and  oa 
the  upper  surface  is  seen  the  clamp,  and  with  the  two  butting  tangent  screws. 

With  these  the  movement  is  made  very  slowly,  and  much  more  firmly  than  is  pos¬ 
sible  with  a  single  tangent  screw. 

The  leveling  screws  are  of  bell  metal,  and  have  a  broad  three  milled  head ;  they  rest  on 
the  lower  plate,  in  the  little  cups  spoken  of  in  our  account  of  the  previous  instrument. 

In  the  engraving  it  will  also  be  seen  that  the  screws  are  entirely  covered  above  the 
plate,  by  little  brass  caps  which  protect  the  threads  from  dust  and  corrosion. 

The  lower  plate  is  a  little  smaller  than  the  upper,  milled  on  the  edge,  and  made  to 
connect  by  a  screw,  with  the  tripod  legs. 

This  tripod  head  is  attached  to  the  sockets  of  the  limb  and  vernier  plate,  and  is  re¬ 
moved  with  them,  when  the  instrument  is  packed  in  the  box  for  transportation. 

The  loop  for  the  plum-bob  is  connected  by  a  screw  to  the  spindle  of  the  vernier 
plate,  so  that  it  is  always  suspended  from  the  exact  centre  of  the  instrument. 

THE  ATTACHMENTS  OF  THE  TRANSIT. 

The  engraving  of  the  Surveyor’s  Transit  shows  the  vertical  circle  of  four  and  a  half 
inches  diameter,  which  is  read  by  a  double  vernier  to  minutes,  and  also  the  clamp  and 
tangent  movement  to  the  axis  of  the  telescope. 

These,  with  the  addition  of  a  level  on  the  telescope,  are  often  used  with  this  instru¬ 
ment,  though  the  majority  of  engineers  prefer  an  instrument  with  “plain  telescope.” 

MICROMETER. 

It  is  sometimes  very  convenient  in  the  use  of  both  the  Transit  and  Leveling  Instru¬ 
ment,  to  employ  some  simple  method  of  ascertaining  the  distances  of  objects  without 
resorting  to  actual  measurements. 

This  is  well  effected  by  what  is  termed  a  “  Micrometer,”  by  the  French  called  “  Stadia.” 

The  two  small  screws  which  adjust  the  movable  wire,  are  placed  on  opposite  sides 
of  the  telescope,  and  to  one  side  of  the  ordinary  cross-wire  screws,  and  the  wire  is 
moved  by  alternately  loosening  one  and  tightening  the  other,  until  the  two  horizontal 
wires  are  made  to  cover  the  interval  desired. 

The  micrometer  wire  is  furnished,  whenever  desired,  with  any  of  our  transits,  and 
/ithout  additional  charge. 

TO  ADJUST  THE  TRANSIT. 

The  adjustments  of  this  instrument  and  its  attachments  have  been  described  in  our 
account  of  those  previously  considered. 

TO  USE  THE  ENGINEER’S  TRANSIT. 

But  little  need  be  added  to  what  has  been  already  given  in  the  previous  pages. 

The  Needle  is  of  service  principally  as  a  rough  check  upon  the  readings  of  the 
verniers  in  the  measurement  of  horizontal  angles,  any  glaring  mistake  being  detected, 
by  noticing  the  angles  indicated  by  both,  in  the  different  positions  of  the  telescope. 

It  may  also  be  used  as  in  the  compass,  to  give  the  direction  in  which  the  lines  are 
run,  but  its  employment  is  only  subsidiary  to  the  general  purposes  of  the  Transit. 

SIZE  OF  THE  ENGINEER’S  TRANSIT. 

We  make  two  different  sizes  of  this  instrument,  viz  : 

The  Five-Inch  Transit  just  described,  which,  exclusive  of  the  tripod  legs,  weighs 
about  13J  lbs.,  and  the 

Four-Inch  Transit,  precisely  similar  in  style,  but  about  one-fourth  smaller  and 
lighter  in  all  its  parts. 

It  has  a  telescope  about  ten  inches  long,  a  four-inch  needle,  and  a  divided  limb  of 
six  inches  diameter. 

WEIGHT  OF  THE  ATTACHMENTS. 

As  it  may  sometimes  be  desirable  to  know  the  weights  of  the  different  extras  or 
attachments,  often  used  in  this  and  the  other  Transits  previously  described,  we  here 


add  them  in  detail. 

Ground  level  tube,  with  vial  complete .  oz. 

Vertical  circle,  with  vernier .  6  oz. 

Clamp  and  tangent  to  axis . 4  oz. 


Besides  the  simple  form  of  the  Engineer’s  Transit,  we  also  make  important  modifi¬ 
cations,  which  may  be  desired  by  the  engineer  j  a  few  of  these  we  shall  now  enumerate. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  GO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  141 


THE  WATCH  TELESCOPE. 

A  telescope  is  sometimes  attached  to  a  socket,  moving  in  a  hollow  cylinder  which 
surrounds  the  lengthened  socket  of  the  limb,  and  is  thus  capable  of  moving  around 
under  the  plates,  and  of  a  short  vertical  motion. 

The  cylinder  which  supports  it,  may  be  clamped  firmly  to  the  limb,  and  the  wires  of 
the  telescope  thus  fixed  upon  any  object,  bjr  the  tangent  movement  of  the  tripod  head. 

The  object  of  the  watch  telescope,  is  to  guard  against,  and  detect  any  inaccuracy 
arising  from  the  disturbance  of  the  limb,  during  the  progress  of  an  observation,  or 
the  measurement  of  angles. 

Thus,  if  the  wires  of  both  telescopes  are  fixed  upon  the  same  object,  and  the  watch 
telescope  kept  still  upon  it,  while  the  vernier  plate  is  unclamped,  and  the  upper  tele¬ 
scope  shifted  to  the  second  point,  a  reference  to  the  watch  telescope  will  immediately 
betray  any  disturbance  in  the  position  of  the  limb. 

But,  in  spite  of  its  excellencies  in  cases  where  great  nicety  is  required,  the  additional 
weight  and  complication  of  the  watch  telescope,  have  caused  it  to  be  regarded  by  most 
American  engineers  as  an  incumbrance,  rather  than  an  advantage  to  the  Transit. 

THE  THEODOLITE  AXIS. 

In  place  of  the  ordinary  axis  of  the  telescope  represented  in  our  engraving,  we 
sometimes  make  one  resembling  the  Y  axis  of  the  English  Theodolite. 

This  modification  is  desirable,  in  cases  where  this  instrument  is  intended  to  sub¬ 
serve  the  purposes  of  both  level  and  transit. 

In  such  an  arrangement,  the  telescope  is  confined  in  the  axis  with  clips,  by  loosen¬ 
ing  which,  it  may  be  revolved  in  the  wyes,  or  taken  out  and  reversed  end  for  end, 
precisely  like  that  of  the  leveling  instrument. 

The  standards  also  allow  its  transit,  or  complete  revolution  in  a  vertical  direction. 

In  such  an  instrument,  the  adjustment  of  the  wires,  and  level  of  the  telescope,  is 
effected  in  the  same  manner  as  those  of  the  leveling  instrument,  the  tangent  move¬ 
ment  of  the  axis  serving,  instead  of  the  leveling  screws,  to  bring  the  bubble  and 
wires  into  position. 

With  this  modification  of  the  Transit,  we  have  also  frequently  added,  that  of  a 
small  level  bar,  wyes,  &c.,  into  which  the  telescope  may  be  transferred,  making  thus 
a  miniature  leveling  instrument.  v 

This  may  be  placed  upon  the  socket  and  tripod  head  of  the  transit,  and  thus  made 
capable  of  taking  levels  with  a  good  degree  of  accuracy. 

When  desirable,  a  vertical  wheel  may  be  placed  on  the  axis  of  the  telescope  of  this 
instrument,  and  thus  all  the  properties  of  the  English  Theodolite  united  with  those 
of  the  American  Transit. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

THE  LEVELING  INSTRUMENT. 

Of  the  different  varieties  of  the  leveling  instrument,  that  termed  the  Y  Level  has 
been  almost  universally  preferred  by  American  engineers,  on  account  of  the  facility 
of  its  adjustment  and  superior  accuracy. 

Of  these  levels  we  manufacture  four  different  sizes,  having  telescopes  of  sixteen, 
eighteen,  twenty  and  twenty-two  inches  long,  respectively. 

The  engraving  on  page  72,  represents  our  twenty  inch  Level,  that  of  the  sixteen 
inch  telescope  will  be  shown  beyond. 

We  shall  consider  the  several  parts  of  the  instrument  in  detail : 

The  Telescope  has  at  each  end  a  ring  of  bell-metal,  turned  very  truly  and  both  of 
exactly  the  same  diameter;  by  these  it  revolves  in  the  wyes,  or  can  be  at  pleasure 
clamped  in  any  position  when  the  clips  of  the  wyes  are  brought  down  upon  the  rings, 
by  pushing  in  the  tapering  pins. 

The  telescope  has  a  rack  and  pinion  movement  to  both  object  and  eye-glasses,  an 
adjustment  for  centering  the  eye-piece,  shown  at  A  A,  in  the  longitudinal  section  of 
the  telescope,  (page  140,)  and  another  seen  at  C,  C,  for  ensuring  the  accurate  projec¬ 
tion  of  the  object-glass,  in  a  straight  line. 


i 


142  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  00.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 

Both  of  these  are  completely  concealed  from  observation  and  disturbance  by  a 
thin  ring  which  slides  over  them. 

The  telescope  has  also  a  shade  over  the  object-glass,  so  made,  that  whilst  it  may 
be  readily  moved  on  its  slide  over  the  glass,  it  cannot  be  dropped  off  and  lost. 

The  shade  of  our  sixteen  inch  Level,  is  made  to  take  off,  like  that  of  the  Engineer’s 
Transit.  ' 

The  interior  construction  of  the  telescope  will  be  readily  understood  from  Fig.  F, 
which  represents  a  longitudinal  section,  and  exhibits  the  adjustment  which  ensures 
the  accurate  projection  of  the  object-glass  slide. 

As  this  is  peculiar  to  our  instruments,  and  is  always  made  by  the 
maker  so  permanently  as  to  need  no  further  attention  at  the  hands 
of  the  engineer,  we  shall  here  describe  the  means  by  which  it  is 
effected,  somewhat  in  detail. 

The  necessity  for  such  an  adjustment  will  appear,  when  we  state, 
that  it  is  almost  impossible  to  make  a  telescope  tube,  so  that  it 
shall  be  perfectly  straight  on  its  interior  surface. 

Such  being  the  case,  it  is  evident  that  the  object-glass  slide 
s  [>  which  is  fitted  to  this  surface,  and  moves  in  it,  must  partake  of  its 

j  irregularity,  so  that  the  glass  and  the  line  of  collimation  depending 

vl  Lr  upon  it,  though  adjusted  in  one  position  of  the  slide  will  be  thrown 

out  when  the  slide  is  moved  to  a  different  point. 

To  prove  this,  let  any  level  be  selected  which  is  constructed  in 
the  usual  manner,  and  the  line  of  collimation  adjusted  upon  an 
object  taken  as  near  as  the  range  of  the  slide  will  allow;  then  let 
another  be  selected,  as  distant  as  may  be  clearly  seen ;  upon  this 
revolve  the  wires,  and  they  will  almost  invariably  be  found  out  of 
adjustment,  sometimes  to  an  amount  fatal  tc  any  confidence  in  the 
accuracy  of  the  instrument.  The  arrangement  adopted  by  us  to 
correct  this  imperfection,  and  which  so  perfectly  accomplishes  its 
purpose,  is  shown  in  the  adjoining  cut,  Fig.  F. 

Here  are  seen  the  two  bearings  of  the  object-glass  slide,  one 
being  in  the  narrow  bell-metal  ring,  which  slightly  contracts  the 
diameter  of  the  main  tube,  the  other  in  the  small  adjustable  ring, 
also  of  bell-metal,  shown  at  C  C,  and  suspended  by  four  screws  in 
the  middle  of  the  telescope. 

Advantage  is  here  taken  of  the  fact,  that  the  rays  of  light  are 
converged  by  the  object-glass,  so  that  none  are  obstructed  by  the 
contraction  of  the  slide,  except  those  which  diverge,  and  which 
ought  always  to  be  intercepted,  and  absorbed  in  the  blackened 
surface  of  the  interior  of  the  slide. 

Now,  in  such  a  telescope,  the  perfection  of  movement  of  the 
slide,  depends  entirely  upon  its  exterior  surfaces,  at  the  points  of 
the  two  bearings. 

These  surfaces  are  easily  and  accurately  turned,  concentric,  and 
parallel  with  each  other,  and  being  fitted  to  the  rings,  it  only 
remains  necessary  to  adjust  the  position  of  the  smaller  ring,  so  that 
its  centre  will  coincide  with  that  of  the  optical  axis  of  the  object- 
glass. 

When  this  has  been  once  well  done,  no  further  correction  will  be 
necessary,  unless  the  telescope  should  be  seriously  injured. 

The  manner  in  which  the  adjustment  of  the  object-glass  slide  is 
effected,  will  be  considered  when  we  come  to  speak  of  the  other 
adjustments. 

Rack  and  Pinion. — As  seen  in  the  engraving,  our  Level  tele¬ 
scopes  are  usually  furnished  with  the  ordinary  rack  and  pinion 
movement  to  both  object  and  eye  tubes. 

The  advantages  of  an  eye-piece  pinion,  are,  that  the  eye-piece  can 
be  shifted  without  danger  of  disturbing  the  telescope,  and  that  the 
wires  are  more  certainly  brought  into  distiiict  view,  so  as  to  avoid 
effectually  any  error  of  observation,  arising  from  what  is  termed 
the  instrumental  parallax. 

The  position  of  the  pinion  on  the  tube  is  varied  in  different  in¬ 
struments  according  to  the  choice  of  the  engineer. 


M 

Fig.  F. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  143 

We  usually  place  our  object  slide  pinion  on  the  side,  both  of  Transit  telescopes, 
and  of  those  of  the  Level.  The  pinion  of  the  eye  tube  is  always  placed  on  the  side 
of  the  telescope. 

The  Level  or  ground  bubble  tube  is  attached  to  the  under  side  of  the  telescope, 
and  furnished  at  the  different  ends  with  the  usual  movements,  in  both  horizontal  and 
vertical  directions. 

The  aperture  of  the  tube,  through  which  the  glass  vial  appears,  is  about  five  and 
and  one-fourth  inches  long,  being  crossed  at  the  centre  by  a  small  rib  or  bridge, 
which  greatly  strengthens  the  tube. 

The  level  scale  which  extends  over  the  whole  length,  is  graduated  into  spaces  a 
little  coarser  than  tenths  of  an  inch,  and  figured  at  every  fifth  division,  counting  from 
zero  at  the  centre  of  the  bridge;  the  scale  is  set  close  to  the  glass. 

The  bubble  vial  is  made  of  thick  glass  tube,  selected  so  as  to  have  an  even  bore 
from  end  to  end,  and  finely  ground  on  its  upper  interior  surface,  that  the  run  of  tho 
air  bubble  may  be  uniform  throughout  its  whole  range. 

The  sensitiveness  of  a  ground  level,  is  determined  best  by  an  instrument  called  a 
level  tester,  having  at  one  end  two  Y’s  to  hold  the  tube,  and  at  the  other  a  micrometer 
wheel  divided  into  hundredths,  attached  to  the  top  of  a  fine  threaded  screw  which 
raises  the  end  of  the  tester  very  gradually. 

The  number  of  divisions  passed  over  on  the  perimeter  of  the  wheel,  in  carrying  the 
bubble  over  a  tenth  of  the  scale,  is  the  index  of  the  delicacy  of  the  level.  In  the 
tester  which  we  use,  a  movement  of  the  wheel  ten  divisions  to  one  of  the  scale,  indi¬ 
cates  the  degree  of  delicacy  generally  preferred  for  railroad  engineering. 

For  canal  work  practice,  a  more  sensitive  bubble  is  often  desired,  as  for  instance, 
one  of  seven  or  eight  divisions  of  the  wheel,  to  one  of  the  scale. 

The  Wyes  of  our  levels  are  made  large  and  strong,  of  the  best  bell-metal,  and  each 
have  two  nuts,  both  being  adjustable  with  the  ordinary  steel  pin. 

The  clips  are  brought  down  on  the  rings  of  the  telescope  tube  by  the  Y  pins,  which 
are  made  tapering,  so  as  to  clamp  the  rings  very  firmly. 

The  Level  Bar  is  made  round,  of  well  hammered  brass,  and  shaped,  so  as  to  possess 
the  greatest  strength  in  the  parts  most  subject  to  sudden  strains. 

Connected  with  the  level  bar  is  the  head  of  the  tripod  socket. 

The  Tripod  Socket  is  compound;  the  interior  spindle,  upon  which  the  whole  in¬ 
strument  is  supported,  is  made  of  steel,  and  nicely  ground,  so  as  to  turn  evenly  and 
firmly  in  a  hollow  cylinder  of  bell-metal ;  this  again  has  its  exterior  surface  fitted  and 
ground  to  the  main  socket  of  the  tripod  head. 

The  bronze  cylinder  is  held  upon  the  spindle  by  a  washer  and  screw,  the  head  of 
this  having  a  hole  in  its  centre,  through  which  the  string  of  the  plumb  bob  is  passed. 

The  upper  part  of  the  instrument,  with  the  socket,  may  thus  be  detached  from  the 
tripod  head ;  and  this,  also,  as  in  the  case  of  all  our  instruments,  can  be  unscrewed 
from  the  legs,  so  that  both  may  be  conveniently  packed  in  the  box. 

A  little  under  the  upper  parallel  plate  of  the  tripod  head,  and  in  the  main  socket, 
is  a  screw  which  can  be  moved  into  a  corresponding  crease,  turned  on  the  outside  of 
the  hollow  cylinder,  and  thus  made  to  hold  the  instrument  in  the  tripod,  when  it  is 
carried  upon  the  shoulders. 

It  will  be  seen  from  the  engraving,  that  the  arrangement  just  described  allows  long 
sockets,  and  yet  brings  the  whole  instrument  down  as  closely  as  possible  to  the  tripod 
head,  both  objects  of  great  importance  in  the  construction  of  any  instrument. 

The  Tripod  Head  has  the  same  plates  and  leveling  screws  as  that  described  in  the 
account  of  the  Engineer’s  Transit;  the  tangent  screw,  however,  is  commonly  single. 

For  our  sixteen  inch  Level  we  make  a  smaller  tripod  head,  resembling  that  used 
with  the  lighter  Engineer’s  Transit. 

THE  ADJUSTMENTS. 

Having  now  completed  the  description  of  the  different  parts  of  the  Leveling  Instru¬ 
ment,  we  are  ready  to  proceed  with  their  adjustments,  and  shall  begin  with  that  of 
the  object-slide,  which,  although  always  made  by  the  maker  so  permanently  as  to 
need  no  further  attention  at  the  hands  of  the  engineer,  unless  in  cases  of  derange¬ 
ment  by  accident,  is  yet  peculiar  to  our  instruments  and  therefore  not  familiar  to 
many  engineers. 

To  Adjust  the  Object  Slide. — The  maker  selects  an  object  as  distant  as  may  be 
distinctly  observed,  and  upon  it  adjusts  the  line  of  collimation,  in  the  manner  here- 


144  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


after  described,  making  the  centre  of  the  wires  to  revolve  without  passing  either  above 
or  below  the  point  or  line  assumed. 

In  this  position,  the  slide  will  be  drawn  in  nearly  as  far  as  the  telescope  tube  will 
allow. 

He  then,  with  the  pinion  head,  moves  out  the  slide  until  an  object,  distant  about 
ten  or  fifteen  feet,  is  brought  clearly  into  view ;  again  revolving  the  telescope  in  the 
Y’s  he  observes  whether  the  wires  will  reverse  upon  this  second  object. 

Should  this  happen  to  be  the  case,  he  will  assume,  that  as  the  line  of  collimation  is 
in  adjustment  for  these  two  distances,  it  will  be  so  for  all  intermediate  ones,  since  the 
bearings  of  the  slide  are  supposed  to  be  true,  and  their  planes  parallel  with  each  other. 

If,  however,  as  is  most  probable,  either  or  both  wires  fail  to  reverse  upon  the  second 
point,  he  must  then,  by  estimation,  remove  half  the  error  by  the  screws  C  C,  (fig. 
F,)  at  right  angles  to  the  hair  sought  to  be  corrected,  remembering  at  the  same  time, 
that  on  account  of  the  inversion  of  the  eye-piece,  he  must  move  the  slide  in  the  direc¬ 
tion  which  apparently  increases  the  error.  When  both  wires  have  thus  been  treated 
in  succession,  the  line  of  collimation  is  adjusted  on  the  near  object,  and  the  telescope 
again  brought  upon  the  most  distant  point ;  here  the  tube  is  again  revolved,  the  re¬ 
version  of  the  wires  upon  the  object  once  more  tested,  and  the  correction,  if  necessary, 
made  in  precisely  the  same  manner. 

He  proceeds  thus,  until  the  wires  will  reverse  upon  both  objects  in  succession;  the 
line  of  collimation  will  then  be  in  adjustment  at  these  and  all  intermediate  points, 
and  by  bringing  the  screw  heads,  in  the  course  of  the  operation,  to  a  firm  bearing  upon 
the  washers  beneath  them,  the  adjustable  ring  will  be  fastened  so  as  for  many  years 
to  need  no  further  adjustment. 

When  this  has  been  completed,  the  thin  brass  ferule  is  slipped  over  the  outside  ring, 
concealing  the  screw  heads,  and  avoiding  the  danger  of  their  disturbance  by  an  inex¬ 
perienced  operator. 

In  effecting  this  adjustment  it  is  always  best  to  bring  the  wires  into  the  centre  of 
the  field  of  view,  by  moving  the  little  screws  A  A  (fig.  F,)  working  in  the  ring  which 
embraces  the  eye-piece  tube. 

Should  the  engineer  desire  to  make  this  adjustment,  it  will  be  necessary  to  remove 
the  bubble  tube,  in  order  that  the  small  screw  immediately  above  its  scale  may  be 
operated  upon  with  the  screw  driver. 

The  adjustment  we  have  now  given  is  preparatory  to  those  which  follow,  and  are 
common  to  all  leveling  instruments  of  recent  construction,  and  are  all  that  tb*  engineer 

ill  have  to  do  with  in  using  our  own  instruments.  What  is  still  necessary  then  is — 

1.  To  adjust  the  line  of  collimation ,  or  in  other  words,  to  bring  both  wires  into  the 
optical  axis,  so  that  their  point  of  intersection  will  remain  on  any  given  point,  during 
an  entire  revolution  of  the  telescope. 

2.  To  bring  the  level  bubble  parallel  with  the  bearings  of  the  Y  rings,  and  with  the 
longitudinal  axis  of  the  telescope. 

3.  To  adjust  the  wyes ,  or  to  bring  the  bubble  into  a  position  at  right  angles  to  the 
vertical  axis  of  the  instrument. 

To  Adjust  the  Line  of  Collimation,  set  the  tripod  firmly,  remove  the  Y  pins  from 
the  clips,  so  as  to  allow  the  telescope  to  turn  freely,  clamp  the  instrument  to  the  tripod 
head,  and  by  the  leveling  and  tangent  screws,  bring  either  of  the  wires  upon  a  clearly 
marked  edge  of  some  object,  distant  from  one  to  five  hundred  feet. 

Then  with  the  hand  carefully  turn  the  telescope  half  way  around,  so  that  the  same 
wire  is  compared  with  the  object  assumed. 

Should  it  be  found  above  or  below,  bring  it  half  way  back  by  moving  the  capstan 
head  screws  at  right  angles  to  it,  remembering  always  the  inverting  property  of  the 
eye-piece;  now  bring  the  wire  again  upon  the  object  and  repeat  the  first  operation 
until  it  will  reverse  correctly. 

Proceed  in  the  same  manner  with  the  other  wire  until  the  adjustment  is  completed. 

Should  both  wires  be  much  out,  it  will  be  well  to  bring  them  nearly  correct  before 
either  is  entirely  adjusted. 

When  this  is  effected,  slip  off  the  covering  of  the  eye-piece  centering  screws,  shown 
in  the  sectional  view  (fig.  B,)  at  A  A,  and  move  each  pair  in  succession  with  a  small 
screw  driver,  until  the  wires  are  brought  into  the  centre  of  the  field  of  view. 

The  inversion  of  the  eye-piece  does  not  effect  this  operation,  and  the  screws  are 
moved  direct. 

To  test  the  correctness  of  the  centering,  revolve  the  telescope,  and  observe  whether 
it  appears  to  shift  the  position  of  an  object. 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  k  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  145 

Should  any  movement  be  perceived,  the  centering  is  not  perfectly  effected. 

It  may  here  be  repeated,  that  in  all  telescopes  the  position  and  adjustment  of  the 
line  of  collimation  depends  upon  that  of  the  object-glass ;  and  therefore,  that  the 
movement  of  the  eye-piece  does  not  eff  xt  the  adjustment  of  the  wires  in  any  respect. 

When  the  centering  has  been  once  effected  it  remains  permanent,  the  cover  being 
slipped  over  to  conceal  and  protect  it  from  derangement  at  the  hands  of  the  curious, 
or  inexperienced  operator.  , 

To  Adjust  the  Levee  Bubble. — Clamp  the  instrument  over  either  pair  of  leveling 
screws,  and  bring  the  bubble  into  the  centre  of  the  tube. 

Now  turn  the  telescope  in  the  wyes,  so  as  to  bring  the  level  tube  on  either  side  of 
the  centre  of  the  bar.  Should  the  bubble  run  to  the  end  it  would  show  that  the  vertical 
plane,  passing  through  the  centre  of  the  bubble,  was  not  parallel  to  that  drawn  through 
the  axis  of  the  telescope  rings. 

To  rectify  the  error,  bring  it  by  estimation  half  way  back,  with  the  capstan  head 
screws,  which  are  set  in  either  side  of  the  level  holder,  placed  usually  at  the  object 
end  of  the  tube. 

Again  bring  the  level  tube  over  the  centre  of  the  bar,  and  adjust  the  bubble  in  the 
centre,  turn  the  level  to  either  side,  and  if  necessary,  repeat  the  correction  until  the 
bubble  will  keep  its  position,  when  the  tube  is  turned  half  an  inch  or  more,  to  either 
side  of  the  centre  of  the  bar. 

The  necessity  for  this  operation  arises  from  the  fact,  that  when  the  telescope  is  re¬ 
versed  end  for  end  in  the  wyes  in  the  other  and  principal  adjustment  of  the  bubble, 
we  are  not  certain  of  placing  the  level  tube  in  the  same  vertical  plane,  and  therefore, 
it  would  be  almost  impossible  to  effect  the  adjustment  without  a  lateral  correction. 

Having  now,  in  great  measure,  removed  the  preparatory  difficulties,  we  proceed  to 
make  the  level  tube  parallel  with  the  bearings  of  the  Y  rings. 

To  do  this,  bring  the  bubble  into  the  centre  with  the  leveling  screws,  and  then 
without  jarring  the  instrument,  take  the  telescope  out  of  the  wyes  and  reverse  it  end 
for  end.  Should  the  bubble  run  to  either  end,  lower  that  end,  or  what  is  equivalent, 
raise  the  other  by  turning  the  small  adjusting  nuts,  on  one  end  of  the  level,  until  by 
estimation  half  the  correction  is  made ;  again  bring  the  bubble  into  the  centre  and 
repeat  the  whole  operation,  until  the  reversion  can  be  made  without  causing  any 
change  in  the  bubble. 

It  would  be  well  to  test  the  lateral  adjustment,  and  make  such  correction  as  may  be 
necessary  in  that,  before  the  horizontal  adjustment  is  entirely  completed. 

To  Adjust  the  Wyes. — Having  effected  the  previous  adjustments,  it  remains  now 
to  describe  that  of  the  wyes,  or,  more  precisely,  that  which  brings  the  level  into  a 
position  at  right  angles,  to  the  vertical  axis,  so  that  the  bubble  will  remain  in  the 
centre  during  an  entire  revolution  of  the  instrument. 

To  do  this,  bring  the  level  tube  directly  over  the  centre  of  the  bar,  and  clamp  the 
telescope  firmly  in  the  wyes,  placing  it  as  before,  over  two  of  the  leveling  screws,  un¬ 
clamp  the  socket,  level  the  bubble,  and  turn  the  instrument  half  way  around,  so  that 
the  level  bar  may  occupy  the  same  position  with  respect  to  the  leveling  screws  beneath. 

Should  the  bubble  run  to  either  end,  bring  it  half  way  back  by  the  Y  nuts  on  either 
end  of  the  bar;  now  move  the  telescope  over  the  other  set  of  leveling  screws,  bring 
the  bubble  again  into  the  centre  and  proceed  precisely  as  above  described,  changing  to 
each  pair  of  screws,  successively,  until  the  adjustment  is  very  nearly  perfected,  when 
it  may  be  completed  over  a  single  pair. 

The  object  of  this  approximate  adjustment,  is  to  bring  the  upper  parallel  plate  of 
the  tripod  head  into  a  position  as  nearly  horizontal  as  possible,  in  order  that  no  es¬ 
sential  error  may  arise,  in  case  the  level,  when  reversed,  is  not  brought  precisely  to 
its  former  situation.  When  the  level  has  been  thus  completely  adjusted,  if  the 
instrument  is  properly  made,  and  the  sockets  well  fitted  to  each  other,  and  the  tripod 
head,  the  bubble  will  reverse  over  each  pair  of  screws  in  any  position. 

Should  the  engineer  be  unable  to  make  it  perform  correctly  he  should  examine  the 
outside  socket  carefully  to  see  that  it  sets  securely  in  the  main  socket,  and  also  notice 
that  the  clamp  does  not  bear  upon  the  ring  which  it  encircles. 

When  these  are  correct,  and  the  error  is  still  manifested,  it  will,  probably,  be  in  the 
imperfection  of  the  interior  spindle. 

After  the  adjustments  of  the  level  have  been  effected,  aud  the  bubble  remains  in 
the  centre,  in  any  position  of  the  socket,  the  engineer  should  carefully  turn  the  tele¬ 
scope  in  the  wyes,  and  sighting  upon  the  end  of  the  level,  which  has  the  horizontal 
adjustments  along  each  side  of  the  wye,  make  the  tube  as  nearly  vertical  as  possible. 

10 


\ 

146  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


When  this  has  been  secured,  he  may  observe,  through  the  telescope,  the  vertical 
edge  of  a  building,  noticing  if  the  vertical  hair  is  parallel  to  it ;  if  not,  he  should 
loosen  two  of  the  crosswire  screws  at  right  angles  to  each  other,  and  with  the  hand 
on  these,  turn  the  ring  inside,  until  the  hair  is  made  vertical ;  the  line  of  collimation 
must  then  be  corrected  again,  and  the  adjustments  of  the  level  will  be  complete. 

\ 


TO  USE  THE  LEVEL. 


When  using  the  instrument  the  legs  must  be  set  firmly  into  the  ground,  and  neither 
the  hands  nor  person  of  the  operator  be  allowed  to  touch  them,  the  bubble  should 
then  be  brought  over  each  pair  of  leveling  screws  successively,  and  leveled  in  each 
position,  any  correction  being  made  in  the  adjustments  that  may  appear  necessary. 

Care  should  be  taken  to  bring  the  wires  precisely  in  focus,  and  the  object  distinctly 
in  view,  so  that  all  errors  of  parallax  may  be  avoided. 

This  error  is  seen  when  the  eye  of  an  observer  is  moved  to  either  side  of  the  centre 
of  the  eye-piece  of  a  telescope,  in  which  the  foci  of  the  object  and  eye-glasses  are  not 
brought  precisely  upon  the  cross-wires  and  object;  in  such  a  case,  the  wires  will  ap¬ 
pear  to  move  over  the  surface,  and  the  observation  will  be  liable  to  inaccuracy. 

In  all  instances,  the  wires  and  object  should  be  brought  into  view  so  perfectly,  that 
the  spider  lines  will  appear  to  be  fastened  to  the  surface,  and  will  remain  in  that  posi¬ 
tion  however  the  eye  is  moved. 

If  the  socket  of  the  instrument  becomes  so  firmly  set  in  the  tripod  head  as  to  be 
difficult  of  removal  in  the  ordinary  way,  the  engineer  should  place  the  palm  of  his 
hand  under  the  wye  nuts  at  each  end  of  the  bar,  and  give  a  sudden  upward  shock  to 
the  bar,  taking  care  also  to  hold  his  hands  so  as  to  grasp  it  the  moment  it  is  free. 


WEIGHT  OF  LEVELING  INSTRUMENTS. 

The  average  weights  of  the  different  sizes  of  this  instrument,  exclusive  of  the  tripod 


legs,  are  as  follows  : 

16-inch  telescope . . . 11J  lbs. 

18-inch  do . ...12  lbs. 

20-inch  do . . . 12£  lbs. 

22-inch  do . 13  lbs. 


THE  BUILDER’S  LEVEL. 

This  instrument,  shown  in  the  engraving,  is  of  much  more  simple  and  compact 
construction  than  those  already  described. 

It  has  a  telescope  of  from  eleven  to  twelve  inches  long,  provided  with  the  usual 
facilities  for  adjustment,  resting  upon  the  ends  of  the  bar  by  two  similar  faces  of  the 
octagonal  shaped  prisms,  which  surround  the  tube  at  either  end. 

The  telescope  is  held  on  the  bar  by  a  stout  screw  at  each  end  ;  the  heads  of  these 
screws  are  shown  on  the  under  side  of  the  bar,  and  are  bored  to  admit  the  usual  ad¬ 
justing  pin. 

A  strong  spiral  spring  is  placed  in  a  recess  in  the  upper  side  of  each  end  of  the  bar, 
and  serves,  in  connection  with  the  screws,  to  effect  the  third  adjustment  of  the  Level. 

These  springs  are  of  course  removed,  while  the  other  adjustments  are  in  progress, 
and  the  telescope  allowed  to  rest  directly  upon  the  bar. 

The  level  is  placed  above  the  telescope  and  adjustable  at  either  end  by  two  nuts 
as  shown. 

The  instrument  is  best  used  upon  the  adjusting  tripod,  as  represented,  but  may  also 
be  placed  upon  a  simple  ball  spindle  and  used  in  connection  with  the  leveling  socket, 
shown  in  our  account  of  the  Solar  Compass. 

The  adjustments  of  this  instrument  are  made  in  the  same  order,  and  almost  precisely 
in  the  same  manner,  as  those  of  the  Engineers’  Level,  described  on  pages  142  and  143, 
and  need  but  a  brief  description. 

(1.)  The  line  of  collimation  is  adjusted,  by  making  the  wires  reverse  upon  any  given 
point,  when  the  telescope  is  turned  half  way  around,  so  as  to  rest  upon  opposite  faces 
of  the  prisms. 

(2.)  The  Level  is  adjusted,  by  turning  the  telescope  end  for  end  upon  the  bar,  the 
bubble  being  made  to  come  to  the  centre  in  both  positions. 

(3.)  The  bubble  is  brought  into  a  position  at  right  angles  to  the  vertical  axis,  (the 
adjustment  of  the  wyes  in  ordinary  levels,)  by  releasing  or  compressing  the  springs 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  A  00.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  141 


at  the  ends  of  the  bar,  so  that  the  bubble  will  come  into  the  centre,  as  the  instrument 
is  turned  upon  its  spindle,  over  both  pairs  of  leveling  screws  in  succession. 

The  weight  of  this  level,  with  adjusting  tripod,  excluding  the  tripod  legs,  is  less 
than  four  pounds. 

TRENCH  LEVELING  INSTRUMENT. 

No.  1008  represents  a  very  simple  form  of  leveling  instrument,  well  suited  for  giving 
the  levels  in  ditching,  or  for  any  other  occasions  where  very  great  accuracy  is  not 
required.  It  consists  of  a  straight  level  bulb,  about  ten  inches  long,  mounted  on  a 
straight  bar  of  brass,  to  the  ends  of  which,  and  at  right  angles  to  it,  two  upright 
pieces  of  brass  are  attached ;  near  the  top  of  these  uprights,  a  horizontal  cut  is  made 
in  each,  exactly  at  the  same  distance  from  the  main  bar.  The  bar  with  level  and 
and  sights  is  attached  by  a  joint  to  a  second  bar  of  the  same  width,  but  much  shorter. 
Through  the  second  bar,  and  on  the  opposite  end  of  it  from  the  joint,  a  screw  with 
milled  head  passes  and  presses  against  the  under  side  of  the  main  bar.  To  the  second 
bar,  a  ball  and  socket  joint  is  screwed,  to  which  a  tripod  or  jacob-staff  can  be  fitted. 

After  placing  the  instrument  in  position  and  leveling  as  near  as  possible  by  the  ball 
and  socket,  it  is  accurately  leveled  by  turning  the  milled  head  of  the  screw,  which 
raises  or  lowers  the  main  plate  carrying  the  level  and  sights. 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 

HAND  LEVELS. 

In  preliminary  surveys  the  engineer  finds  it  very  convenient  to  have  a  pocket  in¬ 
strument  of  some  kind,  for  ascertaining  approximately  the  relative  levels  of  two  distant 

points. 

No.  1016  represents  one  of  these  instruments.  It  consists  of  a  square  piece  of  brass, 
with  stems  attached  to  two  of  the  opposite  corners;  to  one  of  these  stems  a  ball  and 
socket  is  attached,  having  a  small  handle;  to  the  other  stem  a  screw  with  heavy  head. 
A  triangular  cut  is  made  through  the  square  (see  unshaded  part  of  cut);  a  piece  of 
fine  plate  looking  glass  is  placed  on  the  square  and  secured  to  it  by  a  metal  rim  and 
screws;  the  part  of  the  glass  opposite  the  triangular  cut  has  the  silvering  taken  off; 
a  fine  line  is  drawn  from  corner  to  corner,  across  the  face  of  the  glass,  cutting  the 
base  of  the  triangular  opening  at  right  angles. 

To  use  it,  take  it  by  the  handle  above  the  ball  and  socket,  and  hold  the  looking 
glass  side  about  eighteen  inches  from  the  eye  ;  raise  and  lower  the  hand  until  the 
eye  is  seen  on  the  line  in  the  looking-glass,  then  run  the  eye  along  the  line  to  the 
opening,  and  all  objects  on  a  level  with  the  eye  will  be  cut  by  the  line. 

LOOK’S  LEVEL. 

Another  form  of  pocket  level,  called  Lock's  Hand  Level,  is  represented  by  No.  1017. 
It  is  a  brass  or  German  silver  tube,  five  inches  long  by  three-fourths  of  an  inch  in 
diameter.  One  end  has  a  draw  tube,  with  half  of  a  magnifying  lens  fitted  in  it;  the 
other  end  is  either  open  or  fitted  with  a  plain  piece  of  plate  glass;  near  this  end  there 
is  an  opening  cut  in  the  tube,  and  over  it  a  spirit  level  is  carefull}'  adjusted ;  the  frame 
which  holds  the  spirit  level  has  an  opening  cut  in  it  directly  over  the  opening  in  the 
tube,  also  one  on  the  outside  of  the  frame ;  directly  under  the  opening  in  the  tube  a 
very  small  rectangular  prism  is  adjusted,  which  occupies  a  little  less  than  one-half 
the  diameter  of  the  tube ;  a  fine  line  is  drawn  across  the  middle  of  the  level.  When 
the  instrument  is  used,  the  e}re  is  placed  at  the  small  hole  in  the  end,  and  the  draw 
tube  pulled  out  until  the  line  on  the  level  is  seen  distinctly  through  the  half  lens  and 
the  prism  ;  now  raise  or  lower  very  carefully  the  end  of  the  tube  which  has  the  level 
on  it  until  the  centre  of  the  bubble  stands  directly  over  the  line,  then  all  points  at  a 
distance  which  are  seen  through  the  vacant  half  of  the  tube  and  cut  by  the  line,  are  on 
the  same  level  as  the  observer’s  eye.  After  a  little  practice,  levels  of  considerable 
extent  can  be  taken  with  either  accurately. 


148  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


THE  CLYNOMETER. 

This  instrument  is  used  for  ascertaining  the  angle  of  dip  in  rocks  and  the  slope  of 
embankments  and  excavations.  It  is  a  spirit  level  attached  to  an  oblong  bar  of  brass, 
which  is  hinged  to  a  second  bar  of  the  same  size;  to  the  second  bar  a  graduated  arc 
is  attached,  which  passes  through  a  notch  with  clamp  and  screw  in  the  side  of  the 
first  bar.  To  use  the  instrument,  clean  a  place  upon  the  rock  parallel  with  the  dip  or 
inclination  of  the  strata;  then  place  the  flat  surface  of  the  second  bar  on  it,  and  raise 
the  bar  with  level  until  the  bubble  stands  in  the  middle  of  the  tube;  then  tighten  the 
clamp  screw,  and  the  division  of  the  arc  which  is  on  a  line  with  the  under  side  of 
that  bar,  is  the  angle  of  inclination.  For  taking  the  inclination  of  long  lines,  sights 
are  attached  to  the  bar  which  has  the  level  on  it. 

L.  0.  STEPHENS’  PATENT  COMBINATION  RULE. 

The  engravings  illustrate  an  instrument  invented  by  L.  C.  Stephens,  and  patented 
by  him  January  12th,  1858,  which  combines  in  itself  a  Carpenter’s  Rule,  Spirit 
Level,  Square,  Plumb,  Bevel,  Indicator,  Brace  Scale,  Draughting  Scale,  T  Square, 
Protractor,  Right  Angle  Triangle,  and  with  a  straight  edge  can  be  used  as  a 
Parallel  Ruler,  all  the  parts  of  which  in  their  separate  application  are  perfectly 
reliable. 

It  is  made  of  boxwood,  with  one  joint,  and  is  well  protected  with  heavy  brass 
binding.  The  plate  which  protects  the  glass,  being  put  on  with  screws,  can  be  re¬ 
moved,  should  it  by  accident  become  necessary  to  insert  a  new  glass. 

When  folded  it  is  six  inches  long,  one  and  three-eighths  inches  wide,  and  three- 
eighths  of  an  inch  thick,  and  weighs  the  same  as  an  ordinary  broad  bound  rule.  The 
cuts  (which  are  exactly  half  size,)  represent  the  rule  in  three  positions :  first,  as  a 
Spirit  Level;  second,  as  a  Try-square  Level  and  Plumb;  third,  as  a  Clynometer,  or 
Slope  Level ,  in  which  it  is  represented  in  taking  the  angle  or  inclination  of  an  inclined 
plane — the  top  of  a  desk,  for  instance. 

The  steel  blade  folds  like  a  knife-blade  into  the  part  which  holds  it.  On  one  side 
of  the  blade  is  graduated,  and  the  figures  5,  10,  15,  20  to  45,  denote  the  degree  of  the 
angles  which  are  formed  by  opening  the  legs  of  the  rule,  the  blade  sliding  through 
the  groove  in  the  end  of  the  leg. 

When  extended  to  45  of  course  the  angle  is  45°,  and  the  blade  has  fallen  27J°  from 
a  right  angle  or  square.  Hence  the  angles  formed  by  the  leg  and  blade  decrease  just 
one  half  as  fast  as  the  angles  formed  by  opening  the  legs  of  the  rule  increase.  The 
upper  edge  of  the  other  side  of  the  blade  is  also  graduated  into  inches  and  eighths, 
and  numbered  l,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  the  graduations  decreasing  towards  the  end  of  the  blade. 
This  scale  shows  the  pitch  to  the  foot.  Thus  in  the  cut,  which  represents  the  rule 
as  a  Slope  Level ,  the  angle  indicated  is  9°,  and  the  pitch  of  that  angle  or  inclination, 
as  shown  on  the  other  side  of  the  blade,  is  seven-eighths  and  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch 
on  a  base  line  of  six  inches ,  or  one  and  seven-eighths  inches  on  a  base  of  one  foot.  By 
opening  the  rule  15°,  the  scale  on  the  other  side  shows  a  pitch  of  one  and  five-eighths 
inches,  in  six  inches,  or  two  and  three-eighths  inches  in  a  foot. 

The  utility  of  these  scales  will  be  readily  seen  by  those  who  have  occasion  to  as¬ 
certain  the  angle  or  pitch  to  the  foot  of  any  inclined  plane.  The  plumber,  for  instance, 
with  this  instrument  can  ascertain  not  only  the  angle,  but  the  pitch  to  the  foot  of 
any  roof. 

Engineers  and  artillerymen  find  the  instrument  invaluable,  as  by  its  aid  any  gun 
can  be  instantly  adjusted  to  the  proper  degree  of  elevation. 

The  inner  edge  of  the  leg  which  holds  the  glass  is  also  graduated  to  measure  the 
angles,  which  are  formed  by  turning  the  blade  in  the  leg  which  holds  it,  which  ar¬ 
rangement  is  especially  adapted  to  iron  planers.  These  degrees  show  how  much  the 
right  angle  is  reduced  as  the  blade  falls  from  that  position.  The  machinist  desires  to 
reduce  a  piece  of  iron  to  a  certain  bevel,  but  instead  of  going  to  the  planer  “  to  cut 
and  try,"  as  is  usually  done,  he  finds  the  degree  of  the  angle  he  wants  to  apply  the 
instrument  to  his  pattern  ;  then  by  turning  the  index  of  the  planer  to  the  proper  de¬ 
gree,  he  can  cut  the  exact  angle  required.  To  apply  it  to  a  pattern,  open  the  leg 
which  holds  the  glass  (keeping  the  blade  down  on  the  bottom  of  the  groove)  until  the 
blade  and  leg  in  which  it  turns  fit  two  sides  of  it,  and  observe  the  degree  indicated  by 
the  blade.  If  at  40,  then  as  before  explained  we  know  the  pattern  is  just  20°  less 
than  a  right  angle  or  square,  and  to  plane  a  piece  of  the  same  angle  as  the  pattern, 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  149 


We  place  the  index  of  the  planer  at  20°,  the  pattern  being  an  angle  of  70°,  a^d  \0n-‘ 
2u°=90 — a  right  angle  or  square.  This  application  of  the  instrument,  all  mechanics 
who  understand  it  greatly  admire.  The  pattern-maker,  by  using  this  tool,  saves  the 
machinist  considerable  labor,  both  working  by  the  same  degree. 

The  surveyor  will  perceive  its  adaptation  in  the  laying  of  angles.  Open  the  part 
which  holds  the  level  until  the  end  of  the  blade  rests  squarely  upon  the  inside  of  it, 
and  we  have  a  T  Square.  In  this  position  it  is  also  a  Right-Angle  Triangle,  and 
with  the  aid  of  a  straight-edge  can  be  used  as  a  Parallel  Ruler.  One  side  of  the 
blade  is  divided  into  twelfths,  also  the  inside  edge  of  the  leg  which  holds  it,  which 
arrangement  constitutes  the  Brace  Scale.  Place  one  point  of  the  dividers  on  the 
third  inch  of  the  blade  (while  the  rule  is  in  form  of  a  square,)  and  extend  the  other 
over  to  the  third  inch  on  the  scale  of  twelfths  on  the  inside  edge  of  the  leg,  and  the 
distance  between  the  two  points  of  the  dividers  applied  to  the  scale  of  twelfths  on  the 
rule  will  give  the  length  of  the  brace  in  feet  and  inches;  inches  and  twelfths  on  the 
rule  representing  feet  and  inches  in  the  brace,  of  course. 

The  adaptation  of  this  instrument  to  the  measurement  of  height  and  distance  is  ob¬ 
vious  from  the  following  illustrations :  A  carpenter  goes  into  the  forest  to  find  a  tree 
which  will  furnish  forty  feet  in  length,  of  clear  timber.  He  finds  one  which  seems 
adapted  to  his  purpose,  but  a  bend  or  limb  near  the  top  leaves  a  doubt  in  his  mind  in 
regard  to  it.  He  now  takes  the  instrument  from  his  pocket  and  measures  off  forty  feet 
in  any  direction  from  the  tree,  and  marks  the  point  where  the  measurement  terminates; 
then  fixes  the  leg  which  holds  the  level  at  an  angle  of  4F°  and  places  the  instrument 
upon  this  point,  (taking  care  to  keep  it  level ;)  then  sights  along  tbc  leg  into  the  tree, 
and  if  the  line  of  sight  strikes  below  the  bend  or  limb,  he  is  safe  in  cutting  the  tree. 
To  measure  the  height  of  a  pole,  tree,  or  house,  adjust  the  rule  to  an  angle  of  45°, 
and  recede  from  the  object  until  a  line  of  sight  along  the  base  of  the  instrument  will 
strike  the  bottom  of  the  object,  and  another  through  the  raised  leg  will  strike  the  top 
of  it;  then  measure  the  distance  from  the  point  where  the  instrument  stands  to  the 
foot  of  the  object,  and  you  have  the  elevation.  (If  necessary  to  elevate  the  instrument, 
the  height  from  the  bottom  of  the  object  must  be  added  to  give  the  true  result.)  To 
measure  the  distance  to  any  inaccessible  object,  the  width  of  a  river,  for  instance,  lay 
off  a  base  line  of  any  convenient  length,  adjust  the  rule  to  a  square  and  place  the  base 
of  the  instrument  upon  the  line,  so  that  a  line  of  sight  from  the  blade  will  strike  the 
object,  and  mark  the  point  upon  the  line  where  you  commence  operations ;  then 
change  the  instrument  to  an  angle  of  45°,  and  move  it  along  the  £iven  base  line  until 
the  line  of  sight  from  the  raised  leg  strikes  the  object  as  in  the  former  position;  then 
measure  the  distance  from  the  joint  of  the  instrument  to  the  point  previously  marked, 
and  you  have  the  distance  to  the  object.  The  slotted  screw  which  passes  through 
the  end  of  the  leg  which  holds  the  level  is  used  in  adjusting  the  square,  should  it 
wear  so  as  to  require  it.  With  a  small  screw-driver  the  blade  may  be  raised  or  de¬ 
pressed  by  turning  this  screw  either  way.  The  square  is  strong,  firm  and  reliable, 
there  being  a  heavy  metal  stop  to  prevent  its  going  back  too  far,  while  it  is  held 
firmly  in  place,  while  in  use,  by  a  broad  metal  strap  through  which  the  screw  passes. 

Carpenters,  joiners,  ship-builders,  draughtsmen,  engineers,  and  all  classes  of  me¬ 
chanics  are  unanimous  in  the  approval  of  this  device,  and  the  symmetrical  arrange¬ 
ment  of  its  parts. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 

GENERAL  MATTERS, 

TRIPODS, 

In  the  tripods  of  all  our  instruments,  the  upper  part  of  the  leg  is  flattened,  and  fitted 
closely  in  the  surfaces  of  the  brass  check  pieces. 

The  cheeks  arc  made  very  broad,  and  give  a  firm  hold  upon  the  leg,  which  may  be 
tightened  at  any  time  by  screwing  up  the  bolts  which  pass  through  the  top  of  the 
legs :  this  is  especially  necessary  after  the  surface  of  the  wood  has  been  much  worn. 

The  legs  are  round,  and  taper  in  each  direction  from  a  swell,  turned  about  one-third 
the  way  down,  from  the  head  to  the  point. 


150  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  00.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


The  point,  or  shoe,  is  a  tapering  brass  ferule,  having  an  iron  end ;  it  is  cemented, 
and  riveted  firmly  to  the  wood. 

The  legs  of  all  our  tripods  are  about  four  feet  eight  inches  long,  from  head  to  point. 
We  make  three  sizes  of  tripods,  which  we  will  now  separately  describe. 

1.  The  Compass  Tripod,  seen  in  part  in  the  cut  of  the  Vernier  Transit,  and  having 
the  brass  plate  to  which  the  cheeks  are  attached,  three  and  three-fourth  inches  in 
diameter,  and  legs  which  are  about  one  inch  at  the  top,  one  and  three-eighths  at  the 
swell,  and  seven-eighths  at  the  bottom. 

The  legs  are  usually  made  of  cherry,  sometimes  of  mahogany,  and  the  tripod  is  used 
with  the  various  kinds  of  compasses,  and  with  the  vernier  transit. 

2.  The  Medium  Sized  Tripod,  shown  with  the  Surveyor’s  Transit,  and  having  a  plate 
of  same  diameter  as  above  but  with  the  cheeks  made  considerably  broader,  by  curving 
at  each  end;  the  legs  being  also  about  an  eighth  of  an  inch  larger  throughout. 

This  tripod  has  mahogany  legs,  and  is  used  with  the  surveyor’s  transit,  the  light 
engineer’s  transit,  and  the  sixteen  inch  level. 

3.  The  Heavy  Tripod,  shown  with  the  Engineer’s  Transit,  having  a  brass  plate  of 
four  and  one-fourth  inches  diameter,  with  extended  cheek  pieces,  and  with  legs  one 
and  three-eighths  of  an  inch  at  the  top,  one  and  three-fourths  at  the  swell,  and  one 
and  an  eighth  at  the  point. 

The  heavy  size  has  also  mahogany  legs,  and  is  used  with  the  engineer’s  transit,  and 
larger  leveling  instruments. 

LACQUERING. 

All  instruments  are  covered  with  a  thin  varnish,  made  by  dissolving  gum  shellac 
in  alcohol,  and  applied  when  the  work  is  heated. 

As  long  as  this  varnish  remains,  the  brass  surface  will  be  kept  from  tarnishing,  and 
the  engineer,  by  taking  care  not  to  rub  his  instrument  with  a  dusty  cloth,  or  to  expose 
it  to  the  friction  of  his  clothes,  can  preserve  its  original  freshness  for  a  long  time. 

BRONZE  FINISH. 

Instead  of  the  ordinary  brass  finish,  some  engineer’s  prefer  instruments  blackened 
or  bronzed.  This  is  done  with  acid  preparation,  after  the  work  has  been  polished, 
and  gives  the  instrument  a  very  showy  appearance,  besides  being  thought  advantageous 
on  account  of  not  reflecting  the  rays  of  the  sun  as  much  as  the  ordinary  finish. 

LEVELING  RODS. 

The  three  kinds  used  by  American  engineer’s  are  all  sliding  rods,  divided  into 
hundredths  of  a  foot  and  reading  by  verniers  to  thousandths. 

PHILADELPHIA  ROD. 

The  leveling  rod  known  as  the  Philadelphia  Rod,  is  formed  of  two  strips  of  light 
baywood  or  mahogany,  each  three-fourths  of  an  inch  by  one  and  three-fonrths  inches 
by  six  and  one-half  feet  long,  connected  together  by  two  metal  sleeves,  the  upper  one 
of  which  has  a  clamping  screw,  for  fixing  the  rod  in  its  position  when  the  two  parts 
are  separated  or  extended,  beyond  six  feet  six  inches. 

Both  sides  of  the  back  rod  and  one  side  of  tjie  front  rod  are  planed  out  one-sixteenth 
of  an  inch  below  the  edges.  These  depressed  surfaces  are  all  painted  white,  and  divi¬ 
ded  into  feet,  and  tenths  of  a  foot.  T-he  front  rod  reads  from  the  foot  upward  ;  both 
sides  of  the  back  rod  read  downward.  The  feet  figures  are  red,  one  inch  long,  and 
the  one-tenth  figures  black,  eight-tenths  of  an  inch  long.  The  target  is  an  oval 
four  by  six  and  one-half  inches,  made  of  brass,  with  an  opening,  in  its  face,  two  and 
three-fourths  inches  long  by  one  inch  wide,  with  vernier  on  one  side  reading  to  one- 
hundreths. 

The  upper  sleeve  has  a  vernier  reading  to  one-hundredths  on  the  back  of  the  rod,  for 
the  rod-man  to  take  the  reading  when  the  two  parts  are  extended  beyond  six  feet 
six  inches. 

The  advantage  of  this  rod  is  that  the  engineer  can  check  the  rod-man’s  reading  to 
the  one-tenth  of  an  inch  when  looking  through  the  telescope  of  his  level. 

BOSTON  ROD. 

That  known  as  the  Boston  or  Yankee  Rod,  is  formed  of  two  pieces  of  light  haywood 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  k  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  151 


or  mahogany,  each  about  six  and  a  half  feet  long,  connected  together  by  a  tongie 
and  sliding  easily  by  each  other,  in  both  directions. 

One  side  is  furnished  with  a  clamp  screw  and  vernier  at  each  end,  the  other  carries 
the  divisions,  marked  on  strips  of  satin  wood,  inlaid  on  either  side. 

The  target  is  a  rectangle  of  wood,  fastened  near  one  end  of  the  divided  side,  and 
having  its  horizontal  line  just  three-tenths  from  the  extremity. 

The  target  being  fixed,  when  any  height  is  taken  above  six  feet,  the  rod  is  changed 
end  for  end,  and  the  division  read  by  the  other  vernier;  the  height  to  which  the  rod 
can  be  extended,  being  a  little  over  eleven  feet. 

THE  NEW  YORK  ROD. 

This  rod,  which  is  shown  in  the  engraving  as  cut  in  two,  so  that  the  ends  may  be 
exhibited,  is  made  of  satin  wood,  in  two  pieces  like  the  former,  but  sliding  one  from 
the  other,  the  same  end  being  always  held  on  the  ground,  and  the  graduations  start¬ 
ing  from  that  point. 

The  graduations  are  made  to  tenths  and  hundredths  of  a  foot,  the  tenth  figures 
being  black,  and  the  feet  marked  with  a  large  red  figure. 

The  front  surface,  on  which  the  target  moves,  reads  to  six  and  a  half  feet;  when  a 
greater  height  is  required,  the  horizontal  line  of  the  target  is  fixed  at  that  point,  and 
the  upper  half  of  the  rod,  carrying  the  target,  is  moved  out  of  the  lower,  tho  reading 
being  now  obtained  by  a  vernier  on  the  graduated  side,  up  to  an  elevation  of  twelve 
feet. 

The  mountings  of  this  rod  arc  differently  made  by  different  manufacturers.  We 
shall  give  those  which  we  have  adopted. 

The  target  is  round,  made  of  thick  brass,  having,  to  strengthen  it  still  more,  a  rib 
raised  on  the  edge,  which  also  protects  the  paint  from  being  defaced. 

The  target  moves  easily  on  the  rod,  being  kept  in  any  position  by  the  friction  of 
the  two  flat  plates  of  brass  which  are  pressed  against  two  alternative  sides,  by  small 
spiral  springs,  working  in  little  thimbles  attached  to  the  band  which  surrounds  the 
rod. 

There  is  also  a  clamp  screw  on  the  back,  by  which  it  may  be  securely  fastened  to 
any  part  of  the  rod. 

The  face  of  the  target  is  divided  into  quadrants,  by  horizontal  and  vertical  diame¬ 
ters,  which  are  also  the  boundaries  of  the  alternate  colors  with  which  it  is  planted. 

The  colors  usually  preferred  are  white  and  red:  sometimes  white  and  black. 

The  opening  in  the  face  of  the  target  is  a  little  more  than  a  tenth  of  a  foot  long,  so 
that  in  any  position  a  tenth,  or  a  foot  figure,  can  be  seen  on  the  surface  of  the  rod. 

The  right  edge  of  the  opening  is  chamfered,  and  divided  into  ten  equal  spaces,  cor¬ 
responding  with  nine  hundredths  on  the  rod  ;  the  divisions  start  from  the  horizontal 
line  which  separates  the  colors  of  the  face. 

The  vernier,  like  that  on  the  other  side  of  the  rod,  reads  to  thousandths  of  a  foot. 

The  clamp,  which  is  screwed  fast  to  the  lower  end  of  the  upper  sliding  piece,  has  a 
movable  part  which  can  be  brought  by  the  clamp  screw  firmly  against  the  front  sur¬ 
face  of  the  lower  half  of  the  rod,  and  thus  the  two  parts  immovably  fastened  to  each 
other  without  marring  the  divided  face  of  the  rod. 

CHAINS. 

SURVEYOR’S  CHAINS. 

Four  Pole  Chains. — The  ordinary  surveyor’s  chain  is  sixty-six  feet,  or  four  poles 
long,  composed  of  one  hundred  links,  each  connected  to  the  other  by  two  rings,  and 
furnished  with  tally  marks  at  the  end  of  every  ten  links. 

In  all  the  chains  we  manufacture,  the  rings  are  oval,  are  sawed,  and  well  closed, 
the  ends  of  the  wire  forming  the  hook  being  also  filed  and  bent  close  to  the  link  s-.* 
as  to  avoid  the  danger  of  “  kinking.” 

A  link  in  measurement  includes  a  ring  at  each  end. 

Tli c  handles  are  of  brass,  and  each  forms  part  of  the  end  links,  to  which  it ’s  ton  ■ 
nected  by  a  nut,  by  which  also  the  length  of  the  chain  is  adjusted. 

The  tallies  are  also  of  brass,  and  have  one,  two,  three  or  four  notches,  as  they  ari 
ten,  twenty,  thirty  or  forty  links  from  either  end;  the  fiftieth  link  is  rounded,  sc  as  o 
distinguish  it  from  the  others. 


152  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


Two  Pole  Chains. — In  place  of  the  four  pole  chain  just  described,  many  surveyors 
prefer  one  of  two  rods  or  thirty-three  feet  long,  having  but  fifty  links,  and  counted 
by  its  tallies  from  one  end  in  a  single  direction. 

Sizes  of  Wire. — Our  surveyors’  chains  are  made  of  the  best  refined  iron  wire,  of 
sizes  Nos.  7,  8  and  9,  as  may  be  preferred;  the  diameter  of  No.  9  wire  being  about  one- 
eighth  of  an  inch,  and  that  of  No.  8  wire  nearly  a  sixteenth  larger. 

ENGINEERS’  CHAINS 

Differ  from  the  preceding,  in  that  the  links  are  each  12  inches  long;  the  wire,  also,  is 
usually  much  stronger. 

They  are  either  fifty  or  one  hundred  feet  long,  and  are  furnished  with  handles, 
tallies,  &c.,  and  sometimes  with  a  swivel  in  the  middle  to  avoid  being  twisted  in  use. 

In  place  of  the  round  rings  commonly  made,  we  have  substituted  in  these  and  our 
other  chains,  rings  of  an  oval  form,  and  find  them  almost  one-third  stronger,  though 
made  of  the  same  kind  of  wire. 

Sizes  of  Wire. — The  wire  used  for  these  chains  is  commonly  of  No.  7. 

The  wire  is  of  the  first  quality,  and  the  whole  chain  is  made  in  the  most  accurate 
and  substantial  manner. 


STEEL  CHAINS. 

Chains  made  of  steel  wire,  though  more  costly  than  those  which  we  have  just  de¬ 
scribed,  are  yet  often  preferred  on  account  of  their  greater  lightness  and  strength. 

They  are  made  of  any  desired  size  or  length,  generally  of  No.  10,  rarely  of  No.  8 
wire,  and  are  very  stiff  and  strong. 

Brazed  Steel  Chains. — A  very  portable  and  excellent  measure  is  made,  by  a  light 
steel  chain,  each  link  and  ring  of  which  is  securely  brazed ,  after  being  united  together 
and  tested  the  wire  is  also  tempered. 

The  wire  generally  used  by  us  is  of  size  No.  12,  the  rings  are  of  oval  form,  the  chain, 
though  exceedingly  light,  is  almost  incapable  of  being  either  broken  or  stretched. 

Our  steel  brazed  chains  have  been  found  exceedingly  desirable  for  all  kinds  of 
measurement,  and  for  the  use  of  engineers  upon  railroads  and  canals  have  almost 
entirely  superseded  the  heavier  chains. 

GRUMMAN’S  PATENT  CHAINS. 

These  chains,  invented  and  patented  by  J.  M.  Grumman,  of  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  are 
made  of  very  light  steel  wire,  the  links  being  finely  tempered,  and,  as  shown  in  the 
illustration,  so  formed  at  the  ends  as  to  fold  together  readily,  and  thus  dispense  with 
the  use  of  rings. 

This  construction  gives  only  one-third  as  many  wearing  points  as  the  ordinary 
chain,  and  affords  the  utmost  facility  for  repairs,  from  five  to  ten  extra  links  being 
furnished  with  each  chain,  which  have  only  to  be  sprung  into  place  to  replace  such 
,  as  may  have  been  broken  ;  it  can  also  be  taken  apart  at  any  link,  and,  having  a  spring- 
catch  on  either  handle,  be  made  of  any  length  desired.  These  chains  are  made  of 
three  different  sizes  of  wire — the  first  two,  termed  drag  chains,  being  of  size  No.  12 
and  15,  and  used  for  measuring  on  the  surface,  like  the  ordinary  chain;  and  the 
second,  called  the  “suspended  chain,”  for  very  accurate  measurements,  made  of  No. 
18  wire,  and  with  spring-balance,  thermometer  and  spirit  level  attachments,  to  be 
held  above  the  surface  when  in  use,  the  extremities  of  the  chain  being  marked  upon 
the  ground  by  the  points  of  plummets  let  fall  from  the  ends  of  the  chain. 

.The  drag-chains  are  all  that  are  needed  in  common  land  surveys;  for  a  mixed 
■  practice  of  village  and  country  surveying,  the  spring-balance  should  be  attached  to 
the  drag-chains,  while  for  city  surveying  the  suspended  chain,  with  all  its  attach¬ 
ments,  is  the  proper  instrument. 

A  more  complete  description  of  these  chains,  and  of  chain  measurements  in  gene¬ 
ral,  written  by  the  inventor,  will  be  sent  by  us  to  any  one  applying  for  the  same. 

We  have  purchased  the  patent  for  the  Grumman  chains,  with  the  entire  right  to 
make  and  ;sell  them,  and  shall  hereafter  be  able  to  furnish  them  promptly. 

MARKING  PINS. 

In  chaining,  there  are  needed  ten  marking  pins,  or  chain  stakes,  made  either  of 
iron,  steel, or  brass  wire,  as  may  be  preferred,  about  fourteen  inches  long,  pointed  at 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  k  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK.  153 

one  end  to  enter  the  ground,  and  formed  into  a  ring  at  the  other,  for  convenience  in 
handling. 

They  are  sometimes  loaded  with  a  little  mass  of  lead  around  the  lower  end,  so  as 
to  answer  as  a  plumb  when  dropped  to  the  ground,  from  the  suspended  end  of  the 
chain. 

TO  USE  THE  CHAIN. 

In  using  the  chain  its  length  must  be  taken  from  its  extreme  ends,  and  the  pins 
placed  on  the  outside  of  the  handles  ;  it  must  be  drawn  straight  and  taut,  and  care¬ 
fully  examined  to  detect  any  kinks  or  other  causes  of  inaccuracy. 

Our  chains  are  all  carefully  tested  at  every  ten,  sometimes  at  every  link,  and  in 
their  whole  length  by  the  U.  S.  standard,  and  when  new  may  always  be  relied  upon 
as  correct. 

But  as  all  will  alter,  more  or  less,  after  long  use  in  the  field,  it  will  be  best  for  the 
surveyor  to  carefully  lay  down  on  a  level  surface  the  exact  length  of  the  chain  when 
yet  new,  marking  also  its  extreme  ends  by  monuments  which  will  not  be  liable  to 
disturbance. 

He  will  thus  have  a  standard  measure  of  his  own  to  which  the  chain  can  be  ad¬ 
justed  from  time  to  time,  and  again  be  used  with  perfect  confidence. 

TAPE  MEASURES. 

The  best  are  Chesterman’s  steel  tapes,  made  of  a  thin  ribbon  of  steel,  which  is 
jointed  at  intervals,  and  wound  up  in  a  leathern  case,  having  a  folding  handle. 

These  tapes  are  of  all  lengths,  from  three  to  one  hundred  feet,  divided  into  inches 
and  links,  or  tenths  of  a  foot,  and  links,  the  figures  and  graduations  being  raised  on 
the  surface  of  the  steel. 

The  next  best  and  most  commonly  used  are  Chesterman’s  metallic  tape  measures. 

These  are  of  linen,  and  have  also  fine  brass  wires  interwoven  through  their  whole 
length. 

They  are  thus  measurably  correct,  even  when  wet. 

They  are  mounted  like  the  steel  tapes,  of  like  lengths,  and  similarly  graduated. 

The  best  linen  tape  measures  No.  10G5  are  wove  of  linen  only,  and  are  varnished  to 
prevent  the  moisture  from  expanding  or  contracting  them. 


CHAPTER  XXV. 

INFORMATION  TO  PURCHASERS  OF  SURVEYING  COM¬ 
PASSES,  TRANSITS  AND  LEVELS. 

Instruments  Wanted. — In  regard  to  the  best  kind  of  instruments  for  particular 
purposes,  we  would  here  say,  that  where  only  common  surveying  or  the  bearing  of 
lines  in  the  surveys  for  county  maps  is  required,  a  plain  compass  is  all  that  is  neces¬ 
sary.  In  cases  where  the  variation  of  the  needle  is  to  be  allowed,  as  in  retracing  the 
lines  of  an  old  survey,  &c.,  the  vernier  compass  or  the  vernier  transit  is  required. 

Where,  in  addition  to  -he  variation  of  the  needle,  horizontal  angles  are  to  be  taken, 
and  in  cases  of  local  attraction,  the  railroad  compass  is  preferable  ;  and  for  a  mixed 
practice  of  surveying  and  engineering,  we  consider  the  surveyor’s  transit  superior  to 
any  instrument  made  by  us  or  any  other  manufacturers. 

In  the  surveys  of  U.  S.  public  lands,  the  county  and  township  lines  are  required  to 
be  run  by  such  instruments  as  the  solar  compass. 

Where  engineering  is  the  exclusive  design,  the  engineer’s  transit  and  the  leveling 
instrument  are  of  course  indispensable. 

The  builders’  level  is  intended  for  laying  out  mill  seats  and  determining  the  levels 
of  buildings  in  course  of  erection. 

Warranty. — All  our  instruments  are  examined  and  tested  by  us  in  person,  and  are 
Bent  to  the  purchaser  adjusted  and  ready  for  immediate  use 

They  are  warranted  correct  in  all  their  parts — we  agreeing  in  the  event  of  any 


154  JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK. 


defect  appearing  after  reasonable  use,  to  repair  or  replace  with  a  new  and  perfect  in¬ 
strument,  promptly  and  at  our  own  cost,  express  charges  included,  or  we  will  refund 
the  money  and  the  express  charges  paid  by  the  customer. 

Instances  may  sometimes  occur,  in  a  business  as  largely  and  widely  extended  as 
ours,  where,  owing  to  careless  transportation,  or  to  defects  escaping  the  closest 
scrutiny  of  the  maker,  instruments  may  reach  our  customers  in  bad  condition.  We 
consider  the  retention  of  such  instruments  in  all  cases  an  injury  very  much  greater 
to  us  than  to  the  purchaser  himself. 

Packing,  &c. — Each  instrument  is  packed  in  a  well  finished  mahogany  case,  fur¬ 
nished  with  lock  and  key  and  brass  hooks,  the  larger  ones  having  besides  these,  a 
leather  strap  for  convenience  in  carrying.  Each  case  is  provided  with  screw  drivers, 
adjusting  pin  and  wrench  for  centre  pin,  and,  if  accompanied  by  a  tripod,  with  a  brass 
plumb-bob  ;  with  all  instruments  for  taking  angles,  without  the  needle,  a  reading 
microscope  is  also  furnished. 

When  sent  to  the  purchaser,  the  mahogany  cases  are  carefully  enclosed  in  outside 
packing  boxes,  of  pine,  made  a  little  larger  on  all  sides  to  allow  the  introduction  of 
elastic  material,  and  so  effectually  are  our  instruments  protected  by  these  precautions, 
that  of  several  thousand  sent  out  by  us  during  the  last  twenty  years,  in  all  seasons, 
by  every  mode  of  transportation,  and  to  all  parts  of  the  Union  and  the  Canadas,  not 
more  than  three  or  four  have  sustained  any  serious  injury. 

Finish  of  Instruments. — Customers  ordering  instruments,  will  do  us  a  favor  by 
mentioning  whether  they  prefer  them  of  bright,  or  bronze  finish,  the  cost  being  the 
same  in  either  case. 

If  no  direction  is  given,  we  usually  send  instruments  finished  bronze. 

Terms  of  Payment  are  aniformly  cash,  and  we  have  but  one  price,  whether 
ordered  in  person  or  by  mail.  Our  terms  are  as  low  as  we  think  instruments  of  equal 
quality  can  be  made,  and  will  not  be  varied  from  the  list  given  on  the  previous 
pages. 


v 


REPAIR  OF  INSTRUMENTS. 

Many  instruments  of  our  own  and  others’  make,  come  to  us  every  year  for  refitting 
and  repairs,  and  so  much  correspondence  arises  therefrom,  that  we  are  led  to  believe 
that  a  brief  statement  in  this  place,  of  the  cost  of  such  repairs,  &c.,  will  be  of  service 
to  our  customers  and  ourselves. 

Most  instruments  sent  to  us  for  repairs  are  injured  by  falls ;  many  are  worn  and 
defective  in  parts  after  long  use  ;  and  others  are  sent  for  repolishing  and  renovation. 

We  advise  our  customers  having  instruments  in  need  of  repairs,  &c.,  to  send  them 
immediately  to  us,  as  our  facilities  enable  us  to  do  the  work  much  more  economically 
and  promptly  than  any  other  maker  however  accessible. 

They  should  always,  when  practicable,  be  placed  in  their  own  boxes,  and  these  in¬ 
closed  in  an  outside  packing  case,  an  inch  larger  in  all  its  dimensions,  that  the 
interval  between  the  two  may  be  filled  with  paper  wadding,  hay  or  fine  shavings. 

A  note,  specifying  the  repairs  needed,  should  accompany  the  instrument,  and  a  letter 
should  also  be  sent  by  mail  to  us,  giving  not  only  directions  as  to  the  repairs,  but 
also  stating  when  the  return  of  the  instrument  is  required,  and  the  precise  location  to 
which  it  should  be  forwarded.  It  should  also  be  remembered  that  each  instrument 
is  made  to  fit  its  own  spindle  and  no  other;  and  therefore  this  part  with  the  parallel 
plates  and  leveling  screws,  if  it  has  any,  should  always  be  sent  with  it. 

The  legs  and  brass  head  in  which  they  are  inserted  need  never  be  sent,  unless 
themselves  in  need  of  repairs. 

Compasses. — These  come  to  us  with  the  plates  sprung,  the  sights  bent  or  broken,  the 
glass  or  level  vials  fractured,  and  the  pivot  so  dulled  as  to  render  the  needle  sluggish 
and  unreliable.  The  cost  of  repairing  the  defects  above  named,  ranges  from  2  to  8  or 
10  dollars.  A  new  pair  of  sights  fitted  costs  6  dollars ;  a  new  needle,  with  jeweled 
centre  and  pivot  complete,  $8.00;  a  new  jeweled  centre,  $2.50. 

The  compass  should  always  be  accompanied  by  the  ball  spindle,  and  if  a  new  ball 
spindle  is  required,  the  whole  instrument,  or  at  least  the  socket  in  which  the  spindle 


■  * 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  k  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA  AND  NEW  YORK  155 

fits,  should  be  sent  with  the  letter  of  advice  to  us:  a  new  ball  spindle  costs  two 
dollars. 

Transit  Instruments. — The  repairs  of  the  Vernier  Transits  cost  about  the  same  as 
those  of  the  compasses  above  stated. 

The  injuries  sustained  by  the  falls  of  Engineers'  and  Surveyors’  Transits  are  usually 
much  more  serious  ;  in  these  the  plates,  standards  and  cross-bar  of  telescope  are  often 
bent,  and  the  sockets  or  centres  usually  so  deranged  as  to  be  entirely  useless. 

The  cost  of  repairing  an  instrument  with  such  injuries,  ranges  from  10  to  30  or 
even  50  dollars,  the  new  sockets  alone  costing  from  10  to  20  dollars. 

Leveling  Instruments  are  generally  much  less  injured  by  falling  than  Transits, 
the  damages  being  included  usually  in  the  bending  of  the  cross-bar,  the  springing  of 
the  sockets,  and  the  breaking  of  the  level  vial. 

The  cost  of  repairs  varies  from  5  to  15  dollars ;  a  new  level  vial  set  in  the  tube 
eosts  two  dollars. 

Re-Polishing  Instruments. — The  cost  of  re-polishing  an  instrument,  involving  also 
of  course  its  complete  renovation  and  adjustment,  varies  with  the  different  kinds,  but 
may  be  stated  generally  as  follows : 


Compasses,  from . $5  to  $8. 

Transits,  do . 10  to  16. 

Levels,  do . 10  to  13. 


No  additional  charge  is  made  for  bronzing  or  blackening  an  instrument  when  re¬ 
polished. 

Payment  of  Repairs,  &c.,  may  be  made  at  the  express  office  where  the  instrument 
is  received,  the  customer  paying  for  the  first  transportation  of  the  instruments  to  us 
or  not  as  he  may  prefer.  Whenever  the  freight  is  paid  in  advance,  the  express  receipt 
should  be  mailed  immediately  to  us. 


INDEX. 


CHAPTER  I. 

Mathematical  Instruments  Brass, 

CHAPTER  II. 

Mathematical  Instruments  op  German  Silver, 

CHAPTER  III. 

Celebrated  Swiss  Drawing  Instruments,  . 


CHAPTER  IV. 

Alteneder’s  Patent  Joint  Drawing  Instruments, 

* 

CHAPTER  V. 

Protractors  of  Horn,  Brass,  and  German  Silver,  . 


CHAPTER  VI. 

t 

Ivory  Sectors,  Scales,  and  Protractors, . 

CHAPTER  VII. 

Boxwood  Scales  and  Protractors, . 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

Steel  Rules,  Gauges,  Squares,  Calipers  for  Machinists,  Straight  Edges,  &c., 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Triangles,  Curves,  Drawing  Boards,  Fastening  Tacks,  Horn  Centres,  T 
Squares,  Pantographs,  and  Parallel  Rulers, . 

CHAPTER  X. 

Drawing  Stationery, . 

CHAPTER  XI. 

Pocket  Compasses, . . 


PAGE 

3 


8 


21 


33 


35 


38 


40 


42 


46 


55 


f>4 


158 


INDEX. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

FAGB 

Surveyor’s  Compasses,  Transits,  Levels,  and  Leveling  Rods,  .  .  .68 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

Pocket  Sextants,  Odometers,  Chains,  Tape  Measures,  and  Pocket  Rules,  .  78 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

Catalogue  of  Scientific  Books, . 83 

CHAPTER  XV. 

The  Use  of  Mathematical  Instruments, . 102 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

Surveying  Instruments, . 118 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

Surveying  Instruments — The  Vernier  Transit, . 123 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 

The  Railroad  Compass, . 133 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

The  Surveyor’s  Transit, . 134 

CHAPTER  XX. 

The  Solar  Compass, .  ...  137 

CHAPTER  XXL 

The  Engineer’s  Transit, . 139 

CHAPTER  XXII. 

The  Leveling  Instrument, . 141 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 

Hand  Levels,  147 

CHAPTER  XXIV. 

General  Matters, . 149 


CHAPTER  XXV. 

Information  to  Purchasers  of  Surveying  Compasses,  Transits,  and  Levels,  153 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO. 

Mathematical,  Optical  &  Philosophical 

INSTRUMENT  MAKERS  AND  IMPORTERS, 


No,  9 2d  Chestnut  Street ,  Philadelphia, 

AND 

^  No,  001  Broadway,  New  York,  . 


Either  of  the  following  numbers  of  our  Priced 
and  Illustrated  Catalogues  will  be  furnished,  on 
application,  and  sent  by  mail,  on  receipt  of  ten 
cents,  to  all  parts  of  the  United  States,  Canada, 
and  the  West  Indies.  Each  number  of  our  Cata¬ 
logue  is  a  complete  index  to  the  department  it 
represents 

Notice. — Having  expended  a  large  amount  of 
money  for  drawing  and  engraving  the  illustrations 
in  this  Catalogue,  we  have  taken  the  precauti%ft  of 
protecting  ourselves  by  a  copyright,  against  “pirat¬ 
ing?  by  unprincipled  dealers,  and  shall  prosecute 
such  to  the  full  extent  of  the  law,  in  all  cases  de- 
teete^of  copies  having  been  made  from  the  illus¬ 
trations  or  reading  matter  thereof. 

PART  FIRST. 

MATHEMATICAL  INSTRUMENTS.  158  Pages. 

PART  SECOND. 

OPTICAL  INSTRUMENTS.  110  Pages. 

TART  THIRD. 

MAGIC  LANTERNS,  STEREOPTICONS,  AND  DIS¬ 
SOLVING  VIEW  APPARATUS.  92  Pages. 

PART  FOURTH. 

METEOROLOGICAL  AND  PHILOSOPHICAL  INSTRU¬ 
MENTS  AND  SCHOOL  APPARATUS.  68  Pages. 


GETTY  CENTER  LIBRARY 


3125  00140  5857 


JAMES  W.  QUEEN  &  CO. 


No.  924  Chestnut  Street,  Philadelphia, 


AND 


No.  601  Broadway,  New  York. 


- .  • 


•A-O-EUnTTS  foe, 


,  .  W-  &  L.  E.  GURLEY’S  COMPASSES,  TRANSITS  AND  LEVELS. 

*  *  .  J.  KERN’S  -SWISS  DRAWING  INSTRUMENTS, 

j  ,  _  R.  &  J.  BECK,  London,  Opticians. 

J.  'SCIIROEDER’S  MECHANICAL  MODELS,  Darmstadt,  Germany. 

•  ,  THIRTY-SECOND  EDITION.  — PART  FIRST. 


Sherman  &  Co.,  Printers,  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


